Hitachi L2002 Users Manual L200 Series Inverter Instruction

L2002 to the manual 01e20bc0-e116-2bb4-e974-fd8f5ca0035b

2015-01-24

: Hitachi Hitachi-L2002-Users-Manual-313561 hitachi-l2002-users-manual-313561 hitachi pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 304

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Cover

L2002 Series Inverter
Instruction Manual
• Single-phase Input 200V Class
• Three-phase Input 200V Class
• Three-phase Input 400V Class

Manual Number: NB675X
Sept. 2006

After reading this manual,
keep it handy for future reference.

Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.

L2002 Inverter

Safety Messages
For the best results with the L2002 Series inverter, carefully read this manual and all of
the warning labels attached to the inverter before installing and operating it, and follow
the instructions exactly. Keep this manual handy for quick reference.

Definitions and Symbols
A safety instruction (message) includes a “Safety Alert Symbol” and a signal word or
phrase such as WARNING or CAUTION. Each signal word has the following meaning:
HIGH VOLTAGE: This symbol indicates high voltage. It calls your attention to items
or operations that could be dangerous to you and other persons operation this equipment.
Read the message and follow the instructions carefully.
WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, can result in
serious injury or death.
CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, can result in
minor to moderate injury, or serious damage to the product. The situation described in
the CAUTION may, if not avoided, lead to serious results. Important safety measures
are described in CAUTION (as well as WARNING), so be sure to observe them.
1

Step 1: Indicates a step in a series of action steps required to accomplish a goal. The
number of the step will be contained in the step symbol.
NOTE: Notes indicate an area or subject of special merit, emphasizing either the
product’s capabilities or common errors in operation or maintenance.
TIP: Tips give a special instruction that can save time or provide other benefits while
installing or using the product. The tip calls attention to an idea that may not be obvious
to first-time users of the product.

Hazardous High Voltage
HIGH VOLTAGE: Motor control equipment and electronic controllers are connected to
hazardous line voltages. When servicing drives and electronic controllers, there may be
exposed components with housings or protrusions at or above line potential. Extreme
care should be taken to protect against shock.
Stand on an insulating pad and make it a habit to use only one hand when checking components. Always work with another person in case an emergency occurs. Disconnect
power before checking controllers or performing maintenance. Be sure equipment is
properly grounded. Wear safety glasses whenever working on electronic controllers or
rotating machinery.

ii
General Precautions - Read These First!
WARNING: This equipment should be installed, adjusted, and serviced by qualified
electrical maintenance personnel familiar with the construction and operation of the
equipment and the hazards involved. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
bodily injury.
WARNING: The user is responsible for ensuring that all driven machinery, drive train
mechanism not supplied by Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd., and process
line material are capable of safe operation at an applied frequency of 150% of the
maximum selected frequency range to the AC motor. Failure to do so can result in
destruction of equipment and injury to personnel should a single-point failure occur.
WARNING: For equipment protection, install a ground leakage type breaker with a fast
response circuit capable of handling large currents. The ground fault protection circuit is
not designed to protect against personal injury.
WARNING: HAZARD OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK. DISCONNECT INCOMING
POWER BEFORE WORKING ON THIS CONTROL.
WARNING: Wait at least five (5) minutes after turning OFF the input power supply
before performing maintenance or an inspection. Otherwise, there is the danger of
electric shock.
CAUTION: These instructions should be read and clearly understood before working
on L2002 series equipment.
CAUTION: Proper grounds, disconnecting devices and other safety devices and their
location are the responsibility of the user and are not provided by Hitachi Industrial
Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
CAUTION: Be sure to connect a motor thermal disconnect switch or overload device to
the L2002 series controller to assure that the inverter will shut down in the event of an
overload or an overheated motor.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Dangerous voltage exists until power light is OFF. Wait at least five
(5) minutes after input power is disconnected before performing maintenance.
WARNING: This equipment has high leakage current and must be permanently (fixed)
hard-wired to earth ground via two independent cables.

L2002 Inverter

WARNING: Rotating shafts and above-ground electrical potentials can be hazardous.
Therefore, it is strongly recommended that all electrical work conform to the National
Electrical Codes and local regulations. Installation, alignment and maintenance should
be performed only by qualified personnel.
Factory-recommended test procedures included in the instruction manual should be
followed. Always disconnect electrical power before working on the unit.
CAUTION:
a) Class I motor must be connected to earth ground via low resistive path (< 0.1Ω)
b) Any motor used must be of a suitable rating.
c) Motors may have hazardous moving parts. In this event suitable protection must
be provided.
CAUTION: Alarm connection may contain hazardous live voltage even when inverter is
disconnected. When removing the front cover for maintenance or inspection, confirm
that incoming power for alarm connection is completely disconnected.
CAUTION: Hazardous (main) terminals for any interconnection (motor, contact
breaker, filter, etc.) must be inaccessible in the final installation.
CAUTION: This equipment should be installed in IP54 or equivalent (see EN60529)
enclosure. The end application must be in accordance with BS EN60204-1. Refer to the
section “Choosing a Mounting Location” on page 2–9. The diagram dimensions are to
be suitably amended for your application.
CAUTION: Connection to field wiring terminals must be reliably fixed having two
independent means of mechanical support. Use a termination with cable support (figure
below), or strain relief, cable clamp, etc.
Terminal (ring lug)

Cable support

Cable

CAUTION: A double-pole disconnection device must be fitted to the incoming main
power supply close to the inverter. Additionally, a protection device meeting IEC947-1/
IEC947-3 must be fitted at this point (protection device data shown in “Determining
Wire and Fuse Sizes” on page 2–17).
NOTE: The above instructions, together with any other requirements highlighted in this
manual, must be followed for continued LVD (European Low Voltage Directive)
compliance.

iii

iv
Index to Warnings and Cautions in This Manual
Cautions and Warnings for Orientation and Mounting Procedures
CAUTION: Hazard of electrical shock. Disconnect incoming power
before working on this control. Wait five (5) minutes before removing the
front cover.

....... 2–3

CAUTION: Be sure to install the unit on flame-resistant material such as
a steel plate. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.

....... 2–9

CAUTION: Be sure not to place any flammable materials near the
inverter. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.

....... 2–9

CAUTION: Be sure not to let the foreign matter enter vent openings in
the inverter housing, such as wire clippings, spatter from welding, metal
shavings, dust, etc. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.

....... 2–9

CAUTION: Be sure to install the unit on a perpendicular wall that is not
subject to vibration. Otherwise, it may fall and cause injury to personnel.

....... 2–9

CAUTION: Be sure not to install or operate an inverter that is damaged
or has missing parts. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.

....... 2–9

CAUTION: Be sure to install the inverter in a well-ventilated room that
does not have direct exposure to sunlight, a tendency for high temperature, high humidity or dew condensation, high levels of dust, corrosive
gas, explosive gas, inflammable gas, grinding-fluid mist, salt damage,
etc. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.

....... 2–9

CAUTION: Be sure to maintain the specified clearance area around the
inverter and to provide adequate ventilation. Otherwise, the inverter may
overheat and cause equipment damage or fire.

..... 2–10

Wiring - Warnings for Electrical Practices and Wire Specifications
WARNING: “Use 60/75°C Cu wire only” or equivalent.

..... 2–16

WARNING: “Open Type Equipment.”

..... 2–16

WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more
than 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes, 240 V maximum.” For models
with suffix N or L.

..... 2–16

L2002 Inverter

WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more
than 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes, 480 V maximum.” For models
with suffix H.

.... 2–16

HIGH VOLTAGE: Be sure to ground the unit. Otherwise, there is a
danger of electric shock and/or fire.

.... 2–16

HIGH VOLTAGE: Wiring work shall be carried out only by qualified
personnel. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/or fire.

.... 2–16

HIGH VOLTAGE: Implement wiring after checking that the power
supply is OFF. Otherwise, you may incur electric shock and/or fire.

.... 2–16

HIGH VOLTAGE: Do not connect wiring to an inverter or operate an
inverter that is not mounted according the instructions given in this
manual. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/or injury to
personnel.

.... 2–16

WARNING: Make sure the input power to the inverter is OFF. If the drive
has been powered, leave it OFF for five minutes before continuing.

.... 2–22

Wiring - Cautions for Electrical Practices
CAUTION: Fasten the screws with the specified fastening torque in the
table below. Check for any loosening of screws. Otherwise, there is the
danger of fire.

.... 2–18

CAUTION: Be sure that the input voltage matches the inverter specifications: • Single/Three phase 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz (up to 2.2kW) for
NFEF/NFU models • Three phase 200 to 240V 50/60Hz (above 2.2kW)
for LFU models • Three phase 380 to 480 V 50/60Hz for HFEF models

.... 2–20

L2002 Inverter
Power Input

Output to Motor

vi
CAUTION: Be sure not to connect an AC power supply to the output
terminals. Otherwise, there is the possibility of damage to the inverter
and the danger of injury and/or fire.

..... 2–20

CAUTION: Remarks for using ground fault interrupter breakers in the
main power supply: Adjustable frequency inverters with CE-filters (RFIfilter) and shielded (screened) motor cables have a higher leakage current
toward Earth GND. Especially at the moment of switching ON this can
cause an inadvertent trip of ground fault interrupters. Because of the
rectifier on the input side of the inverter there is the possibility to stall the
switch-off function through small amounts of DC current. Please observe
the following: • Use only short time-invariant and pulse current-sensitive
ground fault interrupters with higher trigger current. • Other components
should be secured with separate ground fault interrupters. • Ground fault
interrupters in the power input wiring of an inverter are not an absolute
protection against electric shock.

..... 2–20

CAUTION: Be sure to install a fuse in each phase of the main power
supply to the inverter. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.

..... 2–20

CAUTION: For motor leads, ground fault interrupter breakers and
electromagnetic contactors, be sure to size these components properly
(each must have the capacity for rated current and voltage). Otherwise,
there is the danger of fire.

..... 2–20

Powerup Test Caution Messages
CAUTION: The heat sink fins will have a high temperature. Be careful
not to touch them. Otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

..... 2–23

.... 2–23,
..... 2–29

CAUTION: Check the following before and during the powerup test.
Otherwise, there is the danger of equipment damage. • Is the shorting bar
between the [+1] and [+] terminals installed? DO NOT power or operate
the inverter if the jumper is removed. • Is the direction of the motor
rotation correct? • Did the inverter trip during acceleration or deceleration? • Were the rpm and frequency meter readings as expected? • Were
there any abnormal motor vibrations or noise?

..... 2–23

L2002 Inverter

Warnings for Configuring Drive Parameters
WARNING: When parameter B012, level of electronic thermal setting, is
set to motor FLA rating (Full Load Ampere nameplate rating), the
inverter provides solid state motor overload protection at 115% of motor
FLA or equivalent. If parameter B012 exceeds the motor FLA rating, the
motor may overheat and be damaged. Parameter B012, level of electronic
thermal setting, is a variable parameter.

.... 3–36

Cautions for Configuring Drive Parameters
CAUTION: Be careful to avoid specifying a braking time that is long
enough to cause motor overheating. If you use DC braking, we recommend using a motor with a built-in thermistor, and wiring it to the
inverter’s thermistor input (see “Thermistor Thermal Protection” on
page 4–25). Also refer to the motor manufacturer’s specifications for
duty-cycle recommendations during DC braking.

.... 3–21

Warnings for Operations and Monitoring
WARNING: Be sure to turn ON the input power supply only after closing
the front case. While the inverter is energized, be sure not to open the
front case. Otherwise, there is the danger of electric shock.

...... 4–3

WARNING: Be sure not to operate electrical equipment with wet hands.
Otherwise, there is the danger of electric shock.

...... 4–3

WARNING: While the inverter is energized, be sure not to touch the
inverter terminals even when the motor is stopped. Otherwise, there is the
danger of electric shock.

...... 4–3

WARNING: If the Retry Mode is selected, the motor may suddenly
restart after a trip stop. Be sure to stop the inverter before approaching the
machine (be sure to design the machine so that safety for personnel is
secure even if it restarts.) Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.

...... 4–3

WARNING: If the power supply is cut OFF for a short period of time, the
inverter may restart operation after the power supply recovers if the Run
command is active. If a restart may pose danger to personnel, so be sure
to use a lock-out circuit so that it will not restart after power recovery.
Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.

...... 4–3

WARNING: The Stop Key is effective only when the Stop function is
enabled. Be sure to enable the Stop Key separately from the emergency
stop. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.

...... 4–3

WARNING: During a trip event, if the alarm reset is applied and the Run
command is present, the inverter will automatically restart. Be sure to
apply the alarm reset only after verifying the Run command is OFF.
Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.

...... 4–3

vii

viii
WARNING: Be sure not to touch the inside of the energized inverter or to
put any conductive object into it. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric
shock and/or fire.

....... 4–3

WARNING: If power is turned ON when the Run command is already
active, the motor will automatically start and injury may result. Before
turning ON the power, confirm that the RUN command is not present.

....... 4–3

WARNING: When the Stop key function is disabled, pressing the Stop
key does not stop the inverter, nor will it reset a trip alarm.

....... 4–3

WARNING: Be sure to provide a separate, hard-wired emergency stop
switch when the application warrants it.

....... 4–3

WARNING: If the power is turned ON and the Run command is already
active, the motor starts rotation and is dangerous! Before turning power
ON, confirm that the Run command is not active.

..... 4–12

WARNING: After the Reset command is given and the alarm reset
occurs, the motor will restart suddenly if the Run command is already
active. Be sure to set the alarm reset after verifying that the Run
command is OFF to prevent injury to personnel.

..... 4–24

Cautions for Operations and Monitoring
CAUTION: The heat sink fins will have a high temperature. Be careful
not to touch them. Otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

....... 4–2

CAUTION: The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low
speed to high speed. Be sure check the capability and limitations of the
motor and machine before operating the inverter. Otherwise, it may cause
injury to personnel.

....... 4–2

CAUTION: It is possible to damage the inverter or other devices if your
application exceeds the maximum current or voltage characteristics of a
connection point.

....... 4–4

CAUTION: Be sure to turn OFF power to the inverter before changing
the SR/SK switch position. Otherwise, damage to the inverter circuitry
may occur.

....... 4–9

CAUTION: Be careful not to turn PID Clear ON and reset the integrator
sum when the inverter is in Run Mode (output to motor is ON). Otherwise, this could cause the motor to decelerate rapidly, resulting in a trip.

..... 4–28

L2002 Inverter

Warnings and Cautions for Troubleshooting and Maintenance
WARNING: Wait at least five (5) minutes after turning OFF the input
power supply before performing maintenance or an inspection. Otherwise, there is the danger of electric shock.

...... 6–2

WARNING: Make sure that only qualified personnel will perform
maintenance, inspection, and part replacement. Before starting to work,
remove any metallic objects from your person (wristwatch, bracelet,
etc.). Be sure to use tools with insulated handles. Otherwise, there is a
danger of electric shock and/or injury to personnel.

...... 6–2

WARNING: Never remove connectors by pulling on its wire leads (wires
for cooling fan and logic P.C.board). Otherwise, there is a danger of fire
due to wire breakage and/or injury to personnel.

...... 6–2

CAUTION: Do not connect the megger to any control circuit terminals
such as intelligent I/O, analog terminals, etc. Doing so could cause
damage to the inverter.

.... 6–10

CAUTION: Never test the withstand voltage (HIPOT) on the inverter.
The inverter has a surge protector between the main circuit terminals
above and the chassis ground.

.... 6–10

HIGH VOLTAGE: Be careful not to touch wiring or connector terminals
when working with the inverters and taking measurements. Be sure to
place the measurement circuitry components above in an insulated
housing before using them.

.... 6–14

General Warnings and Cautions
WARNING: Never modify the unit. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/
or injury.
CAUTION: Withstand voltage tests and insulation resistance tests (HIPOT) are
executed before the units are shipped, so there is no need to conduct these tests before
operation.
CAUTION: Do not attach or remove wiring or connectors when power is applied. Also,
do not check signals during operation.
CAUTION: Be sure to connect the grounding terminal to earth ground.
CAUTION: When inspecting the unit, be sure to wait five minutes after tuning OFF the
power supply before opening the cover.
CAUTION: Do do not discard the inverter with household waste.
Contact an industrial waste management company in your area who can
treat industrial waste without polluting the environment.

x
CAUTION: Do not stop operation by switching OFF electromagnetic contactors on the
primary or secondary sides of the inverter.
Ground fault
interrupter
Power
Input

U, V, W

L1, L2, L3

Motor

Inverter
PCS

When there has been a sudden power failure while an operation instruction is active, then
the unit may restart operation automatically after the power failure has ended. If there is
a possibility that such an occurrence may harm humans, then install an electromagnetic
contactor (Mgo) on the power supply side, so that the circuit does not allow automatic
restarting after the power supply recovers. If the optional remote operator is used and the
retry function has been selected, this will also cause automatic restarting when a Run
command is active. So, please be careful.
CAUTION: Do not insert leading power factor capacitors or surge absorbers between
the output terminals of the inverter and motor.
Ground fault
interrupter
Power
Input

Surge absorber

L1, L2, L3

U, V, W
Inverter

GND lug

Motor

Leading power
factor capacitor

CAUTION: MOTOR TERMINAL SURGE VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FILTER
(For the 400 V CLASS)
In a system using an inverter with the voltage control PWM system, a voltage surge
caused by the cable constants such as the cable length (especially when the distance
between the motor and inverter is 10 m or more) and cabling method may occur at the
motor terminals. A dedicated filter of the 400 V class for suppressing this voltage surge
is available. Be sure to install a filter in this situation.

L2002 Inverter

CAUTION: EFFECTS OF POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ON INVERTER
In the cases below involving a general-purpose inverter, a large peak current can flow on
the power supply side, sometimes destroying the converter module:
1. The unbalance factor of the power supply is 3% or higher.
2. The power supply capacity is at least 10 times greater than the inverter capacity (or
the power supply capacity is 500 kVA or more).
3. Abrupt power supply changes are expected, due to conditions such as:
a. Several inverters are interconnected with a short bus.
b. A thyristor converter and an inverter are interconnected with a short bus.
c. An installed phase advance capacitor opens and closes.
Where these conditions exist or when the connected equipment must be highly reliable,
you MUST install an input-side AC reactor of 3% (at a voltage drop at rated current)
with respect to the supply voltage on the power supply side. Also, where the effects of an
indirect lightning strike are possible, install a lightning conductor.
CAUTION: SUPPRESSION FOR NOISE INTERFERENCE FROM INVERTER
The inverter uses many semiconductor switching elements such as transistors and
IGBTs. Thus, a radio receiver or measuring instrument located near the inverter is
susceptible to noise interference.
To protect the instruments from erroneous operation due to noise interference, they
should be used well away from the inverter. It is also effective to shield the whole
inverter structure.
The addition of an EMI filter on the input side of the inverter also reduces the effect of
noise from the commercial power line on external devices.
Note that the external dispersion of noise from the power line can be minimized by
connecting an EMI filter on the primary side of inverter.
EMI Filter

Inverter

Motor

noise
EMI Filter

Completely ground the
enclosed panel, metal
screen, etc. with as
short a wire as possible.

Inverter

Remote
Operator

Motor

Grounded frame
Conduit or shielded
cable—to be grounded

xii
CAUTION: When the EEPROM error E08 occurs, be sure to confirm the setting values
again.
CAUTION: When using normally closed active state settings (C011 to C015) for externally commanded Forward or Reverse terminals [FW] or [RV], the inverter may start
automatically when the external system is powered OFF or disconnected from the
inverter! So, do not use normally closed active state settings for Forward or Reverse
terminals [FW] or [RV] unless your system design protects against unintended motor
operation.
CAUTION: In all the illustrations in this manual, covers and safety devices are
occasionally removed to describe the details. While operating the product, make sure
that the covers and safety devices are placed as they were specified originally and
operate it according to the instruction manual.

UL® Cautions, Warnings, and Instructions
Wiring Warnings for Electrical Practices and Wire Sizes
The Warnings and instructions in this section summarize the procedures necessary to
ensure an inverter installation complies with Underwriters Laboratories® guidelines.
WARNING: “Use 60/75°C Cu wire only” or equivalent.
WARNING: “Open Type Equipment.”
WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000
rms symmetrical amperes, 240 V maximum.” For models with suffix N or L.
WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000
rms symmetrical amperes, 480 V maximum.” For models with suffix H.
WARNING: “Hot surface—risk of burn.”
WARNING: “Install device in pollution degree 2 environment.”
WARNING: “Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature 50°C” or equivalent.
WARNING: “Risk of electric shock—capacitor discharge time is at least 5 minutes.”
WARNING: “Solid state motor overload protection is provided in each model.”
WARNING: “Tightening torque and wire range for field wiring terminals are marked
adjacent to the terminal or on the wiring diagram.”

xiii

L2002 Inverter

Terminal Tightening Torque and Wire Size
The wire size range and tightening torque for field wiring terminals are presented in the
tables below.
Input
Voltage

200V

400V

Motor Output
Inverter Model

Power Terminal
Wiring Size
Range (AWG)

ft-lbs

(N-m)

0.6

0.8

0.9

1.2

1.5

2.0

0.9

1.2

1.5

2.0

0.2

1/4

L200-002NFE(F)2/NFU2

0.4

1/2

L200-004NFE(F)2/NFU2

0.55

3/4

L200-005NFE(F)2

0.75

1.1

1 1/2

1.5

L200-015NFE(F)2/NFU2

2.2

L200-022NFE(F)2/NFU2

3.7

L200-037LFU2

5.5

7 1/2

L200-055LFU2

7.5

L200-075LFU2

0.4

1/2

L200-004HFE(F)2/HFU2

0.75

L200-007HFE(F)2/HFU2

1.5

L200-015HFE(F)2/HFU2

2.2

L200-022HFE(F)2/HFU2

3.0

L200-030HFE(F)2

4.0

L200-040HFE(F)2/HFU2

5.5

7 1/2

L200-055HFE(F)2/HFU2

7.5

L200-075HFE(F)2/HFU2

L200-007NFE(F)2/NFU2

L200-011NFE(F)2

Terminal Connector

Wiring Size
Range (AWG)

Torque

Torque
ft-lbs

(N-m)

Logic/Analog connector

30—16

0.16—0.19 0.22—0.25

Relay connector

30—14

0.37—0.44

0.5—0.6

Wire Connectors
WARNING: Field wiring connections must be Terminal (ring lug)
made by a UL Listed and CSA Certified ring lug
terminal connector sized for the wire gauge being
used. The connector must be fixed using the
crimping tool specified by the connector
manufacturer.

Cable support

Cable

xiv
Fuse and Circuit Breaker Sizes
The inverter’s input power wiring must include UL Listed, dual-element, 600V fuses, or
UL Listed, inverse-time, 600V circuit breakers.
Input
Voltage

200V

400V

Motor Output
Inverter Model

Ampere Rating for
Fuse or Breaker

0.2

1/4

L200-002NFE(F)2/NFU2

0.4

1/2

L200-004NFE(F)2/NFU2

0.55

3/4

L200-005NFE(F)2

0.75

L200-007NFE(F)2/NFU2

1.1

1 1/2

L200-011NFE(F)2

1.5

L200-015NFE(F)2/NFU2

20 (single ph.)
15 (three ph.)

2.2

L200-022NFE(F)2/NFU2

30 (single ph.)
20 (three ph.)

3.7

L200-037LFU2

5.5

7 1/2

L200-055LFU2

7.5

L200-075LFU2

0.4

1/2

L200-004HFE(F)2/HFU2

0.75

L200-007HFE(F)2/HFU2

1.5

L200-015HFE(F)2/HFU2

2.2

L200-022HFE(F)2/HFU2

3.0

L200-030HFE(F)2

4.0

L200-040HFE(F)2/HFU2

5.5

7 1/2

L200-055HFE(F)2/HFU2

7.5

L200-075HFE(F)2/HFU2

Motor Overload Protection
Hitachi L2002 inverters provide solid state motor overload protection, which depends on
the proper setting of the following parameters:
• B012 “electronic overload protection”
• B212 “electronic overload protection, 2nd motor”
Set the rated current [Amperes] of the motor(s) with the above parameters. The setting
range is 0.2 * rated current to 1.2 * rated current.
WARNING: When two or more motors are connected to the inverter, they cannot be
protected by the electronic overload protection. Install an external thermal relay on each
motor.

L2002 Inverter

Table of Contents
Safety Messages
Hazardous High Voltage
General Precautions - Read These First!
Index to Warnings and Cautions in This Manual
General Warnings and Cautions
UL® Cautions, Warnings, and Instructions

i
ii
iv
ix
xii

Table of Contents
Revisions
Contact Information

xvii
xviii

Chapter 1: Getting Started
Introduction
Inverter Specifications
Introduction to Variable-Frequency Drives
Frequently Asked Questions

1–2
1–5
1–18
1–23

Chapter 2: Inverter Mounting and Installation
Orientation to Inverter Features
Basic System Description
Step-by-Step Basic Installation
Powerup Test
Using the Front Panel Keypad

2–2
2–7
2–8
2–22
2–24

Chapter 3: Configuring Drive Parameters
Choosing a Programming Device
Using Keypad Devices
“D” Group: Monitoring Functions
“F” Group: Main Profile Parameters
“A” Group: Standard Functions
“B” Group: Fine Tuning Functions
“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions
“H” Group: Motor Constants Functions
“P” Group: Expansion Card Functions

3–2
3–3
3–6
3–9
3–10
3–33
3–47
3–63
3–64

xvi
Chapter 4: Operations and Monitoring
Introduction
Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices
Control Logic Signal Specifications
Intelligent Terminal Listing
Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Using Intelligent Output Terminals
Analog Input Operation
Analog Output Operation
PID Loop Operation
Configuring the Inverter for Multiple Motors

4–2
4–4
4–6
4–7
4–9
4–35
4–53
4–55
4–56
4–58

Chapter 5: Inverter System Accessories
Introduction
Component Descriptions
Dynamic Braking

5–2
5–3
5–5

Chapter 6: Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Troubleshooting
Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions
Restoring Factory Default Settings
Maintenance and Inspection
Warranty

6–2
6–5
6–8
6–9
6–16

Appendix A: Glossary and Bibliography
Glossary
Bibliography

A–2
A–8

Appendix B: ModBus Network Communications
Introduction
Connecting the Inverter to ModBus
Network Protocol Reference
ModBus Data Listing

B–2
B–3
B–6
B–19

Appendix C: Drive Parameter Settings Tables
Introduction
Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry

C–2
C–2

Appendix D: CE–EMC Installation Guidelines
CE–EMC Installation Guidelines
Hitachi EMC Recommendations

Index

D–2
D–6

L2002 Inverter

xvii

Revisions
Revision History Table
No.

Revision Comments
Initial release of manual NB675X

Date of Issue

Operation
Manual No.

Sept. 2006

NB675X

xviii
Contact Information
Hitachi America, Ltd.
Power and Industrial Division
50 Prospect Avenue
Tarrytown, NY 10591
U.S.A.
Phone: +1-914-631-0600
Fax: +1-914-631-3672

Hitachi Australia Ltd.
Level 3, 82 Waterloo Road
North Ryde, N.S.W. 2113
Australia
Phone: +61-2-9888-4100
Fax: +61-2-9888-4188

Hitachi Europe GmbH
Am Seestern 18
D-40547 Düsseldorf
Germany
Phone: +49-211-5283-0
Fax: +49-211-5283-649

Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co., Ltd.
AKS Building, 3, Kanda Neribei-cho
Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, 101-0022
Japan
Phone: +81-3-4345-6910
Fax: +81-3-4345-6067

Hitachi Asia Ltd.
16 Collyer Quay
#20-00 Hitachi Tower, Singapore 049318
Singapore
Phone: +65-538-6511
Fax: +65-538-9011

Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co, Ltd.
Narashino Division
1-1, Higashi-Narashino 7-chome
Narashino-shi, Chiba 275-8611
Japan
Phone: +81-47-474-9921
Fax: +81-47-476-9517

Hitachi Asia (Hong Kong) Ltd.
7th Floor, North Tower
World Finance Centre, Harbour City
Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon
Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2735-9218
Fax: +852-2735-6793

NOTE: To receive technical support for the Hitachi inverter you purchased, contact the
Hitachi inverter dealer from whom you purchased the unit, or the sales office or factory
contact listed above. Please be prepared to provide the following inverter nameplate
information:
1. Model
2. Date of purchase
3. Manufacturing number (MFG No.)
4. Symptoms of any inverter problem
If any inverter nameplate information is illegible, please provide your Hitachi contact
with any other legible nameplate items. To reduce unpredictable downtime, we recommend that you stock a spare inverter.

Getting Started

In This Chapter...

1
page

— Introduction ..................................................... 2
— Inverter Specifications ..................................... 5
— Introduction to Variable-Frequency Drives .... 18
— Frequently Asked Questions ......................... 23

1–2

Introduction

Getting Started

Introduction
Main Features
Congratulations on your purchase of an
L2002 Series Hitachi inverter! This inverter
drive features state-of-the-art circuitry and
components to provide high performance.
The housing footprint is exceptionally
small, given the size of the corresponding
motor. The Hitachi L2002 product line
includes more than a dozen inverter models
to cover motor sizes from 1/4 horsepower to
10 horsepower, in either 240 VAC or 480
VAC power input versions. The main
features are:
• 200V and 400V Class inverters
• US or EU versions available (countryspecific input voltage range and default
values)
• Built-in RS-485 MODBUS RTU as
standard
• New current limit function

L200-004NFU2

• Sixteen programmable speed levels
• PID control adjusts motor speed automatically to maintain a process variable value
The design in Hitachi inverters overcomes many of the traditional trade-offs between
speed, torque and efficiency. The performance characteristics are:
• High starting torque of 100% at 6Hz
• Continuous operation at 100% torque within a 1:10 speed range (6/60 Hz / 5/50 Hz)
without motor derating
A full line of accessories from Hitachi is available to complete your motor application:
• Digital remote operator keypad
• Panel-mount keypad bezel kit and DIN rail mounting adapter (35mm rail size)
• Dynamic braking unit with resistors
• Radio noise filters
• CE compliance filters

L2002 Inverter

1–3

Operator Interface Options
Getting Started

The L2002 inverter can connect to an external
digital operator via the front panel serial port
connector. The separate keypad is shown to the
right (part no. OPE–SRmini). This allows you
to operate the inverter remotely, as shown
(below left). A cable (part no. ICS–1 or ICS–3,
1m or 3m) connects the modular connectors of
the keypad and inverter.
Hitachi provides a panel mount keypad kit
OPE–SRmini
(below, right). It includes the mounting flange,
gasket, keypad, and other hardware. You can mount the keypad with the potentiometer
for a NEMA1 rated installation. The kit also provides for removing the potentiometer
knob to meet NEMA 4X requirements, as shown (part no. 4X–KITmini).

Cable
ICS–1 or
ICS–3

4X–KITmini
Digital Operator Copy Unit - The optional
digital operator / copy unit (part no. SRW-0EX)
is shown to the right. It has a 2-line display that
shows parameters by function code and by name.
It has the additional capability of reading
(uploading) the parameter settings in the inverter
into its memory. Then you can connect the copy
unit on another inverter and write (download) the
parameter settings into that inverter. OEMs will
find this unit particularly useful, as one can use a
single copy unit to transfer parameter settings
from one inverter to many.
Other digital operator interfaces may be available
from your Hitachi distributor for particular industries or international markets. Contact your
Hitachi distributor for further details.
SRW–0EX

1–4

Introduction

Getting Started

Inverter Specifications Label
The Hitachi L2002 inverters have product labels located on the right side of the housing,
as pictured below. Be sure to verify that the specifications on the labels match your
power source, motor, and application safety requirements.

Specifications label
Regulatory agency approval
labels (opposite side)

Inverter model number
Motor capacity for this model
Power Input Rating:
frequency, voltage, phase, current
Output Rating:
Frequency, voltage, current
Manufacturing codes:
Lot number, date, etc.

Model Number Convention
The model number for a specific inverter contains useful information about its operating
characteristics. Refer to the model number legend below:
L200

037

Version

EMC filter
Restricted distribution:
E=Europe, U=USA, R=Japan
Series name

Configuration type
F = with digital operator (keypad)
Input voltage:
N = single or three-phase 200V class
H = three-phase 400V class
L = three phase only, 200V class
Applicable motor capacity in kW
022 = 2.2 kW
002 = 0.2 kW
030 = 3.0 kW
004 = 0.4 kW
037 = 3.7 kW
005 = 0.55 kW
040 = 4.0 kW
007 = 0.75 kW
055 = 5.5 kW
011 = 1.1 kW
075 = 7.5 kW
015 = 1.5 kW

1–5

L2002 Inverter

Inverter Specifications
The following tables are specific to L2002 inverters for the 200V and 400V class model
groups. Note that “General Specifications” on page 1–10 apply to both voltage class
groups. Footnotes for all specifications tables follow the table below.
Item
L2002 inverters,
200V models

EU types

002NFEF2 004NFEF2 005NFEF2 007NFEF2
002NFE2 004NFE2 005NFE2 007NFE2

USA type

002NFU2

004NFU2

—

007NFU2

—

0.2

0.4

0.55

0.75

1.1

1/4

1/2

3/4

1.5

230V

0.5

1.0

1.1

1.5

1.9

240V

0.5

1.0

1.2

1.6

2.0

Applicable motor size *2
Rated capacity
(kVA)

200V Class Specifications

Rated input voltage

011NFEF2
011NFE2

1-phase: 200 to 240V ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%,
3-phase: 200 to 240V ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%,
(037LFU2, 055LFU2, and 075LFU2 3-phase only)

Integrated EMC
filter

NFEF type

Single phase filter, Category C3 *5

Rated input
current (A)

1-phase

3.1

5.8

6.7

9.0

11.2

3-phase

1.8

3.4

3.9

5.2

6.5

NFE, NFU types

—

Rated output voltage *3

3-phase: 200 to 240V (proportional to input voltage)

Rated output current (A)

1.4

2.6

3.0

4.0

5.0

Efficiency at 100% rated output (%)

90.5

93.3

94.4

95.1

96.2

Watt loss,
at 70% output
approximate (W)

at 100% output

Starting torque *7
Braking

100% at 6Hz
Dynamic
braking, approx.
% torque (short
time stop from
50 / 60 Hz) *8
NFEF type

NFE type

NFU type

Capacitive feedback type, dynamic braking unit and braking
resistor optional, individually installed
Variable operating frequency, time, and braking force

DC braking

Weight

100%: ≤ 50Hz
50%: ≤ 60Hz

0.8

0.95

1.4

1.75

2.09

3.09

0.7

0.85

1.8

1.54

1.87

3.97

0.7

0.85

—

1.8

—

1.54

1.87

—

3.97

—

Getting Started

Model-specific tables for 200V and 400V class inverters

1–6

Inverter Specifications

Getting Started

Footnotes for the preceding table and the tables that follow:
Note 1:
Note 2:

The protection method conforms to JEM 1030.
The applicable motor refers to Hitachi standard 3-phase motor (4-pole). When
using other motors, care must be taken to prevent the rated motor current (50/
60 Hz) from exceeding the rated output current of the inverter.
Note 3: The output voltage decreases as the main supply voltage decreases (except
when using the AVR function). In any case, the output voltage cannot exceed
the input power supply voltage.
Note 4: To operate the motor beyond 50/60 Hz, consult the motor manufacturer for
the maximum allowable rotation speed.
Note 5: When using the inverter with 3-phase power input, remove the single phase
filter and install a 3-phase filter with the appropriate ratings.
Note 6: For achieving approved input voltage rating categories:
• 460 to 480 VAC – Over-voltage Category 2
• 380 to 460 VAC– Over-voltage Category 3
To meet the Over-voltage Category 3, insert an EN or IEC standard compliant
isolation transformer that is earth grounded and star connected (for Low
Voltage Directive).
Note 7: At the rated voltage when using a Hitachi standard 3-phase, 4-pole motor.
Note 8: The braking torque via capacitive feedback is the average deceleration torque
at the shortest deceleration (stopping from 50/60 Hz as indicated). It is not
continuous regenerative braking torque. The average deceleration torque
varies with motor loss. This value decreases when operating beyond 50 Hz. If
a large regenerative torque is required, the optional regenerative braking
resistor should be used.
Note 9: The frequency command is the maximum frequency at 9.8V for input voltage
0 to 10 VDC, or at 19.6 mA for input current 4 to 20 mA. If this characteristic
is not satisfactory for your application, contact your Hitachi sales representative.
Note 10: If the inverter is operated outside the region shown in the graph to the right,
the inverter may be damaged or its service life may be shortened. Set B083
Carrier Frequency Adjustment in accordance with the expected output current
level.
Derating Curve
Rated
current

100%

Curve at 40°C

70%
Operating region
0
5.0

14.0

kHz

Carrier frequency

Note 11: The storage temperature refers to the short-term temperature during transport.
Note 12: Conforms to the test method specified in JIS C0040 (1999). For the model
types excluded in the standard specifications, contact your Hitachi sales
representative.

1–7

L2002 Inverter
L2002 Inverter Specifications, continued...

L2002 inverters,
200V models

EU types

015NFEF2
015NFE2

022NFEF2
022NFE2

—

USA type

015NFU2

022NFU2

037LFU2

055LFU2

075LFU2

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

230V

2.8

3.9

6.3

9.5

12.7

240V

2.9

4.1

6.6

9.9

13.3

Applicable motor size *2
Rated capacity
(kVA)

200V Class Specifications, continued

Rated input voltage

Integrated EMC
filter

1-phase: 200 to 240V ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%,
3-phase: 200 to 240V ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%,
(037LFU2, 055LFU2, 075LFU2 3-phase only)

NFEF type

Single phase filter,
Category C3 *5

NFE, NFU types
Rated input
current (A)

—
—

1-phase

16.0

22.5

—

3-phase

9.3

13.0

20.0

30.0

40.0

Rated output voltage *3

3-phase: 200 to 240V (proportional to input voltage)

Rated output current (A)

7.1

10.0

15.9

Efficiency at 100% rated output (%)

96.3

95.5

95.4

95.6

96.0

Watt loss,
at 70% output
approximate (W)

110

175

210

170

244

300

at 100% output

Starting torque *7
Braking

100% at 6Hz
Dynamic
braking, approx.
% torque (short
time stop from
50 / 60 Hz) *8
DC braking

Weight

NFEF type

NFE type

NFU type

50%: ≤ 60Hz

20%: ≤ 60Hz

Capacitive feedback type, dynamic braking unit and braking
resistor optional, individually installed
Variable operating frequency, time, and braking force

1.9

—

4.2

—

1.8

—

3.97

—

1.8

1.9

5.5

5.7

3.97

4.2

12.13

12.57

Getting Started

Item

1–8

Inverter Specifications

Getting Started

Item
L2002 inverters,
400V models

400V Class Specifications

EU types

004HFEF2
004HFE2

007HFEF2
007HFE2

015HFEF2
015HFE2

022HFEF2
022HFE2

USA type

004HFU2

007HFU2

015HFU2

022HFU2

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

1/2

1.1

1.9

2.9

4.2

Applicable motor size *2
Rated capacity (460V) kVA
Rated input voltage *6
Integrated EMC
filter

3-phase: 380 to 480V ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%

HFEF type

Three phase filter, Category C3 *5

HFE, HFU types

Rated input current (A)

—
2.0

Rated output voltage *3

3.3

5.0

7.0

3-phase: 380 to 480V (proportional to input voltage)

Rated output current (A)

1.5

2.5

3.8

5.5

Efficiency at 100% rated output (%)

93.5

94.0

95.3

95.7

Watt loss,
at 70% output
approximate (W)

at 100% output

Starting torque *7
Braking

100% at 6Hz
Dynamic
braking, approx.
% torque (short
time stop from
50 / 60 Hz) *8
DC braking

Weight

HFEF type

HFE type

HFU type

50%: ≤ 60Hz

20%: ≤ 60Hz

Capacitive feedback type, dynamic braking unit and braking
resistor optional, individually installed
Variable operating frequency, time, and braking force

1.4

1.8

1.9

3.09

3.97

4.19

1.3

1.7

1.8

2.87

3.75

3.97

1.3

1.7

1.8

2.87

3.75

3.97

1–9

L2002 Inverter
Item
EU types

030HFEF2
030HFE2

040HFEF2
040HFE2

055HFEF2
055HFE2

075HFEF2
075HFE2

USA type

—

040HFU2

055HFU2

075HFU2

3.0

4.0

5.5

7.5

6.2

6.6

10.3

12.7

Applicable motor size *2
Rated capacity (460V) kVA
Rated input voltage *6
Integrated EMC
filter

3-phase: 380 to 480V ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±5%

HFEF type

Three phase filter, Category C3

HFE, HFU types

Rated input current (A)

—
10.0

Rated output voltage *3

—

11.0

16.5

20.0

3-phase: 380 to 480V (proportional to input voltage)

Rated output current (A)

7.8

8.6

Efficiency at 100% rated output (%)

95.7

95.9

96.6

97.0

Watt loss,
at 70% output
approximate (W)

135

165

130

150

187

227

at 100% output

Starting torque *7
Braking

100% at 6Hz
Dynamic
braking, approx.
% torque (short
time stop from
50 / 60 Hz) *8
DC braking

Weight

HFEF type

HFE type

HFU type

20%: ≤ 60Hz
Capacitive feedback type, dynamic braking unit and braking
resistor optional, individually installed
Variable operating frequency, time, and braking force

1.9

5.5

5.7

4.19

12.13

12.57

1.8

3.5

5.6

3.97

7.72

12.35

—

1.8

5.4

5.6

—

3.97

11.91

12.35

Getting Started

L2002 inverters,
400V models

400V Class Specifications, continued

1–10

Inverter Specifications

Getting Started

General Specifications
The following table applies to all L2002 inverters.
Item

General Specifications

Protective housing *1

IP20

Control method

Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) control

Carrier frequency

2kHz to 14kHz (default setting: 5kHz)

Output frequency range *4

0.5 to 400 Hz

Frequency accuracy

Digital command: 0.01% of the maximum frequency
Analog command: 0.1% of the maximum frequency (25°C ± 10°C)

Frequency setting resolution

Digital: 0.1 Hz; Analog: max. frequency/1000

Volt./Freq. characteristic

V/f optionally variable, V/f control (constant torque, reduced torque)

Overload capacity

150% of rated current for 1 minute

Acceleration/deceleration time

0.01 to 3000 seconds, linear and S-curve accel/decel, second
accel/decel setting available

Input
signal

Freq.
Operator panel Up and Down keys / Value settings
setting
Potentiometer Analog setting
External signal
*9
FWD/
REV
Run

Output
signal

0 to 10 VDC (input impedance 10k Ohms), 4 to 20 mA (input
impedance 250 Ohms), Potentiometer (1k to 2k Ohms, 2W)

Operator panel Run/Stop (Forward/Reverse run change by command)
External signal Forward run/stop, Reverse run/stop

Intelligent input
terminal

FW (forward run command), RV (reverse run command), CF1~CF4
(multi-stage speed setting), JG (jog command), DB (external
braking), SET (set second motor), 2CH (2-stage accel./decel.
command), FRS (free run stop command), EXT (external trip), USP
(startup function), SFT (soft lock), AT (analog current input select
signal), RS (reset), PTC (thermistor thermal protection), STA (start),
STP (stop), F/R (forward/reverse), PID (PID disable), PIDC (PID
reset), UP (remote control up function), DWN (remote control down
function), UDC (remote control data clearing), OPE (operator
control), ADD (ADD frequency enable), F-TM (force terminal
mode), RDY (quick start enable)

Intelligent output
terminal

RUN (run status signal), FA1,2 (frequency arrival signal), OL
(overload advance notice signal), OD (PID error deviation signal),
AL (alarm signal), Dc (analog input disconnect detect), FBV (PID
two-stage control output), NDc (network detection signal), LOG
(logic output), OPDc (option card detection signal)

Frequency monitor

PWM output; Select analog output frequency monitor, analog output
current monitor or digital output frequency monitor

Alarm output contact

ON for inverter alarm (1C contacts, both normally open or closed
avail.)

L2002 Inverter
Item

1–11

General Specifications
AVR function, curved accel/decel profile, upper and lower limiters,
16-stage speed profile, fine adjustment of start frequency, carrier
frequency change (2 to 14 kHz) *10, frequency jump, gain and bias
setting, process jogging, electronic thermal level adjustment, retry
function, trip history monitor, 2nd setting selection, fan ON/OFF
selection

Protective function

Over-current, over-voltage, under-voltage, overload, extreme high/
low temperature, CPU error, memory error, ground fault detection at
startup, internal communication error, electronic thermal

Operat- Temperature
ing
Environ Humidity
ment
Vibration *12

Operating (ambient): -10 to 40°C (*10) / Storage: -25 to 60°C (*11)

Location

20 to 90% humidity (non-condensing)
5.9 m/s2 (0.6G), 10 to 55 Hz
Altitude 1,000 m or less, indoors (no corrosive gasses or dust)

Coating color

Blue (DIC 14 Version No. 436)

Options

Remote operator unit, copy unit, cables for the units, braking unit,
braking resistor, AC reactor, DC reactor, noise filter, DIN rail
mounting

Signal Ratings
Detailed ratings are in “Control Logic Signal Specifications” on page 4–6.
Signal / Contact

Ratings

Built-in power for inputs

24VDC, 30 mA maximum

Discrete logic inputs

27VDC maximum

Discrete logic outputs

50mA maximum ON state current, 27 VDC maximum OFF state voltage

Analog output

0 to 10VDC, 1 mA

Analog input, current

4 to 19.6 mA range, 20 mA nominal

Analog input, voltage

0 to 9.6 VDC range, 10VDC nominal, input impedance 10 kΩ

+10V analog reference

10VDC nominal, 10 mA maximum

Alarm relay contacts

250 VAC, 2.5A (R load) max., 0.2A (I load, P.F.=0.4) max.
100 VAC, 10mA min.
30 VDC, 3.0A (R load) max., 0.7A (I load, P.F.=0.4) max.
5 VDC, 100mA min.

Getting Started

Other functions

1–12

Inverter Specifications

Getting Started

Derating Curves
The maximum available inverter current output is limited by the carrier frequency and
ambient temperature. The carrier frequency is the inverter’s internal power switching
frequency, settable from 2 kHz to 14 kHz. Choosing a higher carrier frequency tends to
decrease audible noise, but it also increases the internal heating of the inverter, thus
decreasing (derating) the maximum current output capability. Ambient temperature is
the temperature just outside the inverter housing—such as inside the control cabinet
where the inverter is mounted. A higher ambient temperature decreases (derates) the
inverter’s maximum current output capacity.
An inverter may be mounted individually in an enclosure or side-by-side with other
inverter(s) as shown below. Side-by-side mounting causes greater derating than
mounting inverters separately. Graphs for either mounting method are included in this
section. Refer to “Ensure Adequate Ventilation” on page 2–11 for minimum clearance
dimensions for both mounting configurations.
Individual Mounting
Enclosure

Side-by-side Mounting
Enclosure

POWER

HITACHI

5 0.0

ALARM

POWER

HITACHI

5 0.0

RUN
FUNC.

STOP
RESET

ALARM

Hz
A

POWER

HITACHI

5 0.0

PRG

RUN
FUNC.

STR

STOP
RESET

PRG

RUN

STR

L2002

ALARM

Hz
A
RUN

RUN

FUNC.

STOP
RESET

PRG

STR

L2002

Use the following derating curves to help determine the optimal carrier frequency setting
for your inverter and find the output current derating. Be sure to use the proper curve for
your particular L2002 inverter model number.
Legend for Graphs:
Ambient temperature 40°C max., individual mounting
Ambient temperature 50°C max., individual mounting
Ambient temperature 40°C max., side-by-side mounting

1–13

L2002 Inverter
Derating curves:

Getting Started

L200–002NFE(F)2/NFU2
100%
95%
90%
% of rated
output current

85%
80%
75%
kHz

70%
2

Carrier frequency
L200–004NFE(F)2/
NFU2, –005NFE(F)2 100%
95%
90%
% of rated
output current

85%
80%
75%
kHz

70%
2

Carrier frequency
L200–007NFE(F)2/
NFU2, –011NFE(F)2 100%
90%
80%
% of rated
output current

70%
60%
50%
kHz

40%
2

Carrier frequency

1–14

Inverter Specifications

Getting Started

Derating curves, continued...
L200–015NFE(F)2/NFU2
100%
95%
90%
% of rated
output current

85%
80%
75%
kHz

70%
2

Carrier frequency

L200–022NFE(F)2/NFU2
100%
95%
90%
% of rated
output current

85%
80%
75%
kHz

70%
2

Carrier frequency
L200–037LFU2
100%
90%
80%
% of rated
output current

70%
60%
50%
kHz

40%
2

Carrier frequency

L2002 Inverter

1–15

Derating curves, continued...

Getting Started

L200–055LFU2
100%
90%
80%
% of rated
output current

70%
60%
50%
kHz

40%
2

Carrier frequency

L200–075LFU2
100%
90%
80%
% of rated
output current

70%
60%
50%
kHz

40%
2

Carrier frequency
L200–004HFE(F)2/HFU2
100%
90%
80%
% of rated
output current

70%
60%
50%
kHz

40%
2

Carrier frequency

1–16

Inverter Specifications

Getting Started

Derating curves, continued...
L200–007HFE(F)2/HFU2
100%
90%
80%
% of rated
output current

70%
60%
50%
kHz

40%
2

Carrier frequency
L200–015HFE(F)2/HFU2
100%
90%
80%
% of rated
output current

70%
60%
50%
kHz

40%
2

Carrier frequency
L200–022HFE(F)2/HFU2
100%
90%
80%
% of rated
output current

70%
60%
50%
kHz

40%
2

Carrier frequency

1–17

L2002 Inverter
Derating curves, continued...

Getting Started

L200–030HFE(F)2,
-040HFE(F)/HFU2

100%
90%
80%

% of rated
output current

70%
60%
50%
kHz

40%
2

Carrier frequency
L200–055HFE(F)2/HFU2
100%
90%
80%
% of rated
output current

70%
60%
50%
kHz

40%
2

Carrier frequency
L200–075HFE(F)2/HFU2
100%
90%
80%
% of rated
output current

70%
60%
50%
kHz

40%
2

Carrier frequency

1–18

Introduction to Variable-Frequency Drives

Getting Started

Introduction to Variable-Frequency Drives
The Purpose of Motor Speed Control for Industry
Hitachi inverters provide speed control for 3-phase AC induction motors. You connect
AC power to the inverter, and connect the inverter to the motor. Many applications
benefit from a motor with variable speed, in several ways:
• Energy savings - HVAC
• Need to coordinate speed with an adjacent process—textiles and printing presses
• Need to control acceleration and deceleration (torque)
• Sensitive loads - elevators, food processing, pharmaceuticals

What is an Inverter?
The term inverter and variable-frequency drive are related and somewhat interchangeable. An electronic motor drive for an AC motor can control the motor’s speed by
varying the frequency of the power sent to the motor.
An inverter, in general, is a device that converts DC power to AC power. The figure
below shows how the variable-frequency drive employs an internal inverter. The drive
first converts incoming AC power to DC through a rectifier bridge, creating an internal
DC bus voltage. Then the inverter circuit converts the DC back to AC again to power the
motor. The special inverter can vary its output frequency and voltage according to the
desired motor speed.
Power
Input

Variable-frequency Drive
Converter

L1
L2

Rectifier

Internal
DC Bus

Inverter

Motor

U/T1
V/T2

W/T3
–

The simplified drawing of the inverter shows three double-throw switches. In Hitachi
inverters, the switches are actually IGBTs (insulated gate bipolar transistors). Using a
commutation algorithm, the microprocessor in the drive switches the IGBTs on and off
at a very high speed to create the desired output waveforms. The inductance of the motor
windings helps smooth out the pulses.

L2002 Inverter

1–19

Torque and Constant Volts/Hertz Operation
Output
voltage

Getting Started

In the past, AC variable speed drives used an
open loop (scalar) technique to control speed.
The constant-volts-per-hertz operation
maintains a constant ratio between the applied
voltage and the applied frequency. With these
conditions, AC induction motors inherently
delivered constant torque across the operating
speed range. For some applications, this scalar
technique was adequate.

V
Constant torque

0
100%

Output frequency
Today, with the advent of sophisticated microprocessors and digital signal processors (DSPs),
it is possible to control the speed and torque of AC induction motors with unprecedented
accuracy. The L2002 utilizes these devices to perform complex mathematical calculations required to achieve superior performance. You can choose various torque curves to
fit the needs of your application. Constant torque applies the same torque level across the
frequency (speed) range. Variable torque, also called reduced torque, lowers the torque
delivered at mid-level frequencies. A torque boost setting will add additional torque in
the lower half of the frequency range for the constant and variable torque curves. With
the free-setting torque curve feature, you can specify a series of data points that will
define a custom torque curve to fit your application.

Inverter Input and Three-Phase Power
The Hitachi L2002 Series of inverters includes two sub-groups: the 200V class and the
400V class inverters. The drives described in this manual may be used in either the
United States or Europe, although the exact voltage level for commercial power may be
slightly different from country to country. Accordingly, a 200V class inverter requires
(nominal) 200 to 240VAC, and a 400V class inverter requires from 380 to 480VAC.
Some 200V class inverters will accept single-phase or three-phase power, but all 400V
class inverters require a three-phase power supply.
TIP: If your application only has single phase power available, refer to L2002 inverters
of 3HP or less; they can accept single phase input power.
The common terminology for single phase power is Line (L) and Neutral (N). Threephase power connections are usually labeled Line 1 [R/L1], Line 2 [S/L2] and
Line 3 [T/L3]. In any case, the power source should include an earth ground connection.
That ground connection will need to connect to the inverter chassis and to the motor
frame (see “Wire the Inverter Output to Motor” on page 2–21).

1–20

Introduction to Variable-Frequency Drives

Getting Started

Inverter Output to the Motor
The AC motor must be connected only to the inverter’s
3-Phase AC Motor
output terminals. The output terminals are uniquely
V/T2
labeled (to differentiate them from the input terminals)
U/T1
with the designations U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. This
corresponds to typical motor lead connection designations T1, T2, and T3. It is often not necessary to connect
Earth
a particular inverter output to a particular motor lead for
GND
a new application. The consequence of swapping any
W/T3
two of the three connections is the reversal of the motor
direction. In applications where reversed rotation could
cause equipment damage or personnel injury, be sure to verify direction of rotation
before attempting full-speed operation. For safety to personnel, you must connect the
motor chassis ground to the ground connection at the bottom of the inverter housing.
Notice the three connections to the motor do not include one marked “Neutral” or
“Return.” The motor represents a balanced “Y” impedance to the inverter, so there is no
need for a separate return. In other words, each of the three “Hot” connections serves
also as a return for the other connections, because of their phase relationship.
The Hitachi inverter is a rugged and reliable device. The intention is for the inverter to
assume the role of controlling power to the motor during all normal operations. Therefore, this manual instructs you not to switch off power to the inverter while the motor is
running (unless it is an emergency stop). Also, do not install or use disconnect switches
in the wiring from the inverter to the motor (except thermal disconnect). Of course,
safety-related devices such as fuses must be in the design to break power during a
malfunction, as required by NEC and local codes.

L2002 Inverter

1–21

Intelligent Functions and Parameters

The optional read/write programmer will let you
read and write inverter EEPROM contents from
the programmer. This feature is particularly
useful for OEMs who need to duplicate a particular inverter’s settings in many other inverters in
assembly-line fashion.

Braking
In general, braking is a force that attempts to slow or stop motor rotation. So it is associated with motor deceleration, but may also occur even when the load attempts to drive
the motor faster than the desired speed (overhauling). If you need the motor and load to
decelerate quicker than their natural deceleration during coasting, we recommend
installing an optional dynamic braking unit. See “Introduction” on page 5–2 and
“Dynamic Braking” on page 5–5 for more information on the BRD–E2 and BRD–EZ2
braking units. The L2002 inverter sends excess motor energy into a resistor in the
dynamic braking unit to slow the motor and load. For loads that continuously overhaul
the motor for extended periods of time, the L2002 may not be suitable (contact your
Hitachi distributor). For loads that continuously overhaul the motor for extended periods
of time, the L2002 may not be suitable (contact your Hitachi distributor).
The inverter parameters include acceleration and deceleration, which you can set to
match the needs of the application. For a particular inverter, motor, and load, there will
be a range of practically achievable accelerations and decelerations.

Getting Started

Much of this manual is devoted to describing
how to use inverter functions and how to configure inverter parameters. The inverter is microprocessor-controlled, and has many independent
functions. The microprocessor has an on-board
EEPROM for parameter storage. The inverter’s
front panel keypad provides access to all
functions and parameters, which you can access
through other devices as well. The general name
for all these devices is the digital operator, or
digital operator panel. Chapter 2 will show you
how to get a motor running, using a minimal set
of function commands or configuring parameters.

1–22

Introduction to Variable-Frequency Drives

Getting Started

Velocity Profiles
The L2002 inverter is capable of sophisticated
speed control. A graphical representation of Speed
that capability will help you understand and
configure the associated parameters. This
manual makes use of the velocity profile
0
graph used in industry (shown at right). In the
example, acceleration is a ramp to a set speed,
and deceleration is a decline to a stop.

Set speed
Accel

Decel

Velocity Profile

Acceleration and deceleration settings specify
Speed
Maximum speed
the time required to go from a stop to
maximum frequency (or visa versa). The
resulting slope (speed change divided by time)
is the acceleration or deceleration. An increase
in output frequency uses the acceleration
0
slope, while a decrease uses the deceleration
t
Acceleration
slope. The accel or decel time a particular
(time setting)
speed change depends on the starting and
ending frequencies. However, the slope is constant, corresponding to the full-scale accel
or decel time setting. For example, the full-scale acceleration setting (time) may be 10
seconds—the time required to go from 0 to 60 Hz.
The L2002 inverter can store up to 16 preset
speeds. And, it can apply separate acceleration Speed
Speed 2
and deceleration transitions from any preset to
Speed 1
any other preset speed. A multi-speed profile
(shown at right) uses two or more preset
0
speeds, which you can select via intelligent
t
input terminals. This external control can
Multi-speed Profile
apply any preset speed at any time. Alternatively, the selected speed is infinitely variable across the speed range. You can use the
potentiometer control on the keypad for manual control. The drive accepts analog 0-10V
signals and 4-20 mA control signals as well.
The inverter can drive the motor in either
Speed
direction. Separate FW and RV commands
select the direction of rotation. The motion
0
profile example shows a forward motion
followed by a reverse motion of shorter
duration. The speed presets and analog signals
control the magnitude of the speed, while the
FWD and REV commands determine the
direction before the motion starts.

Forward move
t
Reverse move

Bi-directional Profile

NOTE: The L2002 can move loads in both directions. However, it is not designed for
use in servo-type applications that use a bipolar velocity signal that determines direction.

L2002 Inverter

1–23

Frequently Asked Questions
What is the main advantage in using an inverter to drive a motor, compared to
alternative solutions?
A.

The term “inverter” is a little confusing, since we also use “drive” and “amplifier”
to describe the electronic unit that controls a motor. What does “inverter” mean?
A.

That depends on the required precision, and the slowest speed the motor will
must turn and still deliver torque. The L2002 inverter will deliver full torque
while turning the motor at only 0.5 Hz (15 RPM). DO NOT use an inverter if
you need the motor to stop and hold the load position without the aid of a
mechanical brake (use a servo or stepper motion control system).

Can the inverter be controlled and monitored via a network?
A.

Yes, sometimes an inverter can be used simply as a “soft-start” device,
providing controlled acceleration and deceleration to a fixed speed. Other
functions of the L2002 may be useful in such applications, as well. However,
using a variable speed drive can benefit many types of industrial and
commercial motor applications, by providing controlled acceleration and
deceleration, high torque at low speeds, and energy savings over alternative
solutions.

Can I use an inverter and AC induction motor in a positioning application?
A.

The terms inverter, drive, and amplifier are used somewhat interchangeably
in industry. Nowadays, the terms drive, variable-frequency drive, variablespeed drive, and inverter are generally used to describe electronic, microprocessor-based motor speed controllers. In the past, variable-speed drive also
referred to various mechanical means to vary speed. Amplifier is a term
almost exclusively used to describe drives for servo or stepper motors.

Although the L2002 inverter is a variable speed drive, can I use it in a fixed-speed
application?
A.

An inverter can vary the motor speed with very little loss of efficiency, unlike
mechanical or hydraulic speed control solutions. The resulting energy
savings usually pays for the inverter in a relatively short time.

Yes. L2002 inverters have built-in ModBus communications. See
Appendix B for more information on network communications.

Why does the manual or other documentation use terminology such as “200V
class” instead of naming the actual voltage, such as “230 VAC?”
A.

A specific inverter model is set at the factory to work across a voltage range
particular to the destination country for that model. The model specifications
are on the label on the side of the inverter. A European 200V class inverter
(“EU” marking) has different parameter settings than a USA 200V class
inverter (“US” marking). The initialization procedure (see “Restoring
Factory Default Settings” on page 6–8) can set up the inverter for European
or US commercial voltage ranges.

Getting Started

1–24

Frequently Asked Questions

Getting Started

Why doesn’t the motor have a neutral connection as a return to the inverter?
A.

Does the motor need a chassis ground connection?
A.

The motor theoretically represents a “balanced Y” load if all three stator
windings have the same impedance. The Y connection allows each of the
three wires to alternately serve as input or return on alternate half-cycles.
Yes, for several reasons. Most importantly, this provides protection in the
event of a short in the motor that puts a hazardous voltage on its housing.
Secondly, motors exhibit leakage currents that increase with aging. Lastly, a
grounded chassis generally emits less electrical noise than an ungrounded
one.

What type of motor is compatible with the Hitachi inverters?
A.

Motor type – It must be a three-phase AC induction motor. Use an invertergrade motor that has 800V insulation for 200V class inverters, or 1600V
insulation for 400V class.
Motor size – In practice, it’s better to find the right size motor for your
application; then look for the inverter to match the motor.

NOTE: There may be other factors that will affect motor selection, including heat dissipation, motor operating speed profile, enclosure type, and cooling method.
Q.

How many poles should the motor have?
A.

Hitachi inverters can be configured to operate motors with 2, 4, 6, or 8 poles.
The greater the number of poles, the slower the top motor speed will be, but
it will have higher torque at the base speed.

Will I be able to add dynamic (resistive) braking to my Hitachi L2002 drive after
the initial installation?
A.

Yes. You can connect a dynamic braking unit to the L2002 inverter. The
resistor in the braking unit must be sized to meet the braking requirements.
More information on dynamic braking is located in Chapter 5.

L2002 Inverter
Q.

How will I know if my application will require resistive braking?

Several options related to electrical noise suppression are available for the Hitachi
inverters. How can I know if my application will require any of these options?
A.

For new applications, it may be difficult to tell before you actually test a
motor/drive solution. In general, some applications can rely on system losses
such as friction to serve as the decelerating force, or otherwise can tolerate a
long decel time. These applications will not need dynamic braking.
However, applications with a combination of a high-inertia load and a
required short decel time will need dynamic braking. This is a physics
question that may be answered either empirically or through extensive calculations.

The purpose of these noise filters is to reduce the inverter electrical noise so
the operation of nearby electrical devices is not affected. Some applications
are governed by particular regulatory agencies, and noise suppression is
mandatory. In those cases, the inverter must have the corresponding noise
filter installed. Other applications may not need noise suppression, unless
you notice electrical interference with the operation of other devices.

The L2002 features a PID loop feature. PID loops are usually associated with
chemical processes, heating, or process industries in general. How could the PID
loop feature be useful in my application?
A.

You will need to determine the particular main variable in your application
the motor affects. That is the process variable (PV) for the motor. Over time,
a faster motor speed will cause a faster change in the PV than a slow motor
speed will. By using the PID loop feature, the inverter commands the motor
to run at the optimal speed required to maintain the PV at the desired value
for current conditions. Using the PID loop feature will require an additional
sensor and other wiring, and is considered an advanced application.

Getting Started

1–25

Inverter Mounting
and Installation
In This Chapter....

2
page

— Orientation to Inverter Features ...................... 2
— Basic System Description ............................... 7
— Step-by-Step Basic Installation........................ 8
— Powerup Test ................................................ 22
— Using the Front Panel Keypad ...................... 24

2–2

Orientation to Inverter Features

Orientation to Inverter Features
Unpacking and Inspection
Please take a few moments to unpack your new L2002 inverter and perform these steps:
1. Look for any damage that may have occurred during shipping.
2. Verify the contents of the box include:
a. One L2002 inverter

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

b. One Instruction Manual
c. One L2002 Quick Reference Guide
3. Inspect the specifications label on the side of the inverter. Make sure it matches the
product part number you ordered.

Main Physical Features
The L2002 Series inverters vary in size according to the current output rating and motor size
for each model number. All feature the same
basic keypad and connector interface for consistent ease of use. The inverter construction has a
heat sink at the back of the housing. The larger
models include a fan(s) to enhance heat sink
performance. The mounting holes are predrilled in the heat sink for your convenience.
Smaller models have two mounting holes, while
larger ones have four. Be sure to use all the
mounting holes provided.
Two chassis GND screws are located on the
metal tab on the heat sink at the bottom of the
inverter. Never touch the heat sink during or just
after operation; it can be very hot.
The electronics housing and front panel are built
onto the front of the heat sink.
Inverter Keypad - The inverter uses a digital
operator interface, or keypad. The four-digit
display can show a variety of performance
parameters. LEDs indicate whether the display
units are Hertz or Amperes. Other LEDs
indicate Power (external), and Run/Stop Mode
and Program/Monitor Mode status. Membrane
keys Run and Stop/Reset, and an output
frequency potentiometer (speed setting knob)
control motor operation. The FUNC., 1 , and
2 keys allow an operator to navigate to the
inverter’s functions and parameter values. The
Store key is used when changing a setting.

POWER

HITACHI

5 0.0

ALARM

Hz
A
RUN

RUN
FUNC.

STOP
RESET

PRG

STR

L2002 Inverter

2–3

Front Housing Cover
HIGH VOLTAGE: Hazard of electrical shock. Disconnect incoming power before
working on this control. Wait five (5) minutes before removing the front cover.
To remove the cover, follow the steps below (applies to all inverter models):
1. Press downward on the cover at the two areas indicated to release the retaining tabs.
2. Slide the cover forward and away from the keypad until the top edge of the cover
reaches the notch in the inverter chassis.
3. Lift the cover upward to remove it.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

To install the cover, follow the steps below (applies to all inverter models):
1. Align the tabs on the front housing cover with the notch on each edge of the inverter
chassis. Then lower the cover into position.
2. Slide the cover toward the keypad, keeping it flush against the inverter chassis.
Continue until the cover latches into place.

Tab

Notch on
inverter chassis

2–4

Orientation to Inverter Features

Logic Connector Introduction

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

After removing the front housing cover, take a moment to become familiar with the
connectors, as shown below.

Relay output
contacts

Logic and analog
signal connections

2–5

L2002 Inverter

DIP Switch Introduction
The inverter has three (3) internal DIP switches, located to the right of the logic connectors as shown below. This section provides an introduction, and refers you to other
chapters that discuss each DIP switch in depth.

485

OPE

PRG

485

OPE

PRG

The SR/SK (Source/Sink) DIP switch configures the inverter’s intelligent
inputs for sinking or sourcing type circuit. Note that the installation and
Powerup Test steps in this chapter do not require wiring the input terminals.
The SR/SK switch configuration is covered in detail in “Using Intelligent
Input Terminals” on page 4–9.
The 485/OPE (RS-485/Operator) DIP switch configures the inverter’s RS485 serial port. You can use the inverter’s keypad (OPE-SRmini) either on
the inverter, or connected via a cable to the serial port. For the keypad, either
position of the 485/OPE DIP switch will work. However, communication
with “smart” operator devices requires the proper setting. Using digital
operators (such as OPE–SR or OPE–0EX requires the “OPE” setting.
Inverter control via a ModBus network communication requires the “485”
setting. See “Connecting the Inverter to ModBus” on page B–3 for more
details.
The TM/PRG (Terminal/Program) DIP switch affects the inverter’s setting
for control sources. Parameter A001 sets the source selection for the
inverter’s output frequency (motor speed). Parameter A002 selects the Run
command source (for FW and RV). These independently select among
sources such as input terminals, inverter keypad keys and potentiometer,
internal register settings, ModBus network, etc.
When the TM/PRG switch is set to PRG, parameter settings A001 and A002
are in effect. However, when the switch is in the TM (terminal) position, the
inverter uses the analog input terminals for the motor speed setting, and uses
the [FW] and/or [REV] terminals for the Run command. More information
is in “Control Source Settings” on page 3–10.

NOTE: L2002 inverters have built-in ModBus RTU RS-485 communications. Connecting to other networks such as DeviceNet, Ethernet, CANopen, and ProfiBus is possible
by adding optional, external interface devices. Contact your Hitachi distributor for more
information.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

2–6

Orientation to Inverter Features

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

Power Wiring Access - First, ensure no
power source of any kind is connected to the
inverter. If power has been connected, wait
five minutes after powerdown and verify the
Power LED is OFF to proceed. After
removing the front housing cover, the housing
partition that covers the power wiring exit will
be able to slide upward as shown to the right.
Notice the four wire exit slots (on larger
model inverters) in the housing partition. This
helps keep the power wiring (to the left)
separate from signal-level logic or analog
wiring (to the right).
Remove the housing partition and as shown as
set it aside in a secure place while wiring.
Never operate the inverter drive with the partition removed or the front housing cover
removed.
The power input and motor 3-phase wiring
connect to the lower row of terminals. The
upper row of power terminals connect to
optional dynamic braking components.
The following sections in this chapter will
describe the system design and guide you
through a step-by-step installation process.
After the section on wiring, this chapter will
show how to use the front panel keys to
access functions and edit parameters.

Power and motor
connection terminals

L2002 Inverter

2–7

Basic System Description
A motor control system will obviously include a motor and inverter, as well as a breaker
or fuses for safety. If you are connecting a motor to the inverter on a test bench just to get
started, that’s all you may need for now. But a system can also have a variety of
additional components. Some can be for noise suppression, while others may enhance
the inverter’s braking performance. The figure and table below show a system with all
the optional components you may need in your finished application.
From power supply

Breaker,
MCCB or
GFI

Function

Breaker /
disconnect

A molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB), ground fault
interrupter (GFI), or a fused disconnect device. NOTE:
The installer must refer to the NEC and local codes to
ensure safety and compliance.

Input-side
AC Reactor

This is useful in suppressing harmonics induced on the
power supply lines and for improving the power factor.
WARNING: Some applications must use an inputside AC reactor to prevent inverter damage. See
Warning on next page.

Radio noise filter Electrical noise interference may occur on nearby
equipment such as a radio receiver. This magnetic
choke filter helps reduce radiated noise (can also be
used on output).

L3
+1

EMI filter (for
CE applications,
see Appendix D)

Reduces the conducted noise on the power supply
wiring between the inverter and the power distribution
system. Connect to the inverter primary (input side).

Radio noise filter
(use in non-CE
applications)

This capacitive filter reduces radiated noise from the
main power wires in the inverter input side.

DC link choke

Suppresses harmonics generated by the inverter.
However, it will not protect the input diode bridge
rectifier.

Inverter

GND
T2 T3

Radio noise filter Electrical noise interference may occur on nearby
equipment such as a radio receiver. This magnetic
choke filter helps reduce radiated noise (can also be
used on input).
Output-side
AC reactor

This reactor reduces the vibrations in the motor caused
by the inverter’s switching waveforms, by smoothing
the waveform to approximate commercial power
quality. It is also useful to reduce harmonics when
wiring from the inverter to the motor is more than 10m
in length.

LCR filter

Sine wave shaping filter for output side.

Motor
Thermal
switch

NOTE: Note that some components are required for regulatory agency compliance (see
Chapter 5 and Appendix D).

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

Name

2–8

Step-by-Step Basic Installation

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

WARNING: In the cases below involving a general-purpose inverter, a large peak
current can flow on the power supply side, sometimes destroying the converter module:
1.The unbalance factor of the power supply is 3% or higher.
2.The power supply capacity is at least 10 times greater than the inverter capacity
(or the power supply capacity is 500 kVA or more).
3.Abrupt power supply changes are expected, due to conditions such as:
a. Several inverters are interconnected with a short bus.
b. A thyristor converter and an inverter are interconnected with a short bus.
c. An installed phase advance capacitor opens and closes.
Where these conditions exist or when the connected equipment must be highly reliable,
you MUST install an input-side AC reactor of 3% (at a voltage drop at rated current)
with respect to the supply voltage on the power supply side. Also, where the effects of an
indirect lightning strike are possible, install a lightning conductor.

Step-by-Step Basic Installation
This section will guide you through the following basic steps of installation:
Step

Activity

Page

Choose a mounting location in compliance with the Warnings and Cautions.
See NOTE below.

2–9

Check the mounting location for adequate ventilation.

2–10

Cover the inverter’s ventilation openings to prevent debris from entering.

2–10

Check the inverter dimensions for footprint and mounting hole locations.

2–11

Study the Cautions, Warnings, wire and fuse sizes, and terminal torque
specifications before wiring the inverter.

2–16

Connect wiring for the inverter power input.

2–18

Wire the inverter output to the motor.

2–21

Uncover the inverter’s ventilation openings applied in Step 3.

2–22

Perform the Powerup Test. (This step includes several substeps.)

2–22

Make observations and check your installation.

2–33

NOTE: If the installation is in an EU country, study the EMC installation guidelines in
Appendix D.

L2002 Inverter

2–9

Choosing a Mounting Location
1

Step 1: Study the following caution messages associated with mounting the inverter.
This is the time when mistakes are most likely to occur that will result in expensive
rework, equipment damage, or personal injury.
CAUTION: Be sure to install the unit on flame-resistant material such as a steel plate.
Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
CAUTION: Be sure not to place any flammable materials near the inverter. Otherwise,
there is the danger of fire.

CAUTION: Be sure to install the inverter in a place that can bear the weight according
to the specifications in the text (Chapter 1, Specifications Tables). Otherwise, it may fall
and cause injury to personnel.
CAUTION: Be sure to install the unit on a perpendicular wall that is not subject to
vibration. Otherwise, it may fall and cause injury to personnel.
CAUTION: Be sure not to install or operate an inverter that is damaged or has missing
parts. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
CAUTION: Be sure to install the inverter in a well-ventilated room that does not have
direct exposure to sunlight, a tendency for high temperature, high humidity or dew
condensation, high levels of dust, corrosive gas, explosive gas, inflammable gas,
grinding-fluid mist, salt damage, etc. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

CAUTION: Be sure not to let the foreign matter enter vent openings in the inverter
housing, such as wire clippings, spatter from welding, metal shavings, dust, etc. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.

2–10

Step-by-Step Basic Installation

Ensure Adequate Ventilation
2

Step 2: To summarize the caution messages—you will need to find a solid, non-flammable, vertical surface that is in a relatively clean and dry environment. In order to ensure
enough room for air circulation around the inverter to aid in cooling, maintain the specified clearance around the inverter specified in the diagram.
Clear area
Air flow

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

10 cm (3.94”)
minimum

POWER

HITACHI

5 0.0
RUN
FUNC.

2 cm
(0.79”)
min.

STOP
RESET

POWER

HITACHI

ALARM

5 0.0

A
RUN

ALARM

Hz
A
RUN

PRG

RUN
STR

L2002

FUNC.

2 cm
(0.79”)
min.

STOP
RESET

PRG

STR

L2002

2 cm
(0.79”)
min.

10 cm (3.94”)
minimum

CAUTION: Be sure to maintain the specified clearance area around the inverter and to
provide adequate ventilation. Otherwise, the inverter may overheat and cause equipment
damage or fire.

Keep Debris Out of Inverter Vents
3

Step 3: Before proceeding to the wiring section, it’s
a good time to temporarily cover the inverter’s
ventilation openings. Paper and masking tape are
all that is needed. This will prevent harmful debris
such as wire clippings and metal shavings from
entering the inverter during installation.

Ventilation holes
(top)

Please observe this checklist while mounting the
inverter:
1. The ambient temperature must be in the range of
–10 to 40°C.

Ventilation holes
(both sides)

2. Keep any other heat-producing equipment as far
away from the inverter as possible.
3. When installing the inverter in an enclosure, maintain the clearance around the
inverter and verify that its ambient temperature is within specification when the
enclosure door is closed.
4. Do not remove the front housing cover at any time during operation.

L2002 Inverter

2–11

Check Inverter Dimensions
Step 4: Locate the applicable drawing on the following pages for your inverter.
Dimensions are given in millimeters (inches) format.
L200–002NFU2, -002NFEF2, –004NFU2, -004NFEF2, –005NFEF2

H=140(5.51)

H=120(4.90)

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

110(4.48)

5(0.20)

5(0.20)
67(2.64)

7(0.16)

80(3.15)

2.6(0.102)
D=93(3.66)
D=107(4.21)
D=130(5.12)

6(0.24)

Model

-002NFU 2
-002NFEF2
-004NFU2
-004NFEF2
-005NFEF2

120(4.90)
140(5.51)
120(4.90)
140(5.51)
140(5.51)

93(3.66)
93(3.66)
107(4.21)
107(4.21)
130(5.12)

NOTE: Some inverter housings require two mounting screws, while others require four.
Be sure to use lock washers or other means to ensure screws do not loosen due to
vibration.

2–12

Step-by-Step Basic Installation

Dimensional drawings, continued...
L200–004HFU2, –004HFEF2, –007NFEF2

H=155(6.10)

H=130(5.130)

118(4.64)

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

2-φ5(0.20)

5(0.20)
98(3.86)
7(0.16)

110(4.33)

129(5.08)

6(0.24)

Model
-004HFU2
-004HFEF2
-007NFEF2

H
130(5.130)
155(6.10)
155(6.10)

L2002 Inverter

2–13

Dimensional drawings, continued...
L200–007HFU2, –007HFEF2

H=155(6.10)

H=130(5.130)

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

118(4.64)

2-φ5(0.20)

4(0.16)

5(0.20)
7(0.16)

98(3.86)

6(0.24)

129(5.08)

110(4.33)

Model

-007HFU2
-007HFEF2

130(5.130)
155(6.10)

2–14

Step-by-Step Basic Installation

Dimensional drawings, continued...
L200–007NU2, -015NFU2, 015HFU2,-022NFU2, -022HFU2, -037LFU2, -040HFU2, 011NFEF2, -015NFEF2, -015HFEF2, -022NFEF2, -022HFEF2, -030HFEF2, -040HFEF2

H=155(6.10)

H=130(5.130)

118(4.64)

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

2-φ5(0.20)

5(0.20)
7(0.16)

98(3.86)

6(0.24)

D=129(5.08)
D=156(6.14)

110(4.33)

Model

-007NFU2
-015NFU2
-015HFU2
-022NFU2
-022HFU2
-037LFU2
-040HFU2
-011NFEF2
-015NFEF2
-015HFEF2
-022NFEF2
-022HFEF2
-030HFEF2
-040HFEF2

130(5.12)
130(5.12)
130(5.12)
130(5.12)
130(5.12)
130(5.12)
130(5.12)
155(6.10)
155(6.10)
155(6.10)
155(6.10)
155(6.10)
155(6.10)
155(6.10)

129(5.08)
156(6.14)
156(6.14)
156(6.14)
156(6.14)
156(6.14)
156(6.14)
155(6.10)
155(6.10)
155(6.10)
155(6.10)
155(6.10)
155(6.10)
155(6.10)

L2002 Inverter

2–15

Dimensional drawings, continued...
L200–055LFU2, –055HFU2, –075LFU2, -075HFU2, –055HFEF2, -075HFEF2

H=250(9.84)

H=220(8.66)

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

205(8.07)

2-φ5(0.20)

6.5(0.25)
6(0.24)
164(6.46)

155(6.10)

5.5(0.22)

6(0.24)

7(0.16)

180(7.09)

Model

-055LFU2
-055HFU2
-075LFU2
-075HFU2
-055HFEF2
-075HFEF2

205(8.07)
205(8.07)
205(8.07)
205(8.07)
250(9.84)
250(9.84)

2–16

Step-by-Step Basic Installation

Prepare for Wiring
5

Step 5: It is very important to perform the wiring steps carefully and correctly. Before
proceeding, please study the caution and warning messages below.

WARNING: “Use 60/75°C Cu wire only” or equivalent.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

WARNING: “Open Type Equipment.”

WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000
rms symmetrical amperes, 240 V maximum.” For models with suffix N or L.
WARNING: “Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000
rms symmetrical amperes, 480 V maximum.” For models with suffix H.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Be sure to ground the unit. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric
shock and/or fire.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Wiring work shall be carried out only by qualified personnel. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/or fire.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Implement wiring after checking that the power supply is OFF. Otherwise, you may incur electric shock and/or fire.
HIGH VOLTAGE: Do not connect wiring to an inverter or operate an inverter that is
not mounted according the instructions given in this manual. Otherwise, there is a danger
of electric shock and/or injury to personnel.

L2002 Inverter

2–17

Determining Wire and Fuse Sizes
The maximum motor currents in your application determines the recommended wire
size. The following table gives the wire size in AWG. The “Power Lines” column applies
to the inverter input power, output wires to the motor, the earth ground connection, and
any other component shown in the “Basic System Description” on page 2–7. The
“Signal Lines” column applies to any wire connecting to the two green 8-position
connectors just inside the front panel half-door.
Motor Output
(kW/HP)

Applicable
equipment

Wiring
Inverter Model

Power Lines

0.2

1/4

L200-002NFE(F)2/NFU2

0.4

1/2

L200-004NFE(F)2/NFU2

0.55

3/4

L200-005NFE(F)2

0.75

1.1

1 1/2

1.5

2.2

Signal Lines

Fuse / Breaker

AWG16 / 1.3 mm2

10A

AWG14 / 2.1 mm2

15A

L200-015NFE(F)2/NFU2

AWG12 / 3.3 mm2

20A (single ph.)
15A (three ph.)

L200-022NFE(F)2/NFU2

AWG10 / 5.3 mm2

30A (single ph.)
20A (three ph.)

3.7

L200-037LFU2

AWG10 / 5.3 mm2

5.5

7 1/2

L200-055LFU2

AWG10 / 5.3 mm2

7.5

L200-075LFU2

AWG8 / 8.4 mm2

0.4

1/2

L200-004HFE(F)2/HFU2

0.75

L200-007HFE(F)2/HFU2

1.5

L200-015HFE(F)2/HFU2

2.2

L200-022HFE(F)2/HFU2

3.0

L200-030HFE(F)2

4.0

L200-040HFE(F)2/HFU2

5.5

7 1/2

L200-055HFE(F)2/HFU2

7.5

L200-075HFE(F)2/HFU2

Note 1:

Note 2:
Note 3:
Note 4:
Note 5:

L200-007NFE(F)2/NFU2
L200-011NFE(F)2

18 to 28 AWG /
0.14 to 0.75 mm2
shielded wire
(see Note 4)

30A
40A
50A
3A

AWG16 / 1.3 mm2

6A
10A

AWG14 / 2.1 mm2
AWG12 / 3.3 mm2

15A
20A
25A

Field wiring must be made by a UL-listed and CSA-certified closed-loop
terminal connector sized for the wire gauge involved. Connector must be
fixed by using the crimping tool specified by the connector manufacturer.
Be sure to consider the capacity of the circuit breaker to be used.
Be sure to use a larger wire gauge if power line length exceeds 66 ft. (20m).
Use 18 AWG / 0.75 mm2 wire for the alarm signal wire ([AL0], [AL1], [AL2]
terminals).
The inverter’s input power wiring must include UL Listed, dual-element,
600V fuses, or UL Listed, inverse-time, 600V circuit breakers.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

2–18

Step-by-Step Basic Installation

Terminal Dimensions and Torque Specs
The terminal screw dimensions for all L2002 inverters are listed in table below. This
information is useful in sizing spade lug or ring lug connectors for wire terminations.
CAUTION: Fasten the screws with the specified fastening torque in the table below.
Check for any loosening of screws. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

Connector

Number
of Screw
Terminals

Models 002NF,
004NF, 005NF

Models 007NF022NF, 037LF,
004HF - 040HF

Models 055LF,
075LF, 055HF,
075HF

Screw
Diameter

Width
(mm)

Screw
Diameter

Width
(mm)

Screw
Diameter

Width
(mm)

Power Terminals

M3.5

7.1

Control Signal

—

Alarm Signal

—

Ground Terminals

—

When connecting wiring, use the tightening torque listed in the following table to safely
attach wiring to the connectors.
Screw

Tightening Torque

Screw

Tightening Torque

0.2 N•m (max. 0.25 N•m) M3.5

0.8 N•m (max. 0.9 N•m)

0.5 N•m (max. 0.6 N•m)

1.2 N•m (max. 1.3 N•m)

Screw
M5
—

Tightening Torque
2.0 N•m (max. 2.2 N•m)
—

Wire the Inverter Input to a Supply
6

Step 6: In this step, you will connect
wiring to the input of the inverter. First,
you must determine whether the inverter
model you have requires three-phase
power only, or if it can accept either
single-phase or three-phase power. All
models have the same power connector
terminals [R/L1], [S/L2], and [T/L3].
So, you must refer to the specifications
label (on the side of the inverter) for
the acceptable power source types! For
inverters that can accept single-phase
power and are connected that way,
terminal [S/L2] will remain unconnected.

Single-phase
input wiring

The examples to the right show singlephase and 3-phase input wiring. Note the
use of ring lug connectors for a secure connection.

3-phase
input wiring

L2002 Inverter

2–19

Please use the terminal arrangement below corresponding to your inverter model.
Inverter models L200–002NFEF2/NFU2, –004NFEF2/NFU2,
–005NFEF2
Jumper

+1
+
–
L2 N/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3

Chassis
Ground

Jumper

NFEF, NFU
LFU, HFEF, HFU

+1
L1

+
–
L2 N/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3

Chassis
Ground

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3

Inverter models L200–055LFU2, –055HFE2/HFU2,
–075LFU2, –075HFE2/HFU2

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
PD/+1 P/+ N/–
Jumper

Chassis Ground

Inverter models L200–055HFEF2, –075HFEF2

L1
+1

L2
+

L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
–
Jumper

Chassis Ground

NOTE: An inverter powered by a portable power generator may receive a distorted
power waveform, overheating the generator. In general, the generator capacity should be
five times that of the inverter (kVA).

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

Inverter models L200–007NFEF2 to –022NFEF2,
–037LFU2, –004HFEF2/HFU2 to –040HFEF2/HFU2

2–20

Step-by-Step Basic Installation

CAUTION: Be sure that the input voltage matches the inverter specifications:
• Single/Three phase 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz (up to 2.2kW) for NFEF/NFU models
• Three phase 200 to 240V 50/60Hz (above 2.2kW) for LFU models
• Three phase 380 to 480 V 50/60Hz for HFEF models

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

CAUTION: If you power a 3-phase-only inverter with single phase power, you must
derate the output current. Be sure to call your Hitachi distributor for assistence. Otherwise, there is the possibility of damage to the inverter and the danger of fire.
CAUTION: Be sure not to connect an AC power supply to the output terminals. Otherwise, there is the possibility of damage to the inverter and the danger of injury and/or
fire.
L2002 Inverter
Power Input

Output to Motor

CAUTION: Remarks for using ground fault interrupter breakers in the main power
supply:
Adjustable frequency inverters with CE-filters (RFI-filter) and shielded (screened) motor
cables have a higher leakage current toward Earth GND. Especially at the moment of
switching ON this can cause an inadvertent trip of ground fault interrupters. Because of
the rectifier on the input side of the inverter there is the possibility to stall the switch-off
function through small amounts of DC current. Please observe the following:
• Use only short time-invariant and pulse current-sensitive ground fault interrupters
with higher trigger current.
• Other components should be secured with separate ground fault interrupters.
• Ground fault interrupters in the power input wiring of an inverter are not an
absolute protection against electric shock.
CAUTION: Be sure to install a fuse in each phase of the main power supply to the
inverter. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.
CAUTION: For motor leads, ground fault interrupter breakers and electromagnetic
contactors, be sure to size these components properly (each must have the capacity for
rated current and voltage). Otherwise, there is the danger of fire.

L2002 Inverter

2–21

Wire the Inverter Output to Motor
7

Step 7: The process of motor selection is beyond the scope of this manual. However, it
must be an AC induction motor with three phases. It should also come with a chassis
ground lug. If the motor does not have three power input leads, stop the installation and
verify the motor type. Other guidelines for wiring the motor include:
• Use an inverter-grade motor for maximum motor life (1600V insulation).
• For standard motors, use the AC reactor accessory if the wiring between the inverter
and motor exceeds 10 meters in length.
L200–004NFU2 Wiring Example

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

Simply connect the motor to the terminals
[U/T1], [V/T2], and [W/T3] as shown to the
right. This is a good time to connect the
chassis ground lug on the drive as well. The
motor chassis ground must also connect to
the same point. Use a star ground (singlepoint) arrangement, and never daisy-chain the
grounds (point-to-point).
Use the same wire gauge on the motor and
chassis ground wiring as you used on the
power input wiring in the previous step. After
completing the wiring:
• Check the mechanical integrity of each
wire crimp and terminal connection.
• Replace the housing partition that covers
access to the power connections.
• Replace the front housing cover. First,
align the two hinging tabs. Then press the
cover onto the inverter until the locking
tabs click into place.

To Power
Supply

To Chassis
Ground

To Motor

Logic Control Wiring
After completing the initial installation and powerup test in this chapter, you may need to
wire the logic signal connector for your application. For new inverter users/applications,
we highly recommend that you first complete the powerup test in this chapter without
adding any logic control wiring. Then you will be ready to set the required parameters
for logic control as covered in Chapter 4, Operations and Monitoring.

2–22

Powerup Test

Uncover the Inverter Vents
8

Step 8: After mounting and wiring the inverter,
remove any covers from the inverter housing. This
includes material over the side ventilation ports.

Ventilation holes
(top)

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

WARNING: Make sure the input power to the
inverter is OFF. If the drive has been powered,
leave it OFF for five minutes before continuing.

Ventilation holes
(both sides)

Powerup Test
9

Step 9: After wiring the inverter and motor, you’re ready to do a powerup test. The
procedure that follows is designed for the first-time use of the drive. Please verify the
following conditions before conducting the powerup test:
• You have followed all the steps in this chapter up to this step.
• The inverter is new, and is securely mounted to a non-flammable vertical surface
• The inverter is connected to a power source and motor.
• No additional wiring of inverter connectors or terminals has been done.
• The power supply is reliable, and the motor is a known working unit, and the motor
nameplate ratings match the inverter ratings.
• The motor is securely mounted, and is not connected to any load.

Goals for the Powerup Test
If there are any exceptions to the above conditions at this step, please take a moment to
take any measures necessary to reach this basic starting point. The specific goals of this
powerup test are:
1. Verify that the wiring to the power supply and motor is correct.
2. Demonstrate that the inverter and motor are generally compatible.
3. Get an introduction to the use of the built-in operator keypad.
The powerup test gives you an important starting point to ensure a safe and successful
application of the Hitachi inverter. We highly recommend performing this test before
proceeding to the other chapters in this manual.

L2002 Inverter

2–23

Pre-test and Operational Precautions
The following instructions apply to the powerup test, or to any time the inverter is
powered and operating. Please study the following instructions and messages before
proceeding with the powerup test.
1. The power supply must have fusing suitable for the load. Check the fuse size chart
presented in Step 5, if necessary.
2. Be sure you have access to a disconnect switch for the drive input power if necessary.
However, do not turn OFF power during inverter operation unless it is an emergency.
3. Turn the keypad potentiometer to the minimum position (fully counter-clockwise).

CAUTION: The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low speed to high
speed. Be sure to check the capability and limitations of the motor and machine before
operating the inverter. Otherwise, there is the danger of injury.
CAUTION: If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard
default setting (50Hz/60Hz), be sure to check the motor and machine specifications with
the respective manufacturer. Only operate the motor at elevated frequencies after getting
their approval. Otherwise, there is the danger of equipment damage and/or injury.
CAUTION: Check the following before and during the powerup test. Otherwise, there is
the danger of equipment damage.
• Is the shorting bar between the [+1] and [+] terminals installed? DO NOT power
or operate the inverter if the jumper is removed.
• Is the direction of the motor rotation correct?
• Did the inverter trip during acceleration or deceleration?
• Were the rpm and frequency meter readings as expected?
• Were there any abnormal motor vibrations or noise?

Powering the Inverter
If you have followed all the steps, cautions and warnings up to this point, you’re ready to
apply power. After doing so, the following events should occur:
• The POWER LED will illuminate.
• The numeric (7-segment) LEDs will display a test pattern, then stop at 0.0.
• The Hz LED will be ON.
If the motor starts running unexpectedly or any other problem occurs, press the STOP
key. Only if necessary should you remove power to the inverter as a remedy.
NOTE: If the inverter has been previously powered and programmed, the LEDs (other
than the POWER LED) may illuminate differently than as indicated above. If necessary,
you can initialize all parameters to the factory default settings. See “Restoring Factory
Default Settings” on page 6–8.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

CAUTION: The heat sink fins will have a high temperature. Be careful not to touch
them. Otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

2–24

Using the Front Panel Keypad

Using the Front Panel Keypad
Please take a moment to familiarize yourself with the keypad layout shown in the figure
below. The display is used in programming the inverter’s parameters, as well as monitoring specific parameter values during operation.
Serial port

Display Units (Hertz / Amperes) LEDs
Parameter Display

POWER

HITACHI

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

Run Key Enable LED

FUNC.

Run Key
Stop/Reset Key

RUN

STOP
RESET

Alarm LED

ALARM

5 0.0

Power LED

Run/Stop LED

A
RUN

Program/Monitor LED

PRG

Potentiometer Enable LED
STR

Potentiometer
Function key

Up/Down keys

Store key

Key and Indicator Legend
• Run/Stop LED - ON when the inverter output is ON and the motor is developing
torque (Run Mode), and OFF when the inverter output is OFF (Stop Mode).
• Program/Monitor LED - This LED is ON when the inverter is ready for parameter
editing (Program Mode). It is OFF when the parameter display is monitoring data
(Monitor Mode).
• Run Key Enable LED - is ON when the inverter is ready to respond to the Run key,
OFF when the Run key is disabled.
• Run Key - Press this key to run the motor (the Run Enable LED must be ON first).
Parameter F004, Keypad Run Key Routing, determines whether the Run key generates
a Run FWD or Run REV command.
• Stop/Reset Key - Press this key to stop the motor when it is running (uses the
programmed deceleration rate). This key will also reset an alarm that has tripped.
• Potentiometer - Allows an operator to directly set the motor speed when the potentiometer is enabled for output frequency control.
• Potentiometer Enable LED - ON when the potentiometer is enabled for value entry.
• Parameter Display - A 4-digit, 7-segment display for parameters and function codes.
• Display Units, Hertz/Amperes - One of these LEDs will be ON to indicate the units
associated with the parameter display.
• Power LED - This LED is ON when the power input to the inverter is ON.
• Alarm LED - ON when an inverter trip is active (alarm relay contacts will be closed).
• Function Key - This key is used to navigate through the lists of parameters and
functions for setting and monitoring parameter values.
• Up/Down ( 1 , 2 ) Keys - Use these keys alternately to move up or down the lists of
parameter and functions shown in the display, and increment/decrement values.
• Store ( STR ) Key - When the unit is in Program Mode and you have edited a parameter
value, press the Store key to write the new value to the EEPROM.

L2002 Inverter

2–25

Keys, Modes, and Parameters
The purpose of the keypad is to provide a way to change
modes and parameters. The term function applies to both
monitoring modes and parameters. These are all accessible
through function codes that are primarily 4-character
codes. The various functions are separated into related
groups identifiable by the left-most character, as the table
shows.
Type (Category) of Function

d 001
FUNC.

Mode to Access

“D”

Monitoring functions

Monitor

“F”

Main profile parameters

Program

“A”

Standard functions

Program

“B”

Fine tuning functions

Program

“C”

Intelligent terminal functions

Program

“H”

Motor constant functions

Program

“E”

Error codes

A
RUN

STOP
RESET

RUN

ALARM

PRG

STR

PRG LED
Indicator

—

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

Function
Group

POWER

HITACHI

—

For example, function “A004” is the base frequency setting for the motor, typically
50 Hz or 60 Hz. To edit the parameter, the inverter must be in Program Mode (PRG LED
will be ON). You use the front panel keys to first select the function code “A004.” After
displaying the value for “A004,” use the Up/Down ( 1 or 2 ) keys to edit it.
POWER

HITACHI

A- - RUN
FUNC.

A004

FUNC.

PRG

RUN
STR

FUNC.

STOP
RESET

POWER

HITACHI

ALARM

RUN

STOP
RESET

POWER

HITACHI

ALARM

5 0.0

A
RUN

FUNC.

PRG

ALARM

RUN
STR

FUNC.

PRG

STOP
RESET

STR

NOTE: The inverter 7-segment display shows lower case “b” and “d,” meaning the same
as the upper case letters “B” and “D” used in this manual (for uniformity “A to F”).
The inverter automatically switches into Monitor
Mode when you access “D” Group functions. It
switches into Program Mode when you access
any other group, because they all have editable
parameters. Error codes use the “E” Group, and
appear automatically when a fault event occurs.
Refer to “Monitoring Trip Events, History, &
Conditions” on page 6–5 for error code details.

MONITOR

“D”
“D”Group
Group

PROGRAM
“A” Group
“B” Group
“C” Group
“F” Group
“H” Group

2–26

Using the Front Panel Keypad

Keypad Navigational Map
The L2002 Series inverter drives have many programmable functions and parameters.
Chapter 3 will cover these in detail, but you need to access just a few items to perform
the powerup test. The menu structure makes use of function codes and parameter codes
to allow programming and monitoring with only a 4-digit display and a few keys and
LEDs. So, it is important to become familiar with the basic navigational map of parameters and functions in the diagram below. You may later use this map as a reference.
Monitor Mode

Program Mode

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

PRG LED=OFF
Display Data

0 0 0.0
FUNC.

d 083
1

Select Parameter

Select
Function
or Group

2
FUNC.

Edit
FUNC.

FUNC.

1 2 3.4

STR

b 001
1

A1 55

FUNC.

Write
data to
EEPROM

A001

F 001

b1 51

F 004
1

Increment/
decrement
value

C 001
1

A– – –
1

C1 49

b– – –
1

H006
H003

C– – –
1

Store as
powerup
default

H– – –
1

Edit Parameter

powerdown

d 001
1

PRG LED=ON

Return to
parameter
list

The navigational map shows the relationship of all resources of the inverter in one view.
In general, use the FUNC. key to move left and right, and the 1 2 (arrow) keys to
move up and down.

L2002 Inverter

2–27

Selecting Functions and Editing Parameters
To prepare to run the motor in the powerup test, this section will show how to configure
the necessary parameters:
1. Confirm the TM/PRG DIP switch setting.
2. Select the keypad potentiometer as the source of motor speed command (A001)
3. Select the keypad as the source of the RUN command (A002)
4. Set the inverter’s maximum output frequency to the motor (A003)
5. Set the motor current for proper thermal protection (B012)
7. Set the number of poles for the motor (H004)
The following series of programming tables are designed for successive use. Each table
uses the previous table’s final state as the starting point. Therefore, start with the first and
continue programming until the last one. If you get lost or concerned that some of the
other parameters settings may be incorrect, refer to “Restoring Factory Default Settings”
on page 6–8.
TM/PRG DIP Switch Setting - This switch must be in the “PRG” position
(factory default) in order for A001 and A002 settings to be active. Otherwise, the keypad will be unable to accept a Run command or set the motor
speed with the potentiometer. If the switch setting has been changed, see the
“DIP Switch Introduction” on page 2–5.

PRG

Prepare to Edit Parameters - This sequence begins with powering ON the inverter;
then it shows how to navigate to the “A” Group parameters for subsequent settings. You
can also refer to the “Keypad Navigational Map” on page 2–26 for orientation throughout the steps.
Action
Turn ON the inverter.
Press the

FUNC.

Press the

Display

0.0

Func./Parameter
Inverter output frequency
displayed (0Hz in Stop Mode).

key.

d 001

“D” Group selected

key four times.

A– – –

“A” Group selected

Select the Potentiometer for Speed Command The inverter output frequency can be set from several
sources, including an analog input, memory setting,
or the network, for example. The powerup test uses
the keypad potentiometer as the speed control source
for your convenience. In the figure to the right, notice
the Potentiometer Enable LED, just above the knob.
If the LED is ON, the potentiometer is already
selected as the source, and you may skip this step.
Note that the default setting depends on the country.

Potentiometer Enable LED
POWER

HITACHI

ALARM

5 0.0
RUN
FUNC.

STOP
RESET

A
RUN
PRG

STR

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

6. Set the inverter’s Automatic Voltage Regulation for the motor (A082)

2–28

Using the Front Panel Keypad
If the Potentiometer Enable LED is OFF, follow the steps below.
Action

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

(Starting point)

Display

Func./Parameter

A– – –

“A” Group selected

A001

Speed command source setting

Press the

FUNC.

key.

Press the

FUNC.

key again.

00 = Keypad potentiometer
01 = Control terminals
02 = Function F001 setting
03 = ModBus network
10 = Calculate function output

Press the

key.

00 = potentiometer (selected)

Press the

STR

key.

A001

Select the Keypad for the RUN Command - The RUN
command causes the inverter to accelerate the motor to
the selected speed. The Run command can arrive from
various sources, including the control terminals, the Run
key on the keypad, or the network. In the figure to the
right, notice the Run Key Enable LED, just above the
Run key. If the LED is ON, the Run key is already
selected as the source, and you may skip this step. Note
that the default setting depends on the country.

Stores parameter, returns to “A”
Group list

Run Key Enable LED
POWER

HITACHI

ALARM

5 0.0
RUN
FUNC.

STOP
RESET

A
RUN
PRG

STR

If the Potentiometer Enable LED is OFF, follow the steps below (the table resumes
action from the end of the previous table).
Action
(Starting point)

key once.

Display

Func./Parameter

A001

Speed command source setting

A002

Run command source setting

Press the

FUNC.

key.

01 = control terminals
02 = Run key on keypad
03 = ModBus network input

Press the

key.

02 = keypad (selected)

Press the

STR

key.

A002

Stores parameter, returns to “A”
Group list

NOTE: After completing the steps above, the Run Key Enable LED will be ON. This
does not mean the motor is trying to run; it means that the RUN key is now enabled.
DO NOT press the RUN key at this time—complete the parameter setup first.

2–29

L2002 Inverter

Set the Motor Base Frequency - The motor is designed to operate at a specific AC
frequency. Most commercial motors are designed for 50/60 Hz operation. First, check
the motor specifications. Then follow the steps below to verify the setting or correct it
for your motor. DO NOT set it greater than 50/60 Hz unless the motor manufacturer
specifically approves operation at the higher frequency.
Action
(Starting point)
Press the

FUNC.

key once.
key.

Func./Parameter

A002

Run command source setting

A003

Base frequency setting

Default value for base frequency.
US = 60 Hz, Europe = 50 Hz.

50
Press the

Press the

STR

key.

key as needed.

60
A003

Set to your motor specs (your
display may be different)
Stores parameter, returns to “A”
Group list

CAUTION: If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard
default setting (50Hz/60Hz), be sure to check the motor and machine specifications with
the respective manufacturer. Only operate the motor at elevated frequencies after getting
their approval. Otherwise, there is the danger of equipment damage.
Set the AVR Voltage Setting - The inverter has an Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR)
function. It adjusts the output voltage to match the motor’s nameplate voltage rating. The
AVR smooths out fluctuations in the input power source, but note that it does not boost
the voltage in the event of a brown-out. Use the AVR setting (A082) that most closely
matches the one for your motor.
• 200V Class: 200 / 215 / 220 / 230 / 240 VAC
• 400V Class: 380 / 400 / 415 / 440 / 460 / 480 VAC
TIP: If you need to scroll through a function or parameter list, press and hold the
2 key to auto-increment through the list.
To set the motor voltage, follow the steps on the following page.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

Press the

Display

2–30

Using the Front Panel Keypad

Action

(Starting point)
Press the
Press the

FUNC.

key and hold until-->
key.

Display

A003

Base frequency setting

A082

AVR voltage select

230
or

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

400
Press the

Press the

STR

key as needed.

key.

Func./Parameter

21 5
A082

Default values for AVR voltage:
200V class = 230VAC
400V class = 400VAC (–xxxFEF)
400V class = 460VAC (–xxxFU)
Set to your motor specs (your
display may be different)
Stores parameter, returns to “A”
Group list

Set the Motor Current - The inverter has thermal overload protection that is designed
to protect the inverter and motor from overheating due to an excessive load. The
inverter’s uses the motor’s current rating to calculate the time-based heating effect. This
protection depends on using the correct current rating for your motor. The level of
electronic thermal setting, parameter B012, is adjustable from 20% to 120% of the
inverter’s rated current. A proper configuration will also help prevent unnecessary
inverter trip events.
Read the motor’s current rating on its manufacturer’s nameplate. Then follow the steps
below to configure the inverter’s thermal overload protection setting.
Action

(Starting point)

Display

Func./Parameter

A082

Base frequency setting

Press the

FUNC.

key.

A– – –

“A” Group selected

Press the

key.

b– – –

“B” Group selected

Press the

FUNC.

key.

b 001

First “B” Group parameter
selected

Press the

key and hold until-->

b 01 2

Level of electronic thermal setting

Press the

FUNC.

Press the

STR

key.
or

key.

key as needed.

1.60

Default value will be 100% of
inverter rated current.

1.80

Set to your motor specs (your
display may be different)

B01 2

Stores parameter, returns to “B”
Group list

L2002 Inverter

2–31

Set the Number of Motor Poles - The motor’s internal winding arrangement determines its number of magnetic poles. The specifications label on the motor usually
indicates the number of poles. For proper operation, verify the parameter setting matches
the motor poles. Many industrial motors have four poles, corresponding to the default
setting in the inverter (H004).
Follow the steps in the table below to verify the motor poles setting and change it if
necessary (the table resumes action from the end of the previous table).
Action

Func./Parameter

b 01 2

Level of electronic thermal setting

key.

b– – –

“B” Group selected

key two times.

H– – –

“H” Group selected

key.

H003

First “H” parameter

key once.

H004

Motor poles parameter

(Starting point)
Press the

FUNC.

Press the

FUNC.

Press the

FUNC.

Press the

STR

key.

key as needed.

2 = 2 poles
4 = 4 poles (default)
6 = 6 poles
8 = 8 poles

Set to match your motor (your
display may be different)

H004

Stores parameter, returns to “H”
Group list

This step concludes the parameter setups for the inverter. You are almost ready to run the
motor for the first time!
TIP: If you became lost during any of these steps, first observe the state of the PRG
LED. Then study the “Keypad Navigational Map” on page 2–26 to determine the current
state of the keypad controls and display. As long as you do not press the STR key, no
parameters will be changed by keypad entry errors. Note that power cycling the inverter
causes it to power up Monitor Mode, displaying the value for D001 (output frequency).
The next section will show you how to monitor a particular parameter from the display.
Then you will be ready to run the motor.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

Display

2–32

Using the Front Panel Keypad

Monitoring Parameters with the Display

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

After using the keypad for parameter editing,
it’s a good idea to switch the inverter from
Program Mode to Monitor Mode. The PRG
LED will be OFF, and the Hertz or Ampere
LED indicates the display units.

POWER

HITACHI
Hz

5 0.0
RUN

STOP
RESET

ALARM

A
RUN
PRG

For the powerup test, monitor the motor
2 STR
FUNC. 1
speed indirectly by viewing the inverter’s
output frequency. The output frequency must
not be confused with base frequency (50/
60 Hz) of the motor, or the carrier frequency (switching frequency of the inverter, in the
kHz range). The monitoring functions are in the “D” list, located near the top left of the
“Keypad Navigational Map” on page 2–26.
Output frequency (speed) monitor - Resuming keypad operation from the previous
table, follow the steps below. Or instead, you can simply power cycle the inverter, which
automatically sets the display to D001 (output frequency value).
Action

Display

Func./Parameter

Press the

FUNC.

key.

H– – –

“H” Group selected

Press the

key.

d 001

Output frequency selected

Press the

FUNC.

key.

0.0

Output frequency displayed

When the inverter displays a monitor value, the PRG LED is OFF. This confirms the
inverter is not in programming mode, even while you are selecting the particular
monitoring parameter. The display shows the current speed (is zero at this point). The Hz
LED will be ON, indicating the display units. For current, the Amperes LED will be ON.

Running the Motor
If you have programmed all the parameters up to this point, you’re ready to run the
motor! First, review this checklist:
1. Verify the Power LED is ON. If not, check the power connections.
2. Verify the Potentiometer Enable LED is ON. If it is OFF, check the A001 setting.
3. Verify the Run Key Enable LED is ON. If it is OFF, check the A002 setting.
4. Verify the PRG LED is OFF. If it is ON, review the instructions above.
5. Make sure the motor is disconnected from any mechanical load.
6. Turn the potentiometer to the minimum position (completely counter clock-wise).
7. Now, press the RUN key on the keypad. The RUN LED will turn ON.
8. Slowly increase the potentiometer setting in clockwise fashion. The motor should
start turning.
9. Press the STOP key to stop the motor rotation.

L2002 Inverter

2–33

Powerup Test Observations and Summary
Step 10: Reading this section will help you make some useful observations when first
10 running the motor.
Error Codes - If the inverter displays an error code (format is “E X X”), see “Monitoring
Trip Events, History, & Conditions” on page 6–5 to interpret and clear the error.
Acceleration and Deceleration - The L2002 inverter has programmable acceleration
and deceleration values. The test procedure left these at the default value, 10 seconds.
You can observe this by setting the potentiometer at about half speed before running the
motor. Then press RUN, and the motor will take 5 seconds to reach a steady speed. Press
the STOP key to see a 5 second deceleration to a stop.

Interpreting the Display - First, refer to the output frequency display readout. The
maximum frequency setting (parameter A004) defaults to 50 Hz or 60 Hz (Europe and
United States, respectively) for your application.
Example: Suppose a 4-pole motor is rated for 60 Hz operation, so the inverter is configured to output 60 Hz at full scale. Use the following formula to calculate the RPM.
× 60 = Frequency
× 120 = 60
× 120- = 1800RPM
Speed in RPM = Frequency
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pairs of poles
# of poles
4
The theoretical speed for the motor is 1800 RPM (speed of torque vector rotation).
However, the motor cannot generate torque unless its shaft turns at a slightly different
speed. This difference is called slip. So it’s common to see a rated speed of approximately 1750 RPM on a 60 Hz, 4-pole motor. Using a tachometer to measure shaft speed,
you can see the difference between the inverter output frequency and the actual motor
speed. The slip increases slightly as the motor’s load increases. This is why the inverter
output value is called “frequency,” since it is not exactly equal to motor speed. You can
program the inverter to display output frequency in units more directly related to the load
speed by entering a constant (discussed more in depth on page 3–41).
Run/Stop Versus Monitor/Program Modes –
The Run LED on the inverter is ON in Run Mode,
and OFF in Stop Mode. The Program LED is ON
when the inverter is in Program Mode, and OFF for
Monitor Mode. All four mode combinations are
possible. The diagram to the right depicts the
modes and the mode transitions via keypad.

Run

STOP
RESET
RUN

Stop

FUNC.

Monitor

Program

NOTE: Some factory automation devices such as PLCs have alternate Run/Program
modes; the device is in either one mode or the other. In the Hitachi inverter, however,
Run Mode alternates with Stop Mode, and Program Mode alternates with Monitor
Mode. This arrangement lets you program some values while the inverter is operating—
providing flexibility for maintenance personnel.

Inverter Mounting
and Installation

State of Inverter at Stop - If you adjust the motor’s speed to zero, the motor will slow to
a near stop, and the inverter turns the outputs OFF. The high-performance L2002 can
rotate at a very slow speed with high torque output, but not zero (must use servo systems
with position feedback for that feature). This characteristic means you must use a
mechanical brake for some applications.

Configuring
Drive Parameters
In This Chapter....

3
page

— Choosing a Programming Device ................... 2
— Using Keypad Devices .................................... 3
— “D” Group: Monitoring Functions..................... 6
— “F” Group: Main Profile Parameters ................ 9
— “A” Group: Standard Functions ..................... 10
— “B” Group: Fine Tuning Functions ................. 33
— “C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions...... 47
— “H” Group: Motor Constants Functions ......... 63
— “P” Group: Expansion Card Functions .......... 64

3–2

Choosing a Programming Device

Choosing a Programming Device
Introduction
Hitachi variable frequency drives (inverters) use the latest electronics technology for
getting the right AC waveform to the motor at the right time. The benefits are many,
including energy savings and higher machine output or productivity. The flexibility
required to handle a broad range of applications has required ever more configurable
options and parameters—inverters are now a complex industrial automation component.
And this can make a product seem difficult to use, but the goal of this chapter is to make
this easier for you.
As the powerup test in Chapter 2 demonstrated, you do not have to program very many
parameters to run the motor. In fact, most applications would benefit only from programming just a few, specific parameters. This chapter will explain the purpose of each set of
parameters, and help you choose the ones that are important to your application.

Configuring
Drive Parameters

If you are developing a new application for the inverter and a motor, finding the right
parameters to change is mostly an exercise in optimization. Therefore, it is okay to begin
running the motor with a loosely tuned system. By making specific, individual changes
and observing their effects, you can achieve a finely tuned system.

Introduction to Inverter Programming
The front panel keypad is the first and best way to get to know the inverter’s capabilities.
Every function or programmable parameter is accessible from the keypad. The other
devices simply imitate the keypad’s layout and inverter access, while adding another
valuable aspect to the system. For example, the Digital Operator/Copy Unit can transfer
one inverter’s parameter settings to another inverter, while still providing standard
operator keypad control. In this way, you can use a variety of programming devices with
basically the same keypad skills. The following table shows various programming
options, the features unique to each device, and the cables required.

Device

Part
Number

Parameter
Access

Parameter
setting storage

Cables (choose one)
Part number

Length

External inverter
keypad

OPE–SRmini Monitor and
program

EEPROM in
inverter

ICS–1

1 meter

ICS–3

3 meters

Digital Operator/
Copy Unit

SRW–0EX

Read Function
downloads to
EEPROM in
operator unit

ICS–1

1 meter

ICS–3

3 meters

Monitor and
program

NOTE: When an external digital operator device such as an OPE–SRmini or
SRW–0EX is connected to the inverter, the inverter’s keypad is automatically disabled
(except for the Stop Key).
NOTE: When using the SRW–0EX Copy Unit, you cannot copy parameters between
L200 and L2002 series inverters, nor between SJ2002 and L2002 series inverters.

L2002 Inverter

3–3

Using Keypad Devices
The L2002 Series inverter front keypad contains all the elements for both monitoring and
programming parameters. The keypad layout is pictured below. All other programming
devices for the inverter have a similar key arrangement and function.
Serial port

Display Units (Hertz / Amperes) LEDs
Parameter Display

POWER

HITACHI

Run Key Enable LED

FUNC.

Run Key
Stop/Reset Key

RUN

STOP
RESET

Alarm LED

ALARM

5 0.0

Power LED

Run/Stop LED

A
RUN

Program/Monitor LED

PRG

Potentiometer Enable LED
STR

Potentiometer
Function key

Up/Down keys

Store key

Key and Indicator Legend
• Run/Stop LED - ON when the inverter output is ON and the motor is developing
torque (Run Mode), and OFF when the inverter output is OFF (Stop Mode).

• Run Key Enable LED - is ON when the inverter is ready to respond to the Run key,
OFF when the Run key is disabled.
• Run Key - Press this key to run the motor (the Run Enable LED must be ON first).
Parameter F004, Keypad Run Key Routing, determines whether the Run key generates
a Run FWD or Run REV command.
• Stop/Reset Key - Press this key to stop the motor when it is running (uses the
programmed deceleration rate). This key will also reset an alarm that has tripped.
• Potentiometer - Allows an operator to directly set the motor speed when the potentiometer is enabled for output frequency control.
• Potentiometer Enable LED - ON when the potentiometer is enabled for value entry.
• Parameter Display - A 4-digit, 7-segment display for parameters and function codes.
• Display Units, Hertz/Amperes - One of these LEDs will be ON to indicate the units
associated with the parameter display.
• Power LED - This LED is ON when the power input to the inverter is ON.
• Alarm LED - ON when an inverter trip is active (alarm relay contacts will be closed).
• Function Key - This key is used to navigate through the lists of parameters and
functions for setting and monitoring parameter values.
• Up/Down ( 1 , 2 ) Keys - Use these keys alternately to move up or down the lists of
parameter and functions shown in the display, and increment/decrement values.
• Store ( STR ) Key - When the unit is in Program Mode and you have edited a parameter
value, press the Store key to write the new value to the EEPROM.

Configuring
Drive Parameters

• Program/Monitor LED - This LED is ON when the inverter is ready for parameter
editing (Program Mode). It is OFF when the parameter display is monitoring data
(Monitor Mode).

3–4

Using Keypad Devices

Keypad Navigational Map
You can use the inverter’s front panel keypad to navigate to any parameter or function.
The diagram below shows the basic navigational map to access these items.
Monitor Mode

Program Mode

PRG LED=OFF
Display Data

0 0 0.0
FUNC.

d 083
1

Select Parameter

Select
Function
or Group

Configuring
Drive Parameters

2
FUNC.

Edit
FUNC.

FUNC.

1 2 3.4

STR

b 001
1

A1 55

FUNC.

Write
data to
EEPROM

A001

F 001

b1 51

F 004
1

Increment/
decrement
value

C 001
1

A– – –
1

C1 49

b– – –
1

H006
H003

C– – –
1

Store as
powerup
default

H– – –
1

Edit Parameter

powerdown

d 001
1

PRG LED=ON

Return to
parameter
list

NOTE: The inverter 7-segment display shows lower case “b” and “d,” meaning the same
as the upper case letters “B” and “D” used in this manual (for uniformity “A to F”).
NOTE: The Store Key saves the edited parameter (shown in the display) to the inverter’s
EEPROM. Upload or download of parameters to/from external devices is accomplished
through a different command—do not confuse Store with Download or Upload.

3–5

L2002 Inverter

Operational Modes
The RUN and PRG LEDs tell just part of the story;
Run Mode and Program Modes are independent
modes, not opposite modes. In the state diagram to
the right, Run alternates with Stop, and Program
Mode alternates with Monitor Mode. This is a very
important ability, for it shows that a technician can
approach a running machine and change some
parameters without shutting down the machine.

Run

STOP
RESET

Stop

RUN

FUNC.

Monitor

The occurrence of a fault during operation will
cause the inverter to enter the Trip Mode as shown.
Run
An event such as an output overload will cause the
inverter to exit the Run Mode and turn OFF its
output to the motor. In the Trip Mode, any request Fault
to run the motor is ignored. You must clear the
error by pressing the Stop/Reset switch. See
“Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions” on page 6–5.

Program

STOP
RESET
RUN

Stop

STOP
RESET

Trip

Fault

Run Mode Edits

The parameter tables in this chapter have a column titled “Run
Mode Edit.” An Ex mark ✘ means the parameter cannot be
edited; a Check mark ✔ means the parameter can be edited.
The table example to the right contains two adjacent marks
“✘ ✔”. These two marks (that can also be“✘ ✘” or “✔ ✔”)
correspond to low-access or high-access levels to Run Mode
edits (note Lo and Hi in column heading).

Run
Mode
Edit
Lo Hi
✘✔

The Software Lock Setting (parameter B031) determines when Run Mode access is in
effect and access permission in other conditions, as well. It is the responsibility of the
user to choose a useful and safe software lock setting for the inverter operating conditions and personnel. Please refer to “Software Lock Mode” on page 3–39.

Control Algorithms
The motor control program in the L2002
inverter has two sinusoidal PWM switching
algorithms. The intent is that you select the
best algorithm for the motor characteristics
in your application. Both algorithms
generate the frequency output in a unique
way. Once configured, the algorithm is the
basis for other parameter settings as well
(see “Torque Control Algorithms” on
page 3–18). Therefore, choose the best
algorithm early in your application design
process.

Inverter Control Algorithms

Variable freq. control,
constant torque
Output
Variable freq. control,
reduced torque

Configuring
Drive Parameters

The inverter can be in Run Mode (inverter output is controlling motor) and still allow
you to edit certain parameters. This is useful in applications that must run continuously.

3–6

“D” Group: Monitoring Functions

“D” Group: Monitoring Functions
You can access important system parameter values with the “D” Group monitoring
functions, whether the inverter is in Run Mode or Stop Mode. After selecting the
function code number for the parameter you want to monitor, press the Function key
once to show the value on the display. In functions D005 and D006, the intelligent terminals use individual segments of the display to show ON/OFF status.
If the inverter display is set to monitor a parameter and powerdown occurs, the inverter
stores the present monitor function setting. For your convenience, the display automatically returns to the previously monitored parameter upon the next powerup.
“D” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

D001 Output frequency
monitor
FM

0000.00Hz

Configuring
Drive Parameters

D002 Output current monitor
Iout

0000.0A

D003 Rotation direction
monitor
Dir

STOP

Run
Mode
Edit

Units

Real-time display of output
frequency to motor, from
0.0 to 400.0 Hz

—

Filtered display of output current
to motor (100 ms internal filter
time constant), range is
0 to 200% of inverter rated current

—

Three different indications:
“F”..... Forward
“o” .. Stop
“r”..... Reverse

—

% times
constant

—

Description

D004 Process variable (PV),
PID feedback monitor
FB

Displays the scaled PID process
variable (feedback) value (A075 is
scale factor),
00000.00% 0.00 to 99.99, 100.0 to 999.9,
1000. to 9999., 1000 to 999,
and 10000 to 99900

D005 Intelligent input
terminal status
IN-TM

Displays the state of the intelligent
input terminals:

LLLLL

ON
OFF
5 4 3 2 1
Terminal numbers

D006 Intelligent output
terminal status
OUT-TM

Displays the state of the intelligent
output terminals:
LLL

ON
OFF
AL 12 11
Terminal numbers

L2002 Inverter

“D” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

Run
Mode
Edit

Units

—

Hz times
constant

D013 Output voltage monitor

Voltage of output to motor,
range is 0.0 to 600.0V

—

Displays total time the inverter has
been in RUN mode in hours.
Range is 0 to 9999 /
1000 to 9999 /
Γ100 to Γ999 (10,000 to 99,900)

—

hours

Displays total time the inverter has
been in RUN mode in hours.
Range is 0 to 9999 /
1000 to 9999 /
Γ100 to Γ999 (10,000 to 99,900)

—

hours

00000V

D016 Cumulative operation
RUN time monitor
RUN

0000000hr

D017 Cumulative power-on
time monitor
ON

0000000hr

Trip Event and History Monitoring
The trip event and history monitoring feature lets you cycle through related information
using the keypad. See “Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions” on page 6–5 for
more details.
“D” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

D080 Trip counter
ERR CNT

00000

D081 Trip monitor 1
ERR 1

########

D082 Trip monitor 2
ERR 2

########

D083 Trip monitor 3
ERR 3

########

Run
Mode
Edit

Units

Number of trip events,
range is 0. to 9999

—

events

Displays trip event information:
• Error code
• Output freq. at trip point
• Motor current at trip point
• DC bus voltage at trip point
• Cumulative inverter operation time at trip point
• Cumulative power-ON time
at trip point

—

Description

Configuring
Drive Parameters

D007 Scaled output frequency Displays the output frequency
monitor
scaled by the constant in B086.
Decimal point indicates range:
F-Cnv
00000.00 XX.XX 0.00 to 99.99
XXX.X 100.0 to 999.9
XXXX. 1000. to 9999.
XXXX 1000 to 9999 (x10=
10000 to 99999)

Vout

3–7

3–8

“D” Group: Monitoring Functions

Local Monitoring During Network Operation
The L2002 inverter’s serial port may be connected to a network or to an external digital
operator. During those times, the inverter keypad keys will not function (except for the
Stop key). However, the inverter’s 4-digit display still provides the Monitor Mode
function, displaying any of the parameters D001 to D007. Function B089, Monitor
Display Select for Networked Inverter, determines the particular D00x parameter
displayed. Refer to the table below.

Configuring
Drive Parameters

B089 Monitor Display Select for Networked Inverter
Option
Code

Monitor
Code

D001

Output frequency monitor

D002

Output current monitor

D003

Rotation direction monitor

D004

Process variable (PV), PID feedback monitor

D005

Intelligent input terminal status

D006

Intelligent output terminal status

D007

Scaled output frequency monitor

Monitor Function Name

When monitoring the inverter during network operation, please note the following:
• The inverter display will monitor D00x functions according to B089 setting when...
• the OPE/485 DIP switch is set to the “485” position, or
• a device is already connected to the inverter’s serial port at inverter powerup.
• During network operation, the inverter keypad will also display error codes for
inverter trip events. Use the Stop key or inverter Reset function to clear the error. Refer
to “Error Codes” on page 6–5 to interpret the error codes.
• The Stop key can be disabled, if you prefer, by using function B087.

3–9

L2002 Inverter

“F” Group: Main Profile Parameters
The basic frequency (speed) profile is
Output
defined by parameters contained in the
F002
F003
frequency
“F” Group as shown to the right. The set
running frequency is in Hz, but acceleraF001
tion and deceleration are specified in the
time duration of the ramp (from zero to
maximum frequency, or from maximum
0
frequency to zero). The motor direction
t
parameter determines whether the keypad
Run key produces a FWD or REV command. This parameter does not affect the intelligent terminal [FWD] and [REV] functions, which you configure separately.
Acceleration 1 and Deceleration 1 are the standard default accel and decel values for the
main profile. Accel and decel values for an alternative profile are specified by using
parameters Ax92 through Ax93. The motor direction selection (F004) determines the
direction of rotation as commanded only from the keypad. This setting applies to any
motor profile (1st or 2nd) in use at a particular time
“F” Function
Name /
SRW Display

Description

✔✔

0.0

Standard default acceleration,
range is 0.01 to 3000 sec.

✔✔

10.0

sec.

Standard default acceleration,
2nd motor,
range is 0.01 to 3000 sec.

✔✔

10.0

sec.

Standard default deceleration,
range is 0.01 to 3000 sec.

✔✔

10.0

sec.

Standard default deceleration,
2nd motor,
range is 0.01 to 3000 sec.

✔✔

10.0

sec.

✘✘

—

F001 Output frequency
setting
VR

Standard default target
frequency that determines
constant motor speed,
0000.0Hz range is 0.0 / start frequency
to 400 Hz

F002 Acceleration (1) time
setting
ACC 1

010.00s

F202 Acceleration (1) time
setting, 2nd motor
2ACC1

010.00s

F003 Deceleration (1) time
setting
DEC 1

010.00s

F203 Deceleration (1) time
setting, 2nd motor
2DEC1

010.00s

F004 Keypad Run key routing Two options; select codes:
00 .. Forward
DIG-RUN
FWD 01 .. Reverse

Configuring
Drive Parameters

Func.
Code

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

3–10

“A” Group: Standard Functions

“A” Group: Standard Functions
Control Source Settings
The inverter provides flexibility in how you control Run/Stop operation and set the
output frequency (motor speed). It has other control sources that can override the A001/
A002 settings. Parameter A001 sets the source selection for the inverter’s output
frequency. Parameter A002 selects the Run command source (for FW or RV Run
commands). The default settings use the input terminals for –FE(F) (European) models,
and the keypad for –FU (USA) models.
“A” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

A001 Frequency source
setting
F-COM

Configuring
Drive Parameters

A201 Frequency source
setting, 2nd motor
2F-COM

Description

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

Five options; select codes:
00... Keypad potentiometer
01... Control terminal
02... Function F001 setting
03... ModBus network input
10... Calculate function output

✘✘

—

✘✘

—

Three options; select codes:
01... Control terminal
02... Run key on keypad, or
digital operator
03... ModBus network input

✘✘

—

✘✘

—

A002 Run command source
setting
OPE-Mode

REM

A202 Run command source
setting, 2nd motor
2OPE-Mode

REM

Frequency Source Setting - For parameter A001, the following table provides a further
description of each option, and a reference to other page(s) for more information.
Code

Frequency Source

Refer to page(s)...

Keypad potentiometer - The range of rotation of the knob
matches the range defined by B082 (Start frequency adjustment) to A004 (Maximum frequency setting)

2–24

Control terminal - The active analog input signal on analog
terminals [O] or [OI] sets the output frequency

4–53, 3–14, 3–59

Function F001 setting - The value in F001 is a constant, used
for the output frequency

3–9

ModBus network input - The network has a dedicated
register for inverter output frequency

B–19

Calculate function output - The Calculate function has userselectable analog input sources (A and B). The output can be
the sum, difference, or product (+, –, x) of the two outputs.

3–30

3–11

L2002 Inverter

Run Command Source Setting - For parameter A002, the following table provides a
further description of each option, and a reference to other page(s) for more information
Code

Run Command Source

Refer to page(s)...

Control terminal - The [FW] or [RV] input terminals control
Run/Stop operation

4–12, 3–49

Keypad Run key - The Run and Stop keys provide control

2–24

ModBus network input - The network has a dedicated coil
for Run/ Stop command and a coil for FW/RV

B–19

A001/A002 Override Sources - The inverter allows some sources to override the
settings for output frequency and the Run command in A001 and A002. This provides
flexibility for applications that occasionally need to use a different source, leaving the
standard settings in A001/A002. In particular, note the TM/PRG (Terminal/Program)
DIP switch behind the front panel cover shown below. It is the switch to the right.

OPE

PRG

The TM/PRG switch setting forces terminal operation, according to the table below:
TM/PRG
Switch Position
PRG (Program)

TM (Terminal)

Item

Source

Output frequency source

Specified by A001 setting

Run command source

Specified by A002 setting

Output frequency source

[O] or [OI] analog input terminal

Run command source

[FW] and/or [RV] input terminals

When A001 = 01 and A002 = 01, the inverter control source is the terminals, regardless
of the TM/PRG switch position. When A001 and A002 setting is not 01, then the
TM/PRG switch can force terminal input control.

Configuring
Drive Parameters

485

3–12

“A” Group: Standard Functions
The inverter has other control sources that can temporarily override the parameter A001
setting, forcing a different output frequency source. The following table lists all
frequency source setting methods and their relative priority (“1” is the highest priority).
Priority

A001 Frequency Source Setting Method

Refer to page...

[CF1] to [CF4] Multi-speed terminals

4–13

[OPE] Operator Control intelligent input

4–31

[F-TM] intelligent input

4–33

[AT] terminal

4–23

TM/PRG DIP Switch - (if switch is in “TM” position)

3–11

A001 Frequency source setting

3–10

The inverter also has other control sources that can temporarily override the parameter
A002 setting, forcing a different Run command source. The following table lists all Run
command setting methods and their relative priority (“1” is the highest priority).

Configuring
Drive Parameters

Priority

A002 Run Command Setting Method

Refer to page...

[OPE] Operator Control intelligent input

4–31

[F-TM] intelligent input

4–33

TM/PRG DIP Switch - (if switch is in “TM” position)

3–11

A002 Run command source setting

3–10

3–13

L2002 Inverter

Basic Parameter Settings
These settings affect the most fundamental behavior of the inverter—the outputs to the
motor. The frequency of the inverter’s AC output determines the motor speed. You may
select from three different sources for the reference speed. During application development you may prefer using the potentiometer, but you may switch to an external source
(control terminal setting) in the finished application, for example.
The base frequency and maximum frequency settings interact according to the graph
below (left). The inverter output operation follows the constant V/f curve until it reaches
the full-scale output voltage at the base frequency. This initial straight line is the
constant-torque part of the operating characteristic. The horizontal line over to the
maximum frequency serves to let the motor run faster, but at a reduced torque. This is the
constant-power operating range. If you want the motor to output constant torque over its
entire operating range (limited to the motor nameplate voltage and frequency rating),
then set the base frequency and maximum frequency equal as shown (below right).
A003
V
100%

A003

V
100%

A004

A004
Constant torque

f
Base
Frequency

Maximum
Frequency

Base frequency =
maximum frequency

NOTE: The “2nd motor” settings in the tables in this chapter store an alternate set of
parameters for a second motor. The inverter can use the 1st set or 2nd set of parameters
to generate the output frequency to the motor. See “Configuring the Inverter for Multiple
Motors” on page 4–58.
“A” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

A003 Base frequency setting
F-BASE

00060Hz

A203 Base frequency setting,
2nd motor
2F-BASE

✘✘

50.0

60.0

Settable from 30 Hz to the 2nd
maximum frequency

✘✘

50.0

60.0

Settable from the base
frequency up to 400 Hz

✘✘

50.0

60.0

Settable from the 2nd base
frequency up to 400 Hz

✘✘

50.0

60.0

00060Hz

A204 Maximum frequency
setting, 2nd motor
2F-MAX

Settable from 30 Hz to the
maximum frequency

00060Hz

A004 Maximum frequency
setting
F-MAX

Description

Defaults
Run
Mode –FE(F) –FU
Units
Edit
(EU) (USA)

00060Hz

Configuring
Drive Parameters

3–14

“A” Group: Standard Functions

Analog Input Settings

Configuring
Drive Parameters

The inverter has the capability to accept an external analog input that can command the
output frequency to the motor. Voltage input (0 –10V) and current input (4–20mA) are
available on separate terminals ([O] and [OI], respectively). Terminal [L] serves as
signal ground for the two analog inputs. The analog input settings adjust the curve
characteristics between the analog input and the frequency output.
Adjusting [O–L] characteristics – In the
graph to the right, A013 and A014 select the
active portion of the input voltage range.
Parameters A011 and A012 select the start
and end frequency of the converted output
frequency range, respectively. Together,
these four parameters define the major line
segment as shown. When the line does not
begin at the origin (A011 and A013 > 0),
then A015 defines whether the inverter
outputs 0Hz or the A011-specified
frequency when the analog input value is
less than the A013 setting. When the input
voltage is greater than the A014 ending
value, the inverter outputs the ending
frequency specified by A012.
Adjusting [OI–L] characteristics – In the
graph to the right, A103 and A104 select the
active portion of the input current range.
Parameters A101 and A102 select the start
and end frequency of the converted output
frequency range, respectively. Together,
these four parameters define the major line
segment as shown. When the line does not
begin at the origin (A101 and A103 > 0),
then A105 defines whether the inverter
outputs 0Hz or the A101-specified
frequency when the analog input value is
less than the A103 setting. When the input
voltage is greater than the A104 ending
value, the inverter outputs the ending
frequency specified by A102.

max frequency

A012
A015=00
A015=01

A011

0
0%
0V

A013

A014

100%
10V

Input scale

max frequency

A102
A105=00
A105=01

A101

0
0%
4mA

A103

A104

100%
20mA

Input scale

NOTE: For L2002 series inverters, parameters A011 to A015 affect only the O–L input
range. For the original L200 series inverters, the both the O–L analog input and the
keypad potentiometer are affected.

L2002 Inverter

“A” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

A005 [AT] selection
AT-Slct

O/OI

A011 O–L input active range
start frequency
O-EXS

0000.0Hz

A012 O–L input active range
end frequency
O-EXE

0000.0Hz

O-EX%S

00000%

A014 O–L input active range
end voltage
O-EX%E

00100%

A015 O–L input start
frequency enable
O-LVL

0Hz

A016 External frequency
filter time constant
F-SAMP

00008

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

Four options, select codes:
00 .. Select between [O] and
[OI] at [AT]
01 .. [O] + [OI] ([AT] input is
ignored)
02 .. Select between [O] and
keypad potentiometer
03 .. Select between [OI] and
keypad potentiometer

✘✔

The output frequency corresponding to the analog input
range starting point,
range is 0.0 to 400.0

✘✔

0.0

The output frequency corresponding to the analog input
range ending point,
range is 0.0 to 400.0

✘✔

0.0

The starting point (offset) for
the active analog input range,
range is 0. to 100.

✘✔

The ending point (offset) for
the active analog input range,
range is 0. to 100.

✘✔

100.

Two options; select codes:
00 .. Use offset (A011 value)
01 .. Use 0 Hz

✘✔

—

One range plus one setting:
01 to 16... Moving average,
where n=1 to 16 (number of
samples for average)
17 .. Use 16-sample average,
plus deadband +0.1/–0.2Hz.

✘✔

Samples

A016: External Frequency Filter Time Constant – This filter smooths the analog input signal
for the inverter’s output frequency reference.
• A016 sets the filter range n=1 to 16. This is a simple moving average calculation,
where n (number of samples) is variable.
• A016 = 17 is a special value. It configures the inverter to use a moveable deadband
feature. Initially the inverter uses the average of the previous 16 samples. Then, the
deadband is employed for each subsequent average of 16 samples. The deadband
works by ignoring small fluctuations in each new average: less than +0.1Hz or –0.2Hz
change. When a 16-sample average exceeds this deadband, then the inverter applies
that average to the output frequency reference, and it also becomes the new deadband
comparison point for subsequent sample averages.

Configuring
Drive Parameters

A013 O–L input active range
start voltage

Description

3–15

3–16

“A” Group: Standard Functions
The example graph below shows a typical analog input waveform. The filter removes the
noise spikes. When a speed change (such as level increase) occurs, the filter naturally
has a delayed response. Due to the deadband feature (A016=17), the final output
changes only when the 16-sample average moves past the deadband threshold.
A016=17

Small step-change

Output freq.
reference
Threshold exceeded
+0.1
16-sample avg. “0”

New deadband
Deadband

+0.1
“0”
–0.2

–0.2

Analog input

speed increase given
noise spikes

Configuring
Drive Parameters

TIP: The deadband feature is useful in applications that require a very stable output
frequency but use an analog input for the speed reference. Example application: A
grinding machine uses a remote potentiometer for operator speed input. After a setting
change, the grinder maintains a very stable speed to deliver a uniform finished surface.

Multi-speed and Jog Frequency Setting
The L2002 inverter has the capability to store and output up to 16 preset frequencies to
the motor (A020 to A035). As in traditional motion terminology, we call this multi-speed
profile capability. These preset frequencies are selected by means of digital inputs to the
inverter. The inverter applies the current acceleration or deceleration setting to change
from the current output frequency to the new one. The first multi-speed setting is duplicated for the second motor settings (the remaining 15 multi-speeds apply only to the first
motor).
The jog speed setting is used whenever the Jog command is active. The jog speed setting
range is arbitrarily limited to 10 Hz, to provide safety during manual operation. The
acceleration to the jog frequency is instantaneous, but you can choose from three modes
for the best method for stopping the jog operation.

L2002 Inverter

“A” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

3–17

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)
✔✔

0.0

A220 Multi-speed frequency
setting, 2nd motor

✔✔

0.0

✔✔

see
next
row

0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0

Defines the first speed of a
multi-speed profile, range is
0.0 / start frequency to 400 Hz
SPD 00s 0000.0Hz A020 = Speed 0 (1st motor)
Defines the first speed of a
multi-speed profile for 2nd
motor, range is 0.0 / start
2SPD00s 0000.0Hz frequency to 400 Hz
A220 = Speed 0 (2nd motor)

A021 Multi-speed frequency
to
settings
A035 (for both motors)

SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD
SPD

01s 000.0Hz
02s 000.0Hz
03s 000.0Hz
04s 000.0Hz
05s 000.0Hz
06s 000.0Hz
07s 000.0Hz
08s 000.0Hz
09s 000.0Hz
10s 000.0Hz
11s 000.0Hz
12s 000.0Hz
13s 000.0Hz
14s 000.0Hz
15s 000.0Hz

A038 Jog frequency setting
Jog-F

001.00Hz

A039 Jog stop mode
Jog-Mode

FRS

Defines 15 more speeds,
range is 0.0 / start frequency
to 400 Hz.
A021= Speed 1...
A035 = Speed 15
A021
A022
A023
A024
A025
A026
A027
A028
A029
A030
A031
A032
A033
A034
A035

Configuring
Drive Parameters

A020 Multi-speed frequency
setting

Defines limited speed for jog,
range is 0.00 / start frequency
to 9.99 Hz

✔✔

1.00

Define how end of jog stops
the motor; three options:
00 .. Free-run stop
01 .. Controlled deceleration
02 .. DC braking to stop

✘✔

—

NOTE: When setting function A039 = 01, the actual jogging deceleration time depends
on the standard Deceleration Time Setting F003/F203.

3–18

“A” Group: Standard Functions

Torque Control Algorithms
The inverter generates the motor output
according to the V/f algorithm selected.
Parameter A044 selects the inverter algorithm
for generating the frequency output, as shown
in the diagram to the right (A244 for 2nd
motor). The factory default is 00 (constant
torque).

Inverter Torque Control Algorithms
A44
V/f control,
constant torque

00
Output

V/f control,
variable torque

Review the following descriptions to help you
choose the best torque control algorithm for
your application.

The built-in V/f curves are oriented toward developing constant torque or variable torque
characteristics (see graphs below). You can select either constant torque or reduced
torque V/f control.

Configuring
Drive Parameters

Constant and Variable (Reduced) Torque – The graph below (left) shows the constant
torque characteristic from 0Hz to the base frequency A003. The voltage remains
constant for output frequencies higher than the base frequency. The graph below (right)
shows the general variable (reduced) torque curve. The range from 0Hz to the base
frequency is the variable characteristic.
V
100%

V
100%

A044 = 00 Constant torque

0
Base
freq.

Max.
freq.

A044 = 01

Variable torque

0
Base
freq.

Hz
Max.
freq.

Manual Torque Boost – The Constant
A042 = 8 (%)
V
and Variable Torque algorithms feature an
100%
adjustable torque boost curve. When the
Torque boost
motor load has a lot of inertia or starting
friction, you may need to increase the low
A
8%
frequency starting torque characteristics
by boosting the voltage above the normal
3%
V/f ratio (shown at right). The function
0
Hz
attempts to compensate for voltage drop in
1.8Hz
f base =
the motor primary winding in the low
60Hz
speed range. The boost is applied from
A043 = 3 (%)
zero to 1/2 the base frequency. You set the
breakpoint of the boost (point A on the
graph) by using parameters A042 and A043. The manual boost is calculated as an
addition to the standard V/f curve.

L2002 Inverter

3–19

Be aware that running the motor at a low speed for a long time can cause motor
overheating. This is particularly true when manual torque boost is ON, or if the motor
relies on a built-in fan for cooling.
NOTE: Manual torque boost applies only to constant torque (A044=00) and variable
torque (A044=01) V/f control.

Voltage Gain – Using parameter A045 you
V
can modify the voltage gain of the inverter (see
100%
graph at right). This is specified as a percentage of the full scale output voltage. The gain
can be set from 20% to 100%. It should be
adjusted in accordance with the motor specifi20%
cations.
The following table shows the methods of
torque control selection.

Description

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

Two options:
00 .. Manual torque boost
01 .. Automatic torque boost

✘✘

A241 Torque boost select, 2nd Two options:
motor
00 .. Manual torque boost
01 .. Automatic torque boost
2VBst Slct
MN

✘✘

A042 Manual torque boost
value

Can boost starting torque
between 0 and 20% above
normal V/f curve,
range is 0.0 to 20.0%

✔✔

1.8

Can boost starting torque
between 0 and 20% above
normal V/f curve,
range is 0.0 to 20.0%

✔✔

0.0

Sets the frequency of the V/f
breakpoint A in graph (top of
previous page) for torque
boost, range is 0.0 to 50.0%

✔✔

10.0

Sets the frequency of the V/f
breakpoint A in graph (top of
previous page) for torque
boost, range is 0.0 to 50.0%

✔✔

0.0

Two available V/f curves;
three select codes:
00 .. Constant torque
01 .. Reduced torque

✘✘

—

A041 Torque boost select
V-Bst Slct

V-Bst V

0005.0%

A242 Manual torque boost
value, 2nd motor
2VBst V

0000.0%

A043 Manual torque boost
frequency adjustment
M-Bst F

0003.0%

A243 Manual torque boost
frequency adjustment,
2nd motor
2MBst F

0000.0%

A044 V/f characteristic curve
selection
CTRL

C-TRQ

Configuring
Drive Parameters

Name /
SRW Display

A045

“A” Function
Func.
Code

Voltage Gain

3–20

“A” Group: Standard Functions

“A” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

A244 V/f characteristic curve
selection, 2nd motor
2CTRL

C-TRQ

A045 V/f gain setting
V-Gain

00100%

A245 V/f gain setting, 2nd
motor

Configuring
Drive Parameters

2V-Gain

00100%

Description

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

Two available V/f curves;
three select codes:
00... Constant torque
01... Reduced torque

✘✘

—

Sets voltage gain of the
inverter, range is 20. to 100.%

✔✔

100.

Sets voltage gain of the
inverter, range is 20. to 100.%

✔✔

100.

L2002 Inverter

3–21

DC Braking Settings
The DC braking feature can provide
+
Running
Free run DC braking
additional stopping torque when
compared to a normal deceleration to a
stop. DC braking is particularly useful
0
at low speeds when normal decelerat
tion torque is minimal. When you
A053
A055
enable DC braking, the inverter injects –
a DC voltage into the motor windings
during deceleration below a frequency you can specify (A052). The braking power
(A054) and duration (A055) can both be set. You can optionally specify a wait time
before DC braking (A053), during which the motor will free run (coast).
CAUTION: Be careful to avoid specifying a braking time that is long enough to cause
motor overheating. If you use DC braking, we recommend using a motor with a built-in
thermistor, and wiring it to the inverter’s thermistor input (see “Thermistor Thermal
Protection” on page 4–25). Also refer to the motor manufacturer’s specifications for
duty-cycle recommendations during DC braking.
“A” Function
Name /
SRW Display

A051 DC braking enable
DCB Mode

Description

✘✔

—

✘✔

0.5

The delay from the end of
controlled deceleration to start
of DC braking (motor free runs
until DC braking begins),
range is 0.0 to 5.0 sec.

✘✔

0.0

sec.

Level of DC braking force,
settable from 0 to 100%

✘✔

Sets the duration for DC
braking, range is 0.0 to 60.0
seconds

✘✔

0.0

sec.

✘✔

—

Two options; select codes:
00 .. Disable
OFF 01 .. Enable

A052 DC braking frequency
setting
DCB F

The frequency at which DC
braking begins,
range is from the start
0000.5Hz frequency (B082) to 60 Hz

A053 DC braking wait time
DCB Wait 0000.0s

A054 DC braking force for
deceleration
DCB V

00000%

A055 DC braking time for
deceleration
DCB T

0000.0s

A056 DC braking / edge or
Two options; select codes:
level detection for [DB] 00 .. Edge detection
input
01 .. Level detection
DCB KIND

LEVEL

Configuring
Drive Parameters

Func.
Code

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

3–22

“A” Group: Standard Functions

Frequency-related Functions
Frequency Limits – Upper and lower
Output
limits can be imposed on the inverter
frequency
output frequency. These limits will apply
regardless of the source of the speed refer- A061 Upper
limit
ence. You can configure the lower
frequency limit to be greater than zero as
shown in the graph. The upper limit must
Lower
not exceed the rating of the motor or
A062
limit
capability of the machinery. The
0
maximum frequency setting (A004/A204)
takes precedence over frequency upper
limit (A061/A261).
“A” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Configuring
Drive Parameters

A061 Frequency upper limit
setting
Lim H

0000.0Hz

A261 Frequency upper limit
setting, 2nd motor
2Lim H

0000.0Hz

A062 Frequency lower limit
setting
Lim L

0000.0Hz

A262 Frequency lower limit
setting, 2nd motor
2Lim L

0000.0Hz

Description

Settable
range

Frequency command

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

Sets a limit on output
frequency less than the
maximum frequency (A004).
Range is from frequency lower
limit (A062) to maximum
frequency (A004).
0.0.. setting is disabled
>0.1 setting is enabled

✘✔

0.0

Sets a limit on output
frequency less than the
maximum frequency (A004).
Range is from frequency lower
limit (A262) to maximum
frequency (A204).
0.0.. setting is disabled
>0.1 setting is enabled

✘✔

0.0

Sets a limit on output
frequency greater than zero.
Range is start frequency
(B082) to frequency upper
limit (A061).
0.0.. setting is disabled
>0.1 setting is enabled

✘✔

0.0

Sets a limit on output
frequency greater than zero.
Range is start frequency
(B082) to frequency upper
limit (A261).
0.0.. setting is disabled
>0.1 setting is enabled

✘✔

0.0

L2002 Inverter

3–23

Jump Frequencies – Some motors or machines exhibit resonances at particular
speed(s), which can be destructive for prolonged running at those speeds. The inverter
has up to three jump frequencies as shown in the graph. The hysteresis around the jump
frequencies causes the inverter output to skip around the sensitive frequency values.
Output
frequency
A068
A068

A067
Jump frequencies
A066
A066

A065

Hysteresis values

A064
A064

A063
0

Frequency command

“A” Function
Name /
SRW Display

Description

A063, Jump (center) frequency
A065, setting
A067
JUMP F1 0000.0Hz
JUMP F2 0000.0Hz
JUMP F3 0000.0Hz

Up to 3 output frequencies can
be defined for the output to
jump past to avoid motor
resonances (center frequency)
Range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

✘✔

0.0
0.0
0.0

A064, Jump (hysteresis)
A066, frequency width setting
A068
JUMP W1 0000.5Hz
JUMP W2 0000.5Hz
JUMP W3 0000.5Hz

Defines the distance from the
center frequency at which the
jump around occurs
Range is 0.0 to 10.0 Hz

✘✔

0.5
0.5
0.5

Configuring
Drive Parameters

Func.
Code

Defaults
Run
Mode –FE(F) –FU
Units
Edit
(EU) (USA)

3–24

“A” Group: Standard Functions

PID Control
When enabled, the built-in PID loop calculates an ideal inverter output value to cause a
loop feedback process variable (PV) to move closer in value to the setpoint (SP). The
frequency command serves as the SP. The PID loop algorithm will read the analog input
for the process variable (you specify the current or voltage input) and calculate the
output.
• A scale factor in A075 lets you multiply the PV by a factor, converting it into
engineering units for the process.
• Proportional, integral, and derivative gains are all adjustable.
• See “PID Loop Operation” on page 4–56 for more information.
“A” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

A071 PID Enable

Configuring
Drive Parameters

PID Mode

OFF

A072 PID proportional gain
PID P

0001.0

A073 PID integral time
constant
PID I

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

Enables PID function,
two option codes:
00... PID Disable
01... PID Enable

✘✔

—

Proportional gain has a range
of 0.2 to 5.0

✔✔

1.0

—

Integral time constant has a
range of 0.0 to 150 seconds

✔✔

1.0

sec.

Derivative time constant has a
range of 0.0 to 100 seconds

✔✔

0.0

sec.

Process Variable (PV) scale
factor (multiplier), range of
0.01 to 99.99

✘✔

1.00

—

Selects source of Process
Variable (PV), option codes:
00... [OI] terminal (current in)
01... [O] terminal (voltage in)
02... ModBus network
03... Calculate function output

✘✔

—

Two option codes:
00... PID input = SP – PV
01... PID input = –(SP – PV)

✘✔

—

Sets the limit of PID output as
percent of full scale,
range is 0.0 to 100.0%

✘✔

0.0

0001.0s

A074 PID derivative time
constant
PID D

000.00s

A075 PV scale conversion
PID Cnv

001.00%

A076 PV source setting
PID INP

A077 Reverse PID action
PID MINUS

OFF

A078 PID output limit
PID Vari 0000.0%

NOTE: The setting A073 for the integrator is the integrator’s time constant Ti, not the
gain. The integrator gain Ki = 1/Ti. When you set A073 = 0, the integrator is disabled.

3–25

L2002 Inverter

Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR) Function
The automatic voltage regulation (AVR) feature keeps the inverter output waveform at a
relatively constant amplitude during power input fluctuations. This can be useful if the
installation is subject to input voltage fluctuations. However, the inverter cannot boost its
motor output to a voltage higher than the power input voltage. If you enable this feature,
be sure to select the proper voltage class setting for your motor.
“A” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

A081 AVR function select
AVR Mode

A082 AVR voltage select

Automatic (output) voltage
regulation, selects from three
ON type of AVR functions, three
option codes:
00 .. AVR enabled
01 .. AVR disabled
02 .. AVR enabled except
during deceleration

200V class inverter settings:
...... 200/215/220/230/240
00230V 400V class inverter settings:
...... 380/400/415/440/460/480

✘✘

—

✘✘

230/
400

230/
460

Configuring
Drive Parameters

AVR AC

Description

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

3–26

“A” Group: Standard Functions

Second Acceleration and Deceleration Functions
The L2002 inverter features two-stage acceleration and deceleration ramps. This gives
flexibility in the profile shape. You can specify the frequency transition point, the point
at which the standard acceleration (F002) or deceleration (F003) changes to the second
acceleration (A092) or deceleration (A093). Or, you can use intelligent input [2CH] to
trigger this transition. These profile options are also available for the second motor
settings. Select a transition method via A094 as depicted below. Be careful not to
confuse the second acceleration/deceleration settings with settings for the second
motor!
A094 = 00 Transition via 2CH input
Output
frequency

A094 = 01 Transition via freq. level
Output
frequency

Accel 2

A 95

Accel 1

0
2CH
input

Frequency
transition point

0
t

1
0

Configuring
Drive Parameters

t
“A” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

Duration of 2nd segment of
acceleration, range is:
0.01 to 3000 sec.

✔✔

15.00

sec.

Duration of 2nd segment of
acceleration, 2nd motor,
range is: 0.01 to 3000 sec.

✔✔

15.00

sec.

Duration of 2nd segment of
deceleration, range is:
0.01 to 3000 sec.

✔✔

15.00

sec.

Duration of 2nd segment of
deceleration, 2nd motor,
range is: 0.01 to 3000 sec.

✔✔

15.00

sec.

A094 Select method to switch Two options for switching
to Acc2/Dec2 profile
from 1st to 2nd accel/decel:
00... 2CH input from terminal
ACC CHG
TM
01... transition frequency

✘✘

—

A294 Select method to switch Two options for switching
to Acc2/Dec2 profile,
from 1st to 2nd accel/decel:
2nd motor
00... 2CH input from terminal
01... transition frequency
2ACCCHG
TM
(2nd motor)

✘✘

—

A092 Acceleration (2) time
setting
ACC 2

0015.00s

A292 Acceleration (2) time
setting, (2nd motor)
2ACC2

015.00s

A093 Deceleration (2) time
setting
DEC 2

015.00s

A293 Deceleration (2) time
setting, (2nd motor)
2DEC2

015.00s

L2002 Inverter

“A” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

3–27

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

A095 Acc1 to Acc2 frequency Output frequency at which
transition point
Accel1 switches to Accel2,
range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
ACC CHfr0000.0Hz

✘✘

0.0

A295 Acc1 to Acc2 frequency Output frequency at which
transition point, 2nd
Accel1 switches to Accel2,
motor
range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

✘✘

0.0

A096 Dec1 to Dec2 frequency Output frequency at which
transition point
Decel1 switches to Decel2,
range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
DEC CHfr0000.0Hz

✘✘

0.0

A296 Dec1 to Dec2 frequency Output frequency at which
transition point, 2nd
Decel1 switches to Decel2,
motor
range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

✘✘

0.0

2ACCCHfr0000.0Hz

2DECCHfr0000.0Hz

Configuring
Drive Parameters

NOTE: For A095 and A096 (and for 2nd motor settings), if you set a very rapid Acc1 or
Dec1 time (less than 1.0 second), the inverter may not be able to change rates to Acc2 or
Dec2 before reaching the target frequency. In that case, the inverter decreases the rate of
Acc1 or Dec1 in order to achieve the second ramp to the target frequency.

3–28

“A” Group: Standard Functions

Accel/Decel
Standard acceleration and deceleration is
linear. The inverter CPU can also calculate
an S-curve acceleration or deceleration
curve as shown. This profile is useful for
favoring the load characteristics in particular applications.
Curve settings for acceleration and deceleration are independently selected. To
enable the S-curve, use function A097
(acceleration) and A098 (deceleration).

Output
frequency

Accel. curve selection

Target
freq.
Linear A097 = 00
S-curve

A097 = 01

0
t

Acceleration period
“A” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

✘✘

—

Set the characteristic curve of
Acc1 and Acc2, two options:
00... linear
01... S-curve

✘✘

—

Set the characteristic curve of
Acc1 and Acc2, two options:
00... linear
01... S-curve

Configuring
Drive Parameters

A097 Acceleration curve
selection
ACC LINE
A098 Deceleration curve
selection
DEC LINE

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

L2002 Inverter

3–29

Additional Analog Input Settings
Input Range Settings – The parameters in the following table adjust the input characteristics of the analog current input. When using the inputs to command the inverter
output frequency, these parameters adjust the starting and ending ranges for the current,
as well as the output frequency range. Related characteristic diagrams are located in
“Analog Input Settings” on page 3–14.
“A” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

A101 [OI]–[L] input active
range start frequency
OI-EXS

0000.0Hz

A102 [OI]–[L] input active
range end frequency
OI-EXE

0000.0Hz

OI-EX%S

00000%

A104 [OI]–[L] input active
range end current
OI-EX%E

00100%

A105 [OI]–[L] input start
frequency enable
OI-LVL

0Hz

The output frequency corresponding to the current input
range starting point.
Range is 0.00 to 400.0 Hz

✘✔

0.0

The output frequency corresponding to the current input
range ending point.
Range is 0.00 to 400.0 Hz

✘✔

0.0

The starting point for the
current input range.
Range is 0. to 100.%

✘✔

0.0

The ending point for the
current input range.
Range is 0. to 100.%

✘✔

100.

Two options:
00 .. Use A101 start value
01 .. Use 0Hz

✘✔

—

Configuring
Drive Parameters

A103 [OI]–[L] input active
range start current

Description

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

3–30

“A” Group: Standard Functions
Analog Input Calculate Function – The inverter can mathematically combine two
input sources into one value. The Calculate function can either add, subtract, or multiply
the two selected sources. This provides the flexibility needed by various applications.You can use the result for the output frequency setting (use A001=10) or for the
PID Process Variable (PV) input (use A075=03).
Digital operator

A141

Potentiometer
A input
select

A143

[O] input
[OI] input
Network variable F001

A
B

“CAL”
(result)

• 00 A + B
• 01 A – B
• 02 A x B

Digital operator
Potentiometer
B input
select

[O] input
[OI] input

Configuring
Drive Parameters

Network variable F001

“A” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

✘✔

—

✘✔

—

Five options:
00... Digital operator
01... Keypad potentiometer
02... [O] input
03... [OI] input
04... Network variable

✘✔

—

A142 B input select for
calculate function
CALC Slct2

A143 Calculation symbol
CALC SMBL

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

Five options:
00... Digital operator
01... Keypad potentiometer
02... [O] input
03... [OI] input
04... Network variable

A141 A input select for
calculate function
CALC Slct1

A142

Calculates a value based on the
A input source (A141 selects)
ADD and the B input source (A142
selects). Three options:
00... ADD (A input + B input)
01... SUB (A input – B input)
02... MUL (A input x B input)

L2002 Inverter

3–31

ADD Frequency – The inverter can add or subtract an offset value to the output
frequency setting which is specified by A001 (will work with any of the five possible
sources). The ADD Frequency is a value you can store in parameter A145. The ADD
Frequency is summed with or subtracted from the output frequency setting only when
the [ADD] terminal is ON. Function A146 selects whether to add or subtract. By configuring an intelligent input as the [ADD] terminal, your application can selectively apply
the fixed value in A145 to offset (positively or negatively) the inverter output frequency
in real time.
Keypad potentiometer

A001 Frequency source setting

Control terminal
+

Function F001 setting

∑

Network variable F001

Output frequency setting
+/–

Calculate function output

A146 ADD direction select

A145 ADD frequency
Intelligent input

[ADD]

Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description
An offset value that is applied
to the output frequency when
the [ADD] terminal is ON.
Range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

✔✔

0.0

Two options:
00 .. Plus (adds A145 value to
the output frequency setting)
01 .. Minus (subtracts A145
value from the output
frequency setting)

✘✔

—

The output frequency corresponding to the potentiometer
range starting point,
0.0 range is 0.0 to 400.0

✘✔

0.0

✘✔

0.0

✘✔

0.0

A145 ADD frequency
ST-PNT 0000.0Hz
A146 ADD direction select
ADD DIR

PLUS

A151 Pot. input active range
start frequency
POT EXS

A152 Pot. input active range
end frequency
POT EXE

The output frequency corresponding to the potentiometer
range ending point,
0.0 range is 0.0 to 400.0

A153 Pot. input active range
start current
POT EX%S

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

The output frequency corresponding to the potentiometer
range starting point,
0.0 range is 0.0 to 100.0

Configuring
Drive Parameters

“A” Function

3–32

“A” Group: Standard Functions

“A” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

A154 Pot. input active range
end current
POT EXS%E

The output frequency corresponding to the potentiometer
range ending point,
0.0 range is 0.0 to 100.0

A155 Pot. input start
frequency enable

Configuring
Drive Parameters

POT LVL

Two options:
00... Disable
01... Enable

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)
✘✔

0.0

✘✔

—

L2002 Inverter

3–33

“B” Group: Fine Tuning Functions
The “B” Group of functions and parameters adjust some of the more subtle but useful
aspects of motor control and system configuration.

Automatic Restart Mode
The restart mode determines how the inverter will resume operation after a fault causes a
trip event. The four options provide advantages for various situations. Frequency
matching allows the inverter to read the motor speed by virtue of its residual magnetic
flux and restart the output at the corresponding frequency. The inverter can attempt a
restart a certain number of times depending on the particular trip event:
• Over-current trip, restart up to 3 times
• Over-voltage trip, restart up to 3 times
• Under-voltage trip, restart up to 16 times
When the inverter reaches the maximum number of restarts (3 or 16), you must power
cycle the inverter to reset its operation.

Power failure < allowable power fail
time (B002), inverter resumes

Power failure > allowable power fail
time (B002), inverter trips

Input
power
0

Inverter
output

0
free-running

Motor
speed
0

Power fail
Allowable
power fail time
Retry wait time

B002

free-running

Motor
speed
0
Power fail
B002

B003

Allowable
power fail time

Configuring
Drive Parameters

Other parameters specify the allowable under-voltage level and the delay time before
restarting. The proper settings depend on the typical fault conditions for your application, the necessity of restarting the process in unattended situations, and whether restarting is always safe.

3–34

“B” Group: Fine Tuning Functions

Instantaneous Power Failure / Under-voltage Alarm
Use parameter B004 to disable or enable the instantaneous power failure / undervoltage
alarm. When the alarm is enabled, parameter settings B001 (Selection of Automatic
Restart Mode) and B002 (Allowable Under-voltage Power Failure Time) are not valid.
“B” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

B001 Selection of automatic
restart mode

Configuring
Drive Parameters

IPS POWR

ALM

B002 Allowable undervoltage power failure
time
IPS Time 0001.0s

B003 Retry wait time before
motor restart
IPS Wait 0001.0s
B004 Instantaneous power
failure / under-voltage
trip alarm enable
IPS TRIP

Select inverter restart method,
four option codes:
00... Alarm output after trip,
no automatic restart
01... Restart at 0Hz
02... Resume operation after
frequency matching
03... Resume previous freq.
after freq. matching, then
decelerate to stop and display
trip info.

✘✔

—

The amount of time a power
input under-voltage can occur
without tripping the power
failure alarm. Range is 0.3 to
25 sec. If under-voltage exists
longer than this time, the
inverter trips, even if the restart
mode is selected.

✘✔

1.0

sec.

Time delay after under-voltage
condition goes away, before
the inverter runs motor again.
Range is 0.3 to 100 seconds.

✘✔

1.0

sec.

Two option codes:
00... Disable
01... Enable

✘✔

sec.

Two option codes:
00... Restart 16 times
01... Always restart

✘✔

sec.

OFF

B005 Number of restarts on
power failure / undervoltage trip events
IPS RETRY

Description

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

3–35

L2002 Inverter

Electronic Thermal Overload Alarm Setting
The thermal overload detection protects the Torque
inverter and motor from overheating due to
Constant torque B013 = 01
100%
an excessive load. It uses a current/inverse
time curve to determine the trip point.
80%
Reduced
torque
60%
First, use B013 to select the torque characB013
= 00
teristic that matches your load. This allows
the inverter to utilize the best thermal
0
Hz
overload characteristic for your application.
5 20
60
120
Output frequency
The torque developed in a motor is directly
proportional to the current in the windings,
which is also proportional to the heat generated (and temperature, over time). Therefore,
you must set the thermal overload threshold in terms of current (amperes) for parameter
B012. The range is 20% to 120% of the rated current for each inverter model. If the
current exceeds the level you specify, the inverter will trip and log an event (error E05) in
the history table. The inverter turns the motor output OFF when tripped. Separate
settings are available for the second motor (if applicable) as shown in the following
table.

Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

B012 Level of electronic
thermal setting
E-THM LVL001.60A
B212 Level of electronic
thermal setting, 2nd
motor

Description

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

Set a level between 20% and
120% for the rated inverter
current.

✘✔

Rated current
for each inverter
model *1

Set a level between 20% and
120% for the rated inverter
current.

✘✔

Rated current
for each inverter
model *1

Select from two curves, option
codes:
00 .. Reduced torque 1
01 .. Constant torque
02 .. Reduced torque 2

✘✔

—

Select from two curves, option
codes:
00 .. Reduced torque 1
01 .. Constant torque
02 .. Reduced torque 2

✘✔

—

2ETHM LVL 01.60A
B013 Electronic thermal
characteristic
E-THM CHAR

CRT

B213 Electronic thermal
characteristic, 2nd
motor
2ETHM CHAR

CRT

Configuring
Drive Parameters

“B” Function

3–36

“B” Group: Fine Tuning Functions
Note 1:

For inverter models 005NFE(F), 011NFE(F), and 030HFE(F), the overloadrelated parameter settings are different from the rated amperes. Therefore, be
sure to set the electronic thermal overload according to the actual motor
driven by the particular inverter.
B012/B212
(A)

B022
(A)

C041
(A)

Inverter rated
Amperes (A)

–004NFE(F)

2.60

3.90

2.60

–005NFE(F)

4.00

6.00

4.00

3.00

–007NFE(F)

4.00

6.00

4.00

–0011NFE(F)

7.10

10.65

7.10

5.00

–015NFE(F)

7.10

10.65

7.10

–030NFE(F)

8.60

12.90

8.60

7.80

–040NFE(F)

8.60

12.90

8.60

Configuring
Drive Parameters

Inverter Model

WARNING: When parameter B012, level of electronic thermal setting, is set to motor
FLA rating (Full Load Ampere nameplate rating), the inverter provides solid state motor
overload protection at 115% of motor FLA or equivalent. If parameter B012 exceeds the
motor FLA rating, the motor may overheat and be damaged. Parameter B012, level of
electronic thermal setting, is a variable parameter.

L2002 Inverter

3–37

Overload Restriction
If the inverter’s output current exceeds a
preset current level you specify during
acceleration or constant speed, the overload
restriction feature automatically reduces the
output frequency to restrict the overload.
This feature does not generate an alarm or
trip event. You can instruct the inverter to
apply overload restriction only during
constant speed, thus allowing higher
currents for acceleration. Or, you may use
the same threshold for both acceleration and
constant speed.

Motor
Current
Restriction area

B022
0

t
Output
frequency
0

B023

When the inverter detects an overload, it
must decelerate the motor to reduce the current until it is less than the threshold. You can
choose the rate of deceleration that the inverter uses to lower the output current.

150%

150%
Overload
restriction
level

Overload
restriction
level
10%

10%
0V

10V
[O]–[L] input

A013 = 0

A014 = 100

8
0V 2
[O]–[L] input
A013 = 20

10V

A014 = 80

When using the analog input method to set the overload restriction (B028/B228 = 01),
the inverter does not read settings B022/B222 Overload Restriction Level. Instead, the
inverter writes the analog input value (in Ampere units) to parameters B022/B222. In
this way, you can monitor the effective overload restriction value (in Amperes) in real
time. However, you cannot store the value to B022/B222. If you use the second motor
function, the inverter displays “void” for either B022 or B222 if the parameter’s corresponding motor is not selected via Set or Special Set functions.
Input
[SET] or [S-ST]

State

B022 monitor display

B222 monitor display

Units

OFF

[O] analog input value

void

[O] analog input value

Configuring
Drive Parameters

The overload restriction level can be set to a constant or to a variable (analog input). For
constant values, use B028/B228 = 00 to select parameters B022/B222. For a variable
overload restriction level, use B028/B228 = 01 to select analog voltage input terminals
[O]–[L]. In this case, parameters A013 and A014 set the start and end points for the
linear range of the graph as shown in the graphs below.

3–38

“B” Group: Fine Tuning Functions

“B” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

B021 Overload restriction
operation mode
OL Mode

B221 Overload restriction
operation mode, 2nd
motor
2OL Mode

Select the operating mode
during overload conditions,
three options, option codes:
00... Disabled
01... Enabled for acceleration
and constant speed
02... Enabled for constant
speed only

✘✔

—

✘✔

—

Sets the level for overload
restriction, between 10% and
150% of the rated current of
OL LVL
002.40A the inverter, setting resolution
is 1% of rated current. This
B222 Overload restriction
parameter monitors (read-only)
setting, 2nd motor
the [O]–[L] input when that
2OL LVL 002.40A input is the overload restriction
source (B028/B228 = 01).

✘✔

Rated current x
1.5

✘✔

Rated current x
1.5

B023 Deceleration rate at
overload restriction

Sets the deceleration rate when
inverter detects overload, range
is 0.1 to 30.0, resolution is 0.1.

✘✔

1.0

30.0

sec.

Sets the deceleration rate when
inverter detects overload, range
is 0.1 to 30.0, resolution is 0.1.

✘✔

1.0

30.0

sec.

Two options; select codes:
00... B022/B222 setting level
01... [O]–[L] analog input

✘✔

sec.

Two options; select codes:
00... B022/B222 setting level
01... [O]–[L] analog input

✘✔

sec.

B022 Overload restriction
setting

Configuring
Drive Parameters

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

OL Cnst

0001.0s

B223 Deceleration rate at
overload restriction,
2nd motor
2OL Cnst 0001.0s
B028 Overload restriction
source selection
OL L-Slct

C022

B228 Overload restriction
source selection, 2nd
motor
2OL L-Slct

C022

L2002 Inverter

3–39

Software Lock Mode
The software lock function keeps personnel from accidentally changing parameters in
the inverter memory. Use B031 to select from various protection levels.
The table below lists all combinations of B031 option codes
Run
and the ON/OFF state of the [SFT] input. Each Check ✔ or Ex
Mode
✘ indicates whether the corresponding parameter(s) can be
Edit
edited. The Standard Parameters column below lists Low and
Lo Hi
High level access for some lock modes. These refer to the
✘✔
parameter tables throughout this chapter, each of which
includes a column titled Run Mode Edit as shown to the right.
The two marks (Check ✔ or Ex ✘) under the “Lo Hi” subtitle indicate whether
Low-level and/or High-level access applies to each parameter as defined in the table
below. In some lock modes, you can edit only F001 and the Multi-speed parameter group
that includes A020, A220, A021–A035, and A038 (Jog). However, it does not include
A019, Multi-speed operation selection. The editing access to B031 itself is unique, and
is specified in the right-most two columns below.
[SFT]
Intelligent
Input

Standard Parameters

F001 and
Multi-Speed

B031

Stop

Run

Stop & Run

Stop

Run

OFF

✔

Run mode
edit access

✔

✘

✔

✘

OFF

✔

Run mode
edit access

✔

✘

✔

✘

(ignored)

✘

✔

✘

(ignored)

✘

✔

✘

(ignored)

✔

High-level

✔

NOTE: Since the software lock function B031 is always accessible, this feature is not
the same as password protection used in other industrial control devices.

Configuring
Drive Parameters

B031
Lock
Mode

3–40

“B” Group: Fine Tuning Functions

“B” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

B031 Software lock mode
selection

Configuring
Drive Parameters

S-Lock

MD1

Description
Prevents parameter changes, in
five options, option codes:
00... Low-level access, [SFT]
input blocks all edits
01... Low-level access, [SFT]
input blocks edits (except F001
and Multi-speed parameters)
02... No access to edits
03... No access to edits except
F001 and Multi-speed parameters
10... High-level access, including B031

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)
✘✔

—

NOTE: To disable parameter editing when using B031 lock modes 00 and 01, assign the
[SFT] function to one of the intelligent input terminals.
See “Software Lock” on page 4–22.

L2002 Inverter

3–41

Miscellaneous Settings
The miscellaneous settings include scaling factors, initialization modes, and others. This
section covers some of the most important settings you may need to configure.
B080: [AM] analog signal gain – This parameter allows you to scale the analog output
[AM] relative to the monitored variable.
B082: Start frequency adjustment – When the inverter starts to run, the output
frequency does not ramp from 0Hz. Instead, it steps directly to the start frequency
(B082), and the ramp proceeds from upward there.
B083: Carrier frequency adjustment – The internal switching frequency of the
inverter circuitry (also called the chopper frequency). It is called the carrier frequency
because the lower AC output frequency of the inverter “rides” the carrier. The faint,
high-pitched sound you hear when the inverter is in Run Mode is characteristic of
switching power supplies in general. The carrier frequency is adjustable from 2.0 kHz to
14 kHz. The audible sound decreases at the higher frequencies, but RFI noise and
leakage current may be increased. Refer to the specification derating curves in Chapter 1
to determine the maximum allowable carrier frequency setting for your particular
inverter and environmental conditions.

B084, B085: Initialization codes – These functions allow you to restore the factory
default settings. Please refer to “Restoring Factory Default Settings” on page 6–8.
B086: Frequency display scaling – You can convert the output frequency monitor on
D001 to a scaled number (engineering units) monitored at function D007. For example,
the motor may run a conveyor that is monitored in feet per minute. Use this formula:
Scaled output frequency (D_07) = Output frequency (D_01) × Factor (B_86)

Configuring
Drive Parameters

NOTE: The carrier frequency setting must stay within specified limits for inverter-motor
applications that must comply with particular regulatory agencies. For example, a
European CE-approved application requires the inverter carrier to be less than 5 kHz.

3–42

“B” Group: Fine Tuning Functions

“B” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description
Adjust of analog output at
terminal [AM],
range is 0 to 255

✔✔

100.

—

Sets the starting frequency for
the inverter output, range is 0.5
to 9.9 Hz

✘✔

0.5

Sets the PWM carrier (internal
switching frequency), range is
2.0 to 14.0 kHz

✘✘

5.0

kHz

Select the type of initialization
to occur, two option codes:
00... Trip history clear
01... Parameter initialization
02... Trip history clear and
parameter initialization

✘✘

—

B085 Country code for initial- Select default parameter values
ization
for country on initialization,
four options, option codes:
INIT Slct
USA 00... Japan version
01... Europe version
02... US version

✘✘

—

B086 Frequency scaling
conversion factor

Specify a constant to scale the
displayed frequency for D007
monitor, range is 0.1 to 99.9

✔✔

1.0

—

Select whether the STOP key
on the keypad is enabled, two
option codes:
00... enabled
01... disabled

✘✔

—

B080 [AM] analog signal
gain
AM-Adj

00100%

B082 Start frequency adjustment
fmin

0000.5Hz

B083 Carrier frequency
setting
Carrier

0005.0

B084 Initialization mode
(parameters or trip
history)
INIT Mode

Configuring
Drive Parameters

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

Cnv Gain

TRP

0001.0

B087 STOP key enable
STP Key

B091/B088: Stop Mode / Restart Mode Configuration – You can configure how the
inverter performs a standard stop (each time Run FWD and REV signals turn OFF).
Setting B091 determines whether the inverter will control the deceleration, or whether it
will perform a free-run stop (coast to a stop). When using the free-run stop selection, it is
imperative to also configure how you want the inverter to resume control of motor speed.
Setting B088 determines whether the inverter will ensure the motor always resumes at
0 Hz, or whether the motor resumes from its current coasting speed (also called
frequency matching). The Run command may turn OFF briefly, allowing the motor to
coast to a slower speed from which normal operation can resume.

L2002 Inverter

3–43

In most applications a controlled deceleration is desirable, corresponding to B091=00.
However, applications such as HVAC fan control will often use a free-run stop
(B091=01). This practice decreases dynamic stress on system components, prolonging
system life. In this case, you will typically set B088=01 in order to resume from the
current speed after a free-run stop (see diagram below, right). Note that using the default
setting, B088=00, can cause trip events when the inverter attempts to force the load
quickly to zero speed.
NOTE: Other events can cause (or be configured to cause) a free-run stop, such as
power loss (see “Automatic Restart Mode” on page 3–33), or an intelligent input
terminal [FRS] signal. If all free-run stop behavior is important to your application (such
as HVAC), be sure to configure each event accordingly.
An additional parameter further configures all instances of a free-run stop. Parameter
B003, Retry Wait Time Before Motor Restart, sets the minimum time the inverter will
free-run. For example, if B003 = 4 seconds (and B091=01) and the cause of the free-runstop lasts 10 seconds, the inverter will free-run (coast) for a total of 14 seconds before
driving the motor again.
B091 = 01 Stop Mode = free-run stop

B091 = 01 Stop Mode = free-run stop

B088 = 00 Resume from 0Hz

B088 = 01 Resume from current speed

Motor
speed

[FW, RV]

[FW, RV]
t

“B” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

B088 Restart mode after FRS
RUN FRS

Selects how the inverter
resumes operation when the
ZST free-run stop (FRS) is
cancelled, two options:
00 .. Restart from 0Hz
01 .. Restart from frequency
detected from real speed of
motor (frequency matching)

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)
✘✔

—

Configuring
Drive Parameters

B003
Wait time

Zero-frequency start

3–44

“B” Group: Fine Tuning Functions

“B” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

B089 Monitor display select
for networked inverter
PANEL d001

B091 Stop mode selection

Configuring
Drive Parameters

STP Slct

DEC

Description

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

Selects the parameter
displayed on the keypad
display when the inverter is
networked, 7 options:
01... Output frequency monitor
02... Output current monitor
03... Rotation direction
monitor
04... Process variable (PV),
PID feedback monitor
05... Intelligent input terminal
status
06... Intelligent output terminal
status
07... Scaled output frequency
monitor

✔✔

—

Selects how the inverter stops
the motor, two option codes:
00... DEC (decelerate and stop)
01... FRS (free run to stop)

✘✘

—

B089: Monitor display select for networked inverter – When the L2002 inverter is
controlled via network, the inverter’s keypad display can still provide Monitor Mode.
The D00x parameter selected by function B089 will be displayed on the keypad. See
“Local Monitoring During Network Operation” on page 3–8 for more details.
B130/B131: Over-voltage LADSTOP Enable / Over-voltage LADSTOP Level – The overvoltage LADSTOP function monitors the DC bus voltage and actively changes the
output frequency profile to maintain the DC bus voltage within settable limits. Although
“LAD” refers to “linear acceleration / deceleration,” the inverter only “STOPs” the
deceleration slope so that regenerative voltage will not cause the DC bus to rise enough
to cause an over-voltage trip event. Note that acceleration is not affected.

3–45

L2002 Inverter

The graph below shows an inverter output profile that starts decelerating to a stop. At
two different points during the deceleration, regenerative voltage elevates the DC bus
level, exceeding the LADSTOP threshold set by B131. When the Over-voltage
LADSTOP feature is enabled by B130 = 01, the inverter stops the deceleration ramp in
each case until the DC bus level is again less than the threshold value.
B130 = 01 OVLADSTOP = enable
V

Inverter stops
deceleration

Over-voltage protection
trip threshold
Over-voltage
LADSTOP threshold

B131

DC bus level
t
Output
frequency

Configuring
Drive Parameters

Start
deceleration
Deceleration
resumed
t

When using the Over-voltage LADSTOP feature, please note the following:
• When the over-voltage LADSTOP feature is enabled (B130 = 01), the actual
deceleration is sometimes longer than the value set by parameters F003/F203.
• The over-voltage LADSTOP feature does not operate by maintaining a constant
DC bus voltage. So, it is still possible to have an over-voltage trip event during
extreme deceleration.
• If B131 is set lower than the normal DC bus voltage (when not in decel) by mistake, or
if the inverter’s input voltage increases enough, then the inverter will apply LADSTOP
(if enabled) all the time. In this case, the inverter can accelerate and run the motor, but
it cannot decelerate. If you are not sure that B131 > DC bus voltage, measure the DC
bus voltage in your installation and verify that the B131 value is higher.
“B” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

B130 Over-voltage
LADSTOP enable
OVLADSTOP

Description
Pauses deceleration ramp when
DC bus voltage rises above
threshold level, in order to
OFF avoid over-voltage trip.
Two option codes:
00 .. Disable
01 .. Enable

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)
✘✔

—

3–46

“B” Group: Fine Tuning Functions

“B” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

B131 Over-voltage
LADSTOP level

Sets the threshold level for
over-voltage LADSTOP. When
the DC bus voltage is above the
LADST LVL 00380V threshold value, the inverter
stops deceleration until the DC
bus voltage is less than the
threshold setting again.
Two voltage ranges with 1V
resolution:
200V class: 330 to 390V
400V class: 660 to 780V

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)
✔✔

380 /
760

Configuring
Drive Parameters

B150: Carrier Mode – If B083 Carrier Frequency setting is greater than 4 kHz, then
the B150 Carrier Mode function (if enabled) will reduce the actual carrier frequency
downward to 4 kHz as the inverter’s internal termperature increases.
“B” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

B150 Carrier mode
Cr-DEC

OFF

B151 Quick start enable
RDY-Func

OFF

Description

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)
✘✔

—

✔✔
Enables inverter output for
constant ON operation to speed
up response. Two option codes:
00... Disable
01... Enable

—

Automatically reduces the
actual carrier frequency as
needed to avoid internal
overheating. Two option codes:
00... Disable
01... Enable

B151: Quick start enable – This function and the intelligent input [RDY] (option code
52) have the same effect. If you need the inverter output to always have a quick response,
use parameter B151 and do not assign the [RDY] input. Otherwise, disable Quick Start
Enable (set B151=00) and assign the [RDY] input. Then you can enable the Quick Start
feature only when necessary. When the Quick Start feature is enabled, then access to
parameter editing is the same as when the inverter is in Run Mode.
NOTE: Parameter B151 cannot be read and copied to another inverter. This prevents
turning ON another inverter’s output unexpectedly.

L2002 Inverter

3–47

“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions
The five input terminals [1], [2], [3], [4], and [5] can be configured for any of 19
different functions. The next two tables show how to configure the five terminals. The
inputs are logical, in that they are either OFF or ON. We define these states as OFF=0,
and ON=1.
The inverter comes with default options for the five terminals. These default settings are
initially unique, each one having its own setting. Note that European and US versions
have different default settings. You can use any option on any terminal, and even use the
same option twice to create a logical OR (though usually not required).
NOTE: Terminal [5] has the ability to be a logical input, and to be an analog input for a
thermistor device when the PTC function (option code 19) is assigned to that terminal.

Input Terminal Configuration

For example, if you set function C001=00, you have assigned option 00 (Forward Run)
to terminal [1]. The option codes and the specifics of how each one works are in
Chapter 4.
“C” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

C001 Terminal [1] function
IN-TM 1

C201 Terminal [1] function,
2nd motor
2IN-TM 1

C202 Terminal [2] function,
2nd motor
2IN-TM 2

C203 Terminal [3] function,
2nd motor
2IN-TM 3

✘✘

00
[FW]

—

Select terminal [1] function,
29 options (see next section)

✘✘

00
[FW]

—

Select terminal [2] function,
29 options (see next section)

✘✘

01
[RV]

—

Select terminal [2] function,
29 options (see next section)

✘✘

01
[RV]

—

Select terminal [3] function,
29 options (see next section)

✘✘

02
[CF1]

16
[AT]

—

Select terminal [3] function,
29 options (see next section)

✘✘

02
[CF1]

16
[AT]

—

C003 Terminal [3] function
IN-TM 3

Select terminal [1] function,
29 options (see next section)

C002 Terminal [2] function
IN-TM 2

Description

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

Configuring
Drive Parameters

Functions and Options –The function codes in the following table let you assign one of
nineteen options to any of the five logic inputs for the L2002 inverters. The functions
C001through C005 configure the terminals [1] through [5] respectively. The “value” of
these particular parameters is not a scalar value, but it is a discrete number that selects
one option from many available options.

3–48

“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions

“C” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

C004 Terminal [4] function
IN-TM 4

USP

C204 Terminal [4] function,
2nd motor
2IN-TM 4

2CH

C205 Terminal [5] function,
2nd motor
2IN-TM 5

Select terminal [4] function,
29 options (see next section)

✘✘

03
[CF2]

13
[USP]

—

Select terminal [4] function,
29 options (see next section)

✘✘

03
[CF2]

13
[USP]

—

Select terminal [5] function,
30 options (see next section)

✘✘

18
[RS]

09
[2CH]

—

Select terminal [5] function,
30 options (see next section)

✘✘

18
[RS]

09
[2CH]

—

USP

C005 Terminal [5] function
IN-TM 5

Description

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

2CH

Configuring
Drive Parameters

The input logic convention is programmable for each of the five inputs. Most inputs
default to normally open (active high), but you can select normally closed (active low) in
order to invert the sense of the logic.
“C” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

C011 Terminal [1] active state Select logic convention, two
option codes:
O/C-1
NO 00... normally open [NO]
01... normally closed [NC]

✘✘

—

C012 Terminal [2] active state Select logic convention, two
option codes:
O/C-2
NO 00... normally open [NO]
01... normally closed [NC]

✘✘

—

C013 Terminal [3] active state Select logic convention, two
option codes:
O/C-3
NO 00... normally open [NO]
01... normally closed [NC]

✘✘

—

C014 Terminal [4] active state Select logic convention, two
option codes:
O/C-4
NC 00... normally open [NO]
01... normally closed [NC]

✘✘

—

C015 Terminal [5] active state Select logic convention, two
option codes:
O/C-5
NO 00... normally open [NO]
01... normally closed [NC]

✘✘

—

L2002 Inverter

3–49

NOTE: An input terminal configured for option code 18 ([RS] Reset command) cannot
be configured for normally closed operation.

Intelligent Input Terminal Overview
Each of the five intelligent terminals may be assigned any of the options in the following
table. When you program one of the option codes for terminal assignments C001 to
C005, the respective terminal assumes the function role of that option code. The terminal
functions have a symbol or abbreviation that we use to label a terminal using that
function. For example the “Forward Run” command is [FW]. The physical label on the
terminal block connector is simply 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5. However, schematic examples in this
manual also use the terminal symbol (such as [FW]) to show the assigned option. The
option codes for C011 to C015 determines the active state of the logical input (active
high or active low).

Configuring
Drive Parameters

3–50

“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions
Input Function Summary Table – This table shows all twenty-four intelligent input
functions at a glance. Detailed descriptions of these functions, related parameters and
settings, and example wiring diagrams are in “Using Intelligent Input Terminals” on
page 4–9.
Input Function Summary Table

Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

Configuring
Drive Parameters

CF1 *1

CF2

CF3

CF4

SET

2CH

FRS

Function Name
Forward Run/Stop

Description
ON

Inverter is in Run Mode, motor runs forward

OFF

Inverter is in Stop Mode, motor stops

Inverter is in Run Mode, motor runs reverse

OFF

Inverter is in Stop Mode, motor stops

Multi-speed Select,
Bit 0 (LSB)

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 0, logical 1

OFF

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 0, logical 0

Multi-speed Select,
Bit 1

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 1, logical 1

OFF

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 1, logical 0

Multi-speed Select,
Bit 2

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 2, logical 1

OFF

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 2, logical 0

Multi-speed Select,
Bit 3 (MSB)

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 3, logical 1

OFF

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 3, logical 0

Jogging

Inverter is in Run Mode, output to motor runs at
jog parameter frequency

OFF

Inverter is in Stop Mode

Reverse Run/Stop

External DC Braking ON

Set (select) 2nd
Motor Data

2-stage Acceleration
and Deceleration

Free-run Stop

DC braking will be applied during deceleration

OFF

DC braking will not be applied

The inverter uses 2nd motor parameters for
generating frequency output to motor. The selection of 1st or 2nd motor is available only during
Stop Mode.

OFF

The inverter uses 1st (main) motor parameters
for generating frequency output to motor

Frequency output uses 2nd-stage acceleration
and deceleration values

OFF

Frequency output uses standard acceleration and
deceleration values

Causes output to turn OFF, allowing motor to
free run (coast) to stop

OFF

Output operates normally, so controlled deceleration stops motor

L2002 Inverter

3–51

Input Function Summary Table
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

EXT

SFT

PTC

STA

STP

F/R

External Trip

Description
ON

When assigned input transitions OFF to ON,
inverter latches trip event and displays E12

OFF

No trip event for ON to OFF, any recorded trip
events remain in history until Reset

On powerup, the inverter will not resume a Run
command (mostly used in the US)

OFF

On powerup, the inverter will resume a Run
command that was active before power loss

The keypad and remote programming devices
are prevented from changing parameters

OFF

The parameters may be edited and stored

Analog Input
Voltage/current
Select

Terminal [OI] is enabled for current input (uses
terminal [L] for power supply return)

OFF

Terminal [O] is enabled for voltage input (uses
terminal [L] for power supply return)

Reset Inverter

The trip condition is reset, the motor output is
turned OFF, and powerup reset is asserted

OFF

Normal power-ON operation

ANLG

When a thermistor is connected to terminals [5]
and [L], the inverter checks for overtemperature and will cause trip event and turn
OFF output to motor

OPEN

A disconnect of the thermistor causes a trip
event, and the inverter turns OFF the motor

Start
(3-wire interface)

Starts the motor rotation

OFF

No change to present motor status

Stop
(3-wire interface)

Stops the motor rotation

OFF

No change to present motor status

FWD, REV
(3-wire interface)

Selects the direction of motor rotation: ON =
FWD. While the motor is rotating, a change of
F/R will start a deceleration, followed by a
change in direction.

OFF

Selects the direction of motor rotation: OFF =
REV. While the motor is rotating, a change of F/
R will start a deceleration, followed by a change
in direction.

Unattended Start
Protection

Software Lock

PTC Thermistor
Thermal Protection

Configuring
Drive Parameters

USP

Function Name

3–52

“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions

Input Function Summary Table
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

PID

Configuring
Drive Parameters

PIDC

DWN

UDC

OPE

ADD

F-TM

RDY

Function Name
PID Disable

PID Reset

Description
ON

Temporarily disables PID loop control. Inverter
output turns OFF as long as PID Enable is active
(A071=01).

OFF

Has no effect on PID loop operation, which
operates normally if PID Enable is active
(A071=01).

Resets the PID loop controller. The main consequence is that the integrator sum is forced to
zero.

OFF

No effect on PID loop controller

Remote Control
ON
UP Function (motorized speed pot.)
OFF
Remote Control
DOWN Function
(motorized speed
pot.)

ADD frequency
enable

Force Terminal
Mode

Quick Start Enable

Output to motor operates normally

Decelerates (decreases output frequency) motor
from current frequency

OFF

Output to motor operates normally

Remote Control Data ON
Clearing

Operator Control

Accelerates (increases output frequency) motor
from current frequency

Clears the UP/DWN frequency memory by
forcing it to equal the set frequency parameter
F001. Setting C101 must be set=00 to enable this
function to work.

OFF

UP/DWN frequency memory is not changed

Forces the source of the output frequency setting
(A001) and the source of the RUN command
(A002) to be from the digital operator

OFF

Source of output frequency set by (A001) and
source of run command set by (A002) is used

Adds the A145 value (Add Frequency) to the
output frequency

OFF

Does not add the A145 value to the output
frequency

Force inverter to use input terminals for output
frequency and Run command sources

OFF

Source of output frequency set by (A001) and
source of Run command set by (A002) is used

Inverter output is always ON (even when motor
rotation has stopped) to improve motor startup
time.

OFF

Inverter output turns OFF normally in Stop
Mode.

L2002 Inverter

3–53

Input Function Summary Table
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

S-ST

255

—

Note 1:

Function Name
Special-Set (select)
2nd Motor Data

Not selected

Description
ON

The inverter uses 2nd motor parameters for
generating frequency output to motor. The selection of 1st or 2nd motor is available during Stop
Mode or Run Mode.

OFF

The inverter uses 1st (main) motor parameters
for generating frequency output to motor

(input ignored)

OFF

(input ignored)

When using the Multi-speed Select settings CF1 to CF4, do not display
parameter F001 or change the value of F001 while the inverter is in Run Mode
(motor running). If it is necessary to check the value of F001 during Run
Mode, please monitor D001 instead of F001.

Configuring
Drive Parameters

3–54

“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions

Output Terminal Configuration
The inverter provides configuration for logic (discrete) and analog outputs, shown in the
table below.
“C” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

C021 Terminal [11] function
OUT-TM 11

RUN

11 programmable functions
available for logic (discrete)
outputs (see next section)

C026 Alarm relay terminal
function
OUT-TM RY

01
[FA1]

—

✘✘

00
[RUN]

—

✘✘

05
[AL]

—

✘✔

00
output
freq.

—

C028 [AM] signal selection
AM-KIND

Configuring
Drive Parameters

✘✘

FA1

C022 Terminal [12] function
OUT-TM 12

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

Two available functions:
00... Actual motor speed
01... Motor current
(see after next section)

The output logic convention is programmable for terminals [11], [12], and the alarm
relay terminals. The open-collector output terminals [11] and [12] default to normally
open (active low), but you can select normally closed (active high) for these terminals in
order to invert the sense of the logic. You can invert the logical sense of the alarm relay
output as well.
“C” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

Select logic convention, two
option codes:
00... normally open (NO)
01... normally closed (NC)

✘✘

—

Select logic convention, two
option codes:
00... normally open (NO)
01... normally closed (NC)

✘✘

—

C036 Alarm relay active state Select logic convention, two
option codes:
O/C-RY
NC 00... normally open (NO)
01... normally closed (NC)

✘✘

—

C031 Terminal [11] active
state
O/C-11

C032 Terminal [12] active
state
O/C-12

L2002 Inverter

3–55

Output Function Summary Table – This table shows all eleven functions for the
logical outputs (terminals [11], [12]) at a glance. Detailed descriptions of these
functions, related parameters and settings, and example wiring diagrams are in “Using
Intelligent Output Terminals” on page 4–35.
Output Function Summary Table
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

RUN

FA2

FBV

NDc

Run Signal

Description
ON

when inverter is in Run Mode

OFF

when inverter is in Stop Mode

Frequency Arrival
Type 1 – Constant
Speed

when output to motor is at the set frequency

OFF

when output to motor is OFF, or in any acceleration or deceleration ramp

Frequency Arrival
Type 2 – Overfrequency

when output to motor is at or above the FA2
threshold (C042) during accel

OFF

when output to motor is below the FA2 threshold
(C043) during decel

Overload Advance
Notice Signal

when output current is more than the set threshold for the overload signal

OFF

when output current is less than the set threshold
for the overload signal

Output Deviation for ON
PID Control

Alarm Signal

Analog Input
Disconnect Detect

PID Second Stage
Output

ModBus Network
Detection Signal

when PID error is more than the set threshold for
the deviation signal

OFF

when PID error is less than the set threshold for
the deviation signal

when an alarm signal has occurred and has not
been cleared

OFF

when no alarm has occurred since the last
clearing of alarm(s)

when the [O] input value < B082 setting (signal
loss detected), or the [OI] input current < 4mA

OFF

when no signal loss is detected

Transitions to ON when the inverter is in RUN
Mode and the PID Process Variable (PV) is less
than the Feedback Low Limit (C053)

OFF

Transitions to OFF the PID Feedback Value (PV)
exceeds the PID High Limit (C052), and transitions to OFF when the inverter goes from Run
Mode to Stop Mode.

when the communications watchdog timer
(period specified by C077) has timed out

OFF

when the communications watchdog timer is
satisfied by regular communications activity

Configuring
Drive Parameters

FA1

Function Name

3–56

“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions

Output Function Summary Table
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

LOG

ODc

Function Name
Logic Output
Function

Option Card
Detection Signal

Description
ON

when the Boolean operation specified by C143
has a logical “1” result

OFF

when the Boolean operation specified by C143
has a logical “0” result

when the communications watchdog timer
(period specified by P044) has timed out

OFF

when the communications watchdog timer is
satisfied by regular communications activity

Analog Function Summary Table – This table shows both functions for the analog
voltage output [AM] terminal, configured by C028. More information on using and
calibrating the [AM] output terminal is in “Analog Output Operation” on page 4–55.

Configuring
Drive Parameters

Analog Function Summary Table
Option
Code

Function Name

Description

Analog Frequency
Monitor

Actual motor speed

Analog Current Output Motor current (% of maximum rated
Monitor
output current)

Range
0 to max.
frequency in Hz
0 to 200%

Output Function Adjustment Parameters
The following parameters work in
Motor current
conjunction with the intelligent output
C041
function, when configured. The overload
level parameter (C041) sets the motor
0
current level at which the overload signal
[OL] turns ON. The range of settings is
Overload
signal 1
from 0% to 200% of the rated current for
0
the inverter. This function is for generating
an early warning logic output, without
causing either a trip event or a restriction
of the motor current (those effects are available on other functions).
The frequency arrival signal, [FA1] or
Output
frequency
[FA2], is intended to indicate when the
C042
inverter output has reached (arrived at) the
target frequency. You can adjust the timing
0
of the leading and trailing edges of the
Arrival
signal via two parameters specific to accelsignal 1
eration and deceleration ramps, C042 and
0
C043.

C043
t

3–57

L2002 Inverter
The Error for the PID loop is the magnitude (absolute value) of the difference
between the Setpoint (desired value) and
Process Variable (actual value). The PID
output deviation signal [OD] (output
terminal function option code 04)
indicates when the error magnitude has
exceeded a magnitude you define.

PID Error (PV–SP) deviation threshold
PV
Output
SP
C044

t
Deviation
signal
1
0
t

“C” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)
✘✔

Rated current
for each inverter
model

✘✔

Rated current
for each inverter
model

C042 Frequency arrival
setting for acceleration

Sets the frequency arrival
setting threshold for the output
frequency during acceleration,
ARV ACC 0000.0Hz range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

✘✔

0.0

C043 Arrival frequency
setting for deceleration

✘✔

0.0

Sets the allowable PID loop
error magnitude (absolute
value), SP - PV, range is 0.0 to
100%, resolution is 0.1%

✘✔

3.0

When the PV exceeds this
value, the PID loop turns OFF
the PID Second Stage Output,
range is 0.0 to 100.0%

✘✔

100.0

When the PV goes below this
value, the PID loop turns ON
the PID Second Stage Output,
range is 0.0 to 100.0%

✘✔

0.0

OL LVL

001.60A

C241 Overload level setting,
2nd motor
2OLLVL

001.60A

Sets the frequency arrival
setting threshold for the output
frequency during deceleration,
ARV DEC 0000.0Hz range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

C044 PID deviation level
setting
ARV PID

003.0%

C052 PID FBV function
high limit
PID LtU

0100.0%

C053 PID FBV function
variable low limit
PID LtL

0000.0%

Configuring
Drive Parameters

Sets the overload signal level
between 0% and 200% (from 0
to two times the rated current
of the inverter)

C041 Overload level setting

3–58

“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions

Network Communication Settings
The following table lists parameters that configure the inverter’s serial communications
port. The settings affect how the inverter communicates with a digital operator (such as
SRW–0EX), as well as a ModBus network (for networked inverter applications). The
settings cannot be edited via the network, in order to ensure network reliability. Refer to
“ModBus Network Communications” on page B–1 for more information on controlling
and monitoring your inverter from a network.
“C” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

✘✔

baud

4800

Three option codes:
04... 4800 bps
05... 9600 bps
06... 19200 bps

✘✔

—

00001

Set the address of the inverter
on the network. Range is 1 to
32.

✘✔

—

✘✔

—

Selects inverter response to
communications error.
Five options:
00... Trip (error code E60)
01... Decelerate to a stop and
trip (error code E60)
02... Disable
03... Free run stop (coasting)
04... Decelerate to a stop

✘✔

—

Sets the communications
watchdog timer period.
Range is 0.00 to 99.99 sec.

✘✔

0.00

sec.

Time the inverter waits after
receiving a message before it
transmits.
Range is 0. to 1000. ms

✘✔

msec.

C071 Communication speed
selection
COM BAU
C072 Node allocation

Configuring
Drive Parameters

COM ADR

C074 Communication parity
selection
COM PRTY

Three option codes:
00... No parity
01... Even parity
NON 02... Odd parity

C075 Communication stop bit Range is 1 to 2
selection
COM STP

1BIT

C076 Communication error
select
COM ESlct

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

None

C077 Communication error
time-out
COM ETIM 000.00s
C078 Communication wait
time
COM Wait 00000ms

3–59

L2002 Inverter

Analog Signal Calibration Settings
The functions in the following table configure the signals for the analog output terminals. Note that these settings do not change the current/voltage or sink/source characteristics—only the zero and span (scaling) of the signals.
“C” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)
✔✔

100.0

C082 OI input span calibration

✔✔

100.0

✔✔

100.0

✔✔

0.0

OI-ADJ

0100.0%

Scale factor between the
external frequency command
on terminals L – OI (current
input) and the frequency
output, range is 0.0 to 200.0%

C085 Thermistor input tuning Range is 0.0 to 200.0%
PTC Adj

0100.0%

C086 [AM] terminal offset
tuning

Range is 0.0 to 10.0V

AM-OFFST 0000.0V

NOTE: When you restore factory default settings, the values will change to those listed
above. Be sure to manually reconfigure the values for your application, if needed, after
restoring factory defaults.

Configuring
Drive Parameters

C081 O input span calibration Scale factor between the
external frequency command
O-ADJ
0100.0% on terminals L – O (voltage
input) and the frequency
output, range is 0.0 to 200.0%

3–60

“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions

Miscellaneous Functions
The following table contains miscellaneous functions not in other function groups.
“C” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

C091 Debug mode enable
DBG Slct

OFF

C101 Up/Down memory
mode selection
UP/DWN

NO-STR

C102 Reset selection

Configuring
Drive Parameters

RS Slct

Description

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

Displays debug parameters.
Two option codes:
00... Disable
01... Enable

✔✔

—

Controls speed setpoint for the
inverter after power cycle. Two
option codes:
00... Clear last frequency
(return to default frequency
F001)
01... Keep last frequency
adjusted by UP/DWN

✘✔

—

Determines response to Reset
input [RST].
Three option codes:
00... Cancel trip state at input
signal ON transition, stops
inverter if in Run Mode
01... Cancel trip state at signal
OFF transition, stops inverter if
in Run Mode
02... Cancel trip state at input
signal ON transition, no effect
if in Run Mode

✘✔

—

L2002 Inverter

3–61

Output Logic and Timing
Logic Output Function – The inverter has a built-in logic output feature. You can select
any two of the other nine intelligent output options for internal inputs. Then, configure
the logic function to apply the logical AND, OR, or XOR (exclusive OR) operator as
desired to the two inputs. The terminal symbol for the new output is [LOG]. Use C021,
C022, or C026 to route the logical result to terminal [11], [12], or the relay terminals.
C021
Intelligent outputs used as
internal inputs:

11
C022

C141
RUN, FA1,
FA2, OL,
OD, AL, Dc,
FBV, NDc

C026
Logic function
AND, OR, XOR

C142
RUN, FA1,
FA2, OL,
OD, AL, Dc,
FBV, NDc

C143

Input A

AL1

[LOG]

AL0
Input B

AL2

Input States

[LOG] Output State

AND

XOR

“C” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

C141 Input A select for logic
output
LogicOut1

RUN

C142 Input B select for logic
output
LogicOut2

FA1

9 programmable functions
available for logic (discrete)
outputs

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)
✘✘

—

✘✘

—

Configuring
Drive Parameters

The following table shows all four possible logic input combinations with each of the
three available logical operations.

3–62

“C” Group: Intelligent Terminal Functions

“C” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

C143 Logic function select
LogicOPE

AND

Description
Applies a logic function to
calculate [LOG] output state,
three options:
00... [LOG] = A AND B
01... [LOG] = A OR B
02... [LOG] = A XOR B

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)
✘✘

—

Output Signal ON/OFF Delay Function - Intelligent outputs including terminals [11],
[12], and the output relay, have configurable signal transition delays. Each output can
delay either the OFF-to-ON or ON-to-OFF transitions, or both. Signal transition delays
are variable from 0.1 to 100.0 seconds. This feature is useful in applications that must
tailor inverter output signals to meet timing requirements of certain external devices.

Configuring
Drive Parameters

“C” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)
✘✔

0.0

sec.

Range is 0.0 to 100.0 sec.

✘✔

0.0

sec.

C146 Terminal [12] ON delay Range is 0.0 to 100.0 sec.

✘✔

0.0

sec.

Range is 0.0 to 100.0 sec.

✘✔

0.0

sec.

Range is 0.0 to 100.0 sec.

✘✔

0.0

sec.

C149 Output relay OFF delay Range is 0.0 to 100.0 sec.

✘✔

0.0

sec.

C144 Terminal [11] ON delay Range is 0.0 to 100.0 sec.
DLAY 11

0000.0s

C145 Terminal [11] OFF
delay
HOLD 11
DLAY 12

0000.0s
0000.0s

C147 Terminal [12] OFF
delay
HOLD 12

0000.0s

C148 Output relay ON delay
DLAY RY
HOLD RY

0000.0s
0000.0s

NOTE: If you are using the output terminal OFF delay feature (any of C145, C147,
C149 > 0.0 sec.), the [RS] (Reset) terminal affects the ON-to-OFF transition slightly.
Normally (without using OFF delays), the [RS] input causes the motor output and the
logic outputs to turn OFF together, immediately. However, when any output uses an OFF
delay, then after the [RS] input turns ON, that output will remain ON for an additional 1
sec. period (approximate) before turning OFF.

L2002 Inverter

3–63

“H” Group: Motor Constants Functions
The “H” Group parameters configure the
inverter for the motor characteristics. You
must manually set H003 and H004 values to
match the motor. Parameter H006 is factoryset. If you want to reset the parameters to the
factory default settings, use the procedure in
“Restoring Factory Default Settings” on
page 6–8. Use A044 to select the torque
control algorithm as shown in the diagram.

Inverter Torque Control Algorithms
A44
V/f control,
constant torque

Output
V/f control,
variable torque

“H” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

Nine selections:
0.2 / 0.4 / 0.75 / 1.5 / 2.2 / 3.7
5.5 / 7.5 / 11

✘✘

Nine selections:
0.2 / 0.4 / 0.75 / 1.5 / 2.2 / 3.7
5.5 / 7.5 / 11

✘✘

Four selections:
2/4/6/8

✘✘

poles

H204 Motor poles setting, 2nd Four selections:
motor
2/4/6/8

✘✘

poles

Motor constant (factory set),
range is 0 to 255

✔✔

100

—

Motor constant (factory set),
range is 0 to 255

✔✔

100

—

H003 Motor capacity
AUX K

0.4 kW

2AUXK

0.4 kW

H004 Motor poles setting
AUX P

2AUXP

100

H206 Motor stabilization
constant, 2nd motor
2AUXKCD

H006 Motor stabilization
constant
AUX KCD

100

NOTE: If you are using automatic torque boost (A041/A241 = 01) and the output
current is unstable in the low frequency range, be sure to adjust A042/A242 and
A043/A243 with H006/H206 in order to decrease the boost voltage as an addition to the
standard V/f curve.

Configuring
Drive Parameters

H203 Motor capacity, 2nd
setting

Specified by the
capacity of each
inverter model

3–64

“P” Group: Expansion Card Functions

“P” Group: Expansion Card Functions
The (optional) expansion card for the L2002 inverter has assiciated configuration data.
The following table defines the functions and their value ranges. Please refer to the
expansion card manual for more details.
NOTE: The “P” Group parameters do not appear in the parameter list shown on the
keypad display unless the expansion card is installed on the inverter.
“P” Function
Func.
Code

Name /
SRW Display

Description

P044 Network comm
watchdog timer
TIMER

Configuring
Drive Parameters

T-OUT

FTP

P046 Polled I/O output
instance number
O-AS-INS

1.00

sec.

Five options:
00... Trip (Error Code E70)
01... Decelerate to stop and trip
(Error Code E70)
02... Hold last speed
03... Free run stop
04... Decelerate and stop

✘✘

—

Three settings:
20, 21, 100

✘✘

—

Three settings:
70, 71, 101

✘✘

—

Five options:
00... Trip (Error Code E70)
01... Decelerate to stop and trip
(Error Code E70)
02... Hold last speed
03... Free run stop
04... Decelerate and stop

✘✘

—

Range is 00 to 38 (even
numbers only)

✘✘

—

071

P048 Inverter action on
network idle mode
FTP

P049 Network motor poles
setting for RPM
P

✘✘

021

P047 Polled I/O input
instance number

IDLE

Range is 0.00 to 99.99

01.00s

P045 Inverter action on
network comm error

O-AS-INS

Run
Defaults
Mode
Edit –FE(F) –FU Units
Lo Hi (EU) (USA)

00P

Operations
and Monitoring
In This Chapter....

4
page

— Introduction ..................................................... 2
— Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices ......... 4
— Control Logic Signal Specifications ................. 6
— Intelligent Terminal Listing............................... 7
— Using Intelligent Input Terminals ..................... 9
— Using Intelligent Output Terminals ................ 35
— Analog Input Operation ................................. 53
— Analog Output Operation .............................. 55
— PID Loop Operation ...................................... 56
— Configuring the Inverter for Multiple Motors .. 58

4–2

Introduction

Introduction
The previous material in Chapter 3 gave a reference listing of all the programmable
functions of the inverter. We suggest that you first scan through the listing of inverter
functions to gain a general familiarity. This chapter will build on that knowledge in the
following ways:
1. Related functions – Some parameters interact with or depend on the settings in other
functions. This chapter lists “required settings” for a programmable function to serve
as a cross-reference and an aid in showing how functions interact.
2. Intelligent terminals – Some functions rely on an input signal on a control logic
connector terminal, or generate output signals in other cases.
3. Electrical interfaces – This chapter shows how to make connections between the
inverter and other electrical devices.
4. PID Loop Operation – The L2002 has a built-in PID loop that calculates the optimal
inverter output frequency to control an external process. This chapter shows the
parameters and input/output terminals associated with PID loop operation.
5. Multiple motors – A single L2002 inverter may be used with two or more motors in
some types of applications. This chapter shows the electrical connections and inverter
parameters involved in multiple-motor applications.
The topics in this chapter can help you decide the features that are important to your
application, and how to use them. The basic installation covered in Chapter 2 concluded
with the powerup test and running the motor. Now, this chapter starts from that point and
shows how to make the inverter part of a larger control or automation system.

Caution Messages for Operating Procedures

Operations
and Monitoring

Before continuing, please read the following Caution messages.
CAUTION: The heat sink fins will have a high temperature. Be careful not to touch
them. Otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.
CAUTION: The operation of the inverter can be easily changed from low speed to high
speed. Be sure check the capability and limitations of the motor and machine before
operating the inverter. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
CAUTION: If you operate a motor at a frequency higher than the inverter standard
default setting (50Hz/60Hz), be sure to check the motor and machine specifications with
the respective manufacturer. Only operate the motor at elevated frequencies after getting
their approval. Otherwise, there is the danger of equipment damage.

L2002 Inverter

4–3

Warning Messages for Operating Procedures
Before continuing, please read the following Warning messages.
WARNING: Be sure to turn ON the input power supply only after closing the front case.
While the inverter is energized, be sure not to open the front case. Otherwise, there is the
danger of electric shock.
WARNING: Be sure not to operate electrical equipment with wet hands. Otherwise,
there is the danger of electric shock.
WARNING: While the inverter is energized, be sure not to touch the inverter terminals
even when the motor is stopped. Otherwise, there is the danger of electric shock.
WARNING: If the Retry Mode is selected, the motor may suddenly restart after a trip
stop. Be sure to stop the inverter before approaching the machine (be sure to design the
machine so that safety for personnel is secure even if it restarts.) Otherwise, it may cause
injury to personnel.
WARNING: If the power supply is cut OFF for a short period of time, the inverter may
restart operation after the power supply recovers if the Run command is active. If a
restart may pose danger to personnel, so be sure to use a lock-out circuit so that it will
not restart after power recovery. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.
WARNING: The Stop Key is effective only when the Stop function is enabled. Be sure
to enable the Stop Key separately from the emergency stop. Otherwise, it may cause
injury to personnel.

WARNING: Be sure not to touch the inside of the energized inverter or to put any
conductive object into it. Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/or fire.
WARNING: If power is turned ON when the Run command is already active, the motor
will automatically start and injury may result. Before turning ON the power, confirm that
the RUN command is not present.
WARNING: When the Stop key function is disabled, pressing the Stop key does not
stop the inverter, nor will it reset a trip alarm.
WARNING: Be sure to provide a separate, hard-wired emergency stop switch when the
application warrants it.

Operations
and Monitoring

WARNING: During a trip event, if the alarm reset is applied and the Run command is
present, the inverter will automatically restart. Be sure to apply the alarm reset only after
verifying the Run command is OFF. Otherwise, it may cause injury to personnel.

4–4

Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices

Connecting to PLCs and Other Devices
Hitachi inverters (drives) are useful in many types of applications. During installation,
the inverter keypad (or other programming device) will facilitate the initial configuration. After installation, the inverter will generally receive its control commands through
the control logic connector or serial interface from another controlling device. In a
simple application such as single-conveyor speed control, a Run/Stop switch and potentiometer will give the operator all the required control. In a sophisticated application,
you may have a programmable logic controller (PLC) as the system controller, with
several connections to the inverter.
It is not possible to cover all the possible types of application in this manual. It will be
necessary for you to know the electrical characteristics of the devices you want to
connect to the inverter. Then, this section and the following sections on I/O terminal
functions can help you quickly and safely connect those devices to the inverter.
CAUTION: It is possible to damage the inverter or other devices if your application
exceeds the maximum current or voltage characteristics of a connection point.

Operations
and Monitoring

The connections between the inverter and
other devices rely on the electrical input/
output characteristics at both ends of each
connection, shown in the diagram to the
right. The inverter’s configurable inputs
accept either a sourcing or sinking output
from an external device (such as a PLC).
This chapter shows the inverter’s internal
electrical component(s) at each I/O terminal. In some cases, you will need to insert
a power source in the interface wiring.

Other device
Input
circuit

Output
circuit

signal
return

Input
circuit

PLC
+Com

In order to avoid equipment damage and
get your application running smoothly, we
recommend drawing a schematic of each
connection between the inverter and the
other device. Include the internal components of each device in the schematic, so
that it makes a complete circuit loop.

Inverter
PCS

+–

24V

1
2
3

Input
circuits

After making the schematic, then:
1. Verify that the current and voltage for
each connection is within the operating
limits of each device.

Inverter
signal
return

5
GND

2. Make sure that the logic sense (active high or active low) of any ON/OFF connection
is correct.
3. Check the zero and span (curve end points) for analog connections, and be sure the
scale factor from input to output is correct.
4. Understand what will happen at the system level if any particular device suddenly
loses power, or powers up after other devices.

4–5

L2002 Inverter

Example Wiring Diagram
The schematic diagram below provides a general example of logic connector wiring, in
addition to basic power and motor wiring covered in Chapter 2. The goal of this chapter
is to help you determine the proper connections for the various terminals shown below
for your specific application needs.
Breaker,
MCCB or GFI

L2002

(L1)

Power source,
3-phase or
1-phase, per
inverter model

(T1)

(L2)

N(L3)

(T3)

Intelligent inputs,
5 terminals
NOTE: For the wirForward
ing of intelligent I/O
and analog inputs, be
sure to use twisted
Reverse
pair / shielded cable.
Attach the shield wire
for each signal to its
respective common
terminal at the
inverter end only.

Thermistor

PD/+1
PCS
1

24V
Input
circuits

+
–

[5] configurable as
discrete input or
thermistor input

AL0

4–20mA

GND for analog signals

Relay contacts,
type 1 Form C

AL2
AM

0–10VDC

AL1
Operations
and Monitoring

Meter

Analog reference

Braking
unit
(optional)

N/–

3
4

DC reactor
(optional)

PD/+

5
GND for logic inputs

Motor

(T2)

H
O

Open collector outputs

Output
circuits

Run signal
Load

Freq. arrival signal
Load

+
–

OI
L

CM2

GND for logic outputs

4–6

Control Logic Signal Specifications

Control Logic Signal Specifications
The control logic connectors are located just
behind the front housing cover. The relay contacts
are just to the left of the logic connectors.
Connector labeling is shown below.
Relay contacts

AL2 AL1 AL0

Analog
output

Analog
inputs

Logic inputs

Logic
outputs

AM H O OI L L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS CM2 12 11
Specifications for the logic connection terminals are in the following table:
Terminal Name

Operations
and Monitoring

[PCS]

Description
+24V for logic inputs

Ratings
24VDC, 100 mA max. (do not short to terminal L)

[1], [2], [3], [4], [5] Discrete logic inputs

27VDC max. (use PCS or an external supply referenced to terminal L)

[L] (right) *1

GND for logic inputs

sum of input [1]—[5] currents (return)

[11], [12]

Discrete logic outputs

50mA maximum ON state current,
27 VDC maximum OFF state voltage

[CM2]

GND for logic outputs

100 mA: sum of 11 and 12 currents (return)

[AM]

Analog voltage output

0 to 10VDC, 1mA maximum

[L] (left) *2

GND for analog signals

sum of OI, O, H, and AM currents (return)

[OI]

Analog input, current

4 to 19.6 mA range, 20 mA nominal,
input impedance 250 Ω

[O]

Analog input, voltage

0 to 9.8 VDC range, 10VDC nominal,
input impedance 10 kΩ

[H]

+10V analog reference

10VDC nominal, 10 mA max

[AL0]

Relay common contact

[AL1] *3
[AL2] *3

Note 1:
Note 2:
Note 3:

250 VAC, 2.5A (R load) max.,
250 VAC, 0.2A (I load, P.F.=0.4) max.
Relay contact, normally open 100 VAC, 10mA min.
30 VDC, 3.0A (R load) max.
Relay contact, normally
30 VDC, 0.7A (I load, P.F.=0.4) max.
closed
5 VDC, 100mA min.

The two terminals [L] are electrically connected together inside the inverter.
We recommend using [L] logic GND (to the right) for logic input circuits and
[L] analog GND (to the left) for analog I/O circuits.
Default relay N.O./N.C. configuration is reversed. See page 4–36.

L2002 Inverter

4–7

Intelligent Terminal Listing
Intelligent Inputs
Use the following table to locate pages for intelligent input material in this chapter.
Intelligent INPUTS
Code

Name

Page

Forward Run/Stop

4–12

Reverse Run/Stop

4–12

CF1

Multi-speed Select, Bit 0 (LSB)

4–13

CF2

Multi-speed Select, Bit 1

4–13

CF3

Multi-speed Select, Bit 2

4–13

CF4

Multi-speed Select, Bit 3

4–13

Jogging

4–15

External DC Braking

4–16

SET

Set Second Motor

4–17

2CH

2-stage Acceleration and Deceleration

4–18

FRS

Free-run Stop

4–19

EXT

External Trip

4–20

USP

Unattended Start Protection

4–21

SFT

Software Lock

4–22

Analog Input Voltage/current Select

4–23

Reset Inverter

4–24

PTC

Thermistor Thermal Protection

4–25

STA

Start (3-wire interface)

4–26

STP

Stop (3-wire interface)

4–26

F/R

FWD, REV (3-wire interface)

4–26

PID

PID Disable

4–28

PIDC

PID Reset

4–28

Remote Control UP Function

4–29

DWN

Remote Control DOWN Function

4–29

UDC

Remote Control Data Clearing

4–29

OPE

Operator Control

4–31

ADD

ADD Frequency Enable

4–32

F-TM

Force Terminal Mode

4–33

RDY

Quick Start Enable

4–34

Operations
and Monitoring

Symbol

4–8

Intelligent Terminal Listing

Intelligent INPUTS
Symbol

Code

S-ST

Name
Special-Set Second Motor

Page
4–17

Intelligent Outputs
Use the following table to locate pages for intelligent output material in this chapter.

Operations
and Monitoring

Intelligent OUTPUTS
Symbol

Code

Name

Page

RUN

Run Signal

4–38

FA1

Frequency Arrival Type 1 – Constant Speed

4–39

FA2

Frequency Arrival Type 2 – Over-frequency

4–39

Overload Advance Notice Signal

4–41

Output Deviation for PID Control

4–42

Alarm Signal

4–43

Analog Input Disconnect Detect

4–45

FBV

Feedback Value Check

4–46

NDc

Network Detection Signal

4–49

LOG

Logic Output

4–50

ODc

Option Card Detection Signal

4–52

L2002 Inverter

4–9

Using Intelligent Input Terminals
Terminals [1], [2], [3], [4], and [5] are identical, programmable inputs for general use.
The input circuits can use the inverter’s internal (isolated) +24V field supply or an
external power supply. This section describes input circuits operation and how to
connect them properly to switches or transistor outputs on field devices.
The L2002 inverter features selectable sinking or sourcing inputs. These terms refer to
the connection to the external switching device—it either sinks current (from the input to
GND) or sources current (from a power source) into the input. Note that the sink/source
naming convention may be different in your particular country or industry. In any case,
the just follow the wiring diagrams in this section for your application.
The inverter has a DIP switch for configuring the choice of sinking or sourcing
inputs. To access it, you must remove the
front cover of the inverter housing. In the
figure to the right, the SR/SK switch
(“source/sink switch”) is shown as
located on the circuit board, at the right
end of the logic signal connector.
DO NOT confuse it with the two, larger
configuration switches nearby. The circuit
board has the SR and SK markings above
and below the switch as shown.

Logic inputs
SR

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS
SK
Legend:
SR

SR
Source
(default)

Sink
SK

CAUTION: Be sure to turn OFF power to the inverter before changing the SR/SK
switch position. Otherwise, damage to the inverter circuitry may occur.

The wiring diagrams on the following
pages show the four combinations of
using sourcing or sinking inputs, and
using the internal or an external DC
supply.

L2002

PCS
SK
SR
SK
SR
Input common

1
Input
circuits

5
L

Logic GND

24V

+
–

Operations
and Monitoring

[PCS] Terminal Wiring - The [PCS]
terminal (Programmable Control System
terminal) is named to include various
devices that can connect to the inverter’s
logic inputs. In the figure to the right,
note the [PCS] terminal and the nearby
diodes and DPDT switch. The upper part
of the SR/SK switch selects between
connecting the inverter’s +24V internal
supply to [PCS] or allowing an external
supply power to connect. The lower part
of the SR/SK switch selects between
connecting the input circuit common node
to either Logic GND or the +24V supply.

4–10

Using Intelligent Input Terminals
The two diagrams below show input wiring circuits using the inverter’s internal +24V
supply. Each diagram shows the connection for simple switches, or for a field device
with transistor outputs. Note that in the lower diagram, it is necessary to connect
terminal [L] only when using the field device with transistors. Be sure to use the correct
SR/SK switch position shown for each wiring diagram.

Sinking Inputs, Internal Supply

L2002

SR/SK switch = SK position

PCS
SK
SR

Open collector outputs,
NPN transistors
Field device

+
–

SK
SR

Input
switches

24V

1
Input
circuits

GND

5
Logic GND

Sourcing Inputs, Internal Supply

L2002

Operations
and Monitoring

SR/SK switch = SR position

PCS

PNP transistor
sourcing outputs

SK
SR

Field device

SK
SR

Common,
to [PCS]
1

Input
switches

1
Input
circuits

5
to PNP bias
circuits

GND

5
Logic GND

24V

+
–

L2002 Inverter

4–11

The two diagrams below show input wiring circuits using an external supply. If using the
upper wiring diagram, be sure to use a diode with the external supply. This will prevent a
power supply contention in case the SR/SK switch is accidentally placed in the incorrect
position. Be sure to use the correct SR/SK switch position shown for each wiring
diagram.
Sinking Inputs, External Supply
SR/SK switch = SK position

L2002

PCS
Open collector outputs,
NPN transistors

*
+
–

Field device

+
–

SK
SR

*
24V

+
–

SK
SR

Input
switches

24V

1
Input
circuits

5
Logic GND

GND

* Note: If the external power supply GND is (optionally)
connected to [L], then install the above diode.

Sourcing Inputs, External Supply

L2002

SR/SK switch = SR position

SK
SR

PNP transistor
sourcing outputs

SK
SR

24V

Field device

+
–

Input
switches

1
Input
circuits

+
–

24V
GND

Logic GND

24V

+
–

Operations
and Monitoring

PCS

4–12

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

Forward Run/Stop and Reverse Run/Stop Commands:
When you input the Run command via the terminal [FW], the inverter executes the
Forward Run command (high) or Stop command (low). When you input the Run
command via the terminal [RV], the inverter executes the Reverse Run command (high)
or Stop command (low).
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

Function Name
Forward Run/Stop

Reverse Run/Stop

State

Description

Inverter is in Run Mode, motor runs forward

OFF

Inverter is in Stop Mode, motor stops

Inverter is in Run Mode, motor runs reverse

OFF

Inverter is in Stop Mode, motor stops

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005

Required settings:

A002 = 01

Notes:
• When the Forward Run and Reverse Run
commands are active at the same time, the inverter
enters the Stop Mode.
• When a terminal associated with either [FW] or
[RV] function is configured for normally closed,
the motor starts rotation when that terminal is
disconnected or otherwise has no input voltage.

Example (default input configuration shown—
see page 3–47):
RV FW

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS

See I/O specs on page 4–6.

Operations
and Monitoring

NOTE: The parameter F004, Keypad Run Key Routing, determines whether the single
Run key issues a Run FWD command or Run REV command. However, it has no effect
on the [FW] and [RV] input terminal operation.
WARNING: If the power is turned ON and the Run command is already active, the
motor starts rotation and is dangerous! Before turning power ON, confirm that the Run
command is not active.

L2002 Inverter

4–13

Multi-Speed Select
The inverter can store up to 16 different target
frequencies (speeds) that the motor output uses for
steady-state run condition. These speeds are accessible through programming four of the intelligent
terminals as binary-encoded inputs CF1 to CF4 per
the table to the right. These can be any of the six
inputs, and in any order. You can use fewer inputs
if you need eight or fewer speeds.
Note: When choosing a subset of speeds to use,
always start at the top of the table, and with the
least-significant bit: CF1, CF2, etc.
The example with eight speeds in the figure below
shows how input switches configured for CF1–CF3
functions can change the motor speed in real time.
3rd Speed
7th
5th
2nd
1st
6th
4th
0th

1
[CF1] 0
1
[CF2] 0
1
[CF3] 0
1
[FWD] 0

Multispeed

Input Function
CF4 CF3 CF2 CF1

Speed 0

Speed 1

Speed 2

Speed 3

Speed 4

Speed 5

Speed 6

Speed 7

Speed 8

Speed 9

Speed 10

Speed 11

Speed 12

Speed 13

Speed 14

Speed 15

NOTE: Speed 0 is set by the A020
parameter value.

Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

CF1

CF2

CF3

CF4

Function Name
Multi-speed Select,
Bit 0 (LSB)
Multi-speed Select,
Bit 1
Multi-speed Select,
Bit 2
Multi-speed Select,
Bit 3 (MSB)

Input
State

Description

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 0, logical 1

OFF

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 0, logical 0

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 1, logical 1

OFF

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 1, logical 0

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 2, logical 1

OFF

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 2, logical 0

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 3, logical 1

OFF

Binary encoded speed select, Bit 3, logical 0

Operations
and Monitoring

4–14
Option
Code

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

Terminal
Symbol

Function Name

Input
State

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005

Required settings:

F001, A001 = 02,
A020 to A035

Notes:
• When programming the multi-speed settings, be
sure to press the Store key each time and then set
the next multi-speed setting. Note that when the key
is not pressed, no data will be set.
• When a multi-speed setting more than 50Hz(60Hz)
is to be set, it is necessary to program the maximum
frequency A004 high enough to allow that speed.

Description
Example (some CF inputs require input
configuration; some are default inputs—see
page 3–47):
(MSB)
(LSB)
CF3
CF1
CF4
CF2

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS

See I/O specs on page 4–6.

While using the multi-speed capability, you can monitor the present frequency with
monitor function D001 during each segment of a multi-speed operation.
NOTE: When using the Multi-speed Select settings CF1 to CF4, do not display parameter F001 or change the value of F001 while the inverter is in Run Mode (motor running).
If it is necessary to check the value of F001 during Run Mode, please monitor D001
instead of F001.
There are two ways to program the speeds into the registers A020 to A035:
1. Standard keypad programming:
a. Select each parameter A020 to A035.

Operations
and Monitoring

b. Press the

FUNC.

c. Use the

d. Use the

STR

key to view the parameter value.

and

keys to edit the value.

key to save the data to memory.

2. Programming using the CF switches. Set the speed by following these steps:
a. Turn the Run command OFF (Stop Mode).
b. Turn inputs ON to select desired Multi-speed. Display the value of F001 on the
digital operator.
c. Set the desired output frequency by pressing the

and

keys.

d. Press the STR key once to store the set frequency. When this occurs, F001
indicates the output frequency of Multi-speed n.
e. Press the FUNC. key once to confirm that the indication is the same as the set
frequency.
f. Repeat operations in 2. a) to 2. e) to set the frequency of other Multi-speeds. It
can be set also by parameters A020 to A035 in the first procedure 1. a) to 1. d).

L2002 Inverter

4–15

Jogging Command
The Jog input [JG] is used to command the
motor to rotate slowly in small increments for
manual operation. The speed is limited to
10 Hz. The frequency for the jogging operation is set by parameter A038. Jogging does
not use an acceleration ramp, so we recommend setting the jogging frequency A038 to
5 Hz or less to prevent tripping.

1
0
[FW], 1
[RV] 0
[JG]

Jog
speed
A038

When the terminal [JG] is turned ON and the
Run command is issued, the inverter outputs
the programmed jog frequency to the motor.
To enable the Run key on the digital operator
for jog input, set the value 01(terminal mode)
in A002 (Run command source).

A039
Jog decel type

The type of deceleration used to end a motor jog operation is selectable by programming
function A039. The options are:
• 00 Free-run stop (coasting)
• 01 Deceleration (normal level) and stop
• 02 Use DC braking and stop
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

Function Name
Jogging

Input
State

Description

Inverter is in Run Mode, output to motor runs at
jog parameter frequency

OFF

Inverter is in Stop Mode

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005

Required settings:

A002= 01, A038 > B082,
A038 > 0, A039

Notes:
• No jogging operation is performed when the set

Example (requires input configuration—see
page 3–47):
JG

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS

value of jogging frequency A038 is smaller than the
start frequency B082, or the value is 0 Hz.
• Be sure to stop the motor when switching the
function [JG] ON or OFF.
See I/O specs on page 4–6.

Operations
and Monitoring

Valid for inputs:

4–16

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

External Signal for DC Braking
When the terminal [DB] is turned ON, the
DC braking feature is enabled. Set the following parameters when the external DC braking
terminal [DB] is to be used:
• A053 – DC braking delay time setting. The
range is 0.1 to 5.0 seconds.

Scenario 1
[FW, RV]
[DB]

1
0
1
0

Output
frequency

• A054 – DC braking force setting. The
range is 0 to 100%.

The scenarios to the right help show how DC
braking works in various situations.

Scenario 2

1. Scenario 1 – The [FW] or [RV] terminal is Run command
ON. When [DB] is ON, DC braking is
from operator
applied. When [DB] is OFF again, the
[DB]
output frequency ramps to the prior level.
2. Scenario 2 – The Run command is applied
from the operator keypad. When the [DB]
terminal is ON, DC braking is applied.
When the [DB] terminal is OFF again, the
inverter output remains OFF.

Operations
and Monitoring

3. Scenario 3 – The Run command is applied
from the operator keypad. When the [DB]
terminal is ON, DC braking is applied
after the delay time set by A053 expires.
The motor is in a free-running (coasting)
condition. When the [DB] terminal is OFF
again, the inverter output remains OFF.

1
0
1
0

Output
frequency
t
Scenario 3
Run command 1
(from operator) 0

1
0

[DB]

delay

Output
frequency

A053
t

Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

Function Name

Input
State

Description

External DC Braking

applies DC injection braking during deceleration

OFF

does not apply DC injection braking during
deceleration

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005

Required settings:

A053, A054

Notes:
• Do not use the [DB] input continuously or for a
long time when the DC braking force setting A054
is high (depends on the motor application).
• Do not use the [DB] feature for continuous or high
duty cycle as a holding brake. The [DB] input is
designed to improve stopping performance. Use a
mechanical brake for holding a stop position.

Example (requires input configuration—see
page 3–47):
DB

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS

See I/O specs on page 4–6.

L2002 Inverter

4–17

Set Second Motor and Special-Set Second Motor
If you assign the [SET] or [S-ST] function to an intelligent input terminal, you can select
between two sets of motor parameters. The second parameters store an alternate set of
motor characteristics. Two type of inputs are available:
• Set Second Motor - The inverter can select a different motor only in Stop Mode.
• Special-Set Second Motor - The inverter can select a different motor in either Stop
Mode or Run Mode. The following parameter pairs can be alternately selected during
Run Mode: A020/A220, F002/F202, F003/F203, A042/A242, A043/A243, A061/
A261, A062/A262, A092/A292, A093/A293, A094/A294, A095/A295, A096/A296
When the terminal [SET] or [S-ST] is turned ON, the inverter will use the second set of
parameters to generate the frequency output to the motor. When changing the state of the
[SET] input terminal, the change will not take effect until the inverter is stopped.
When you turn ON the [SET] or [S-ST] input, the inverter operates per the second set of
parameters. When the terminal is turned OFF, the output function returns to the original
settings (first set of motor parameters). Refer to “Configuring the Inverter for Multiple
Motors” on page 4–58 for details.
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

SET

S-ST

Function Name
Set (select) 2nd
Motor Data

Special-Set (select)
2nd Motor Data

Input
State

Description
causes the inverter to use the 2nd set of motor
parameters for generating the frequency output
to motor. The selection of 1st or 2nd motor is
available only in Stop Mode.

OFF

causes the inverter to use the 1st (main) set of
motor parameters for generating the frequency
output to motor

causes the inverter to use the 2nd set of motor
parameters for generating the frequency output
to motor. The selection of 1st or 2nd motor is
available in Stop Mode or Run Mode.

OFF

causes the inverter to use the 1st (main) set of
motor parameters for generating the frequency
output to motor

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005

Required settings:

(none)

Notes:
• If the terminal state for [SET] is changed while the
inverter is running, the inverter continues using the
current set of parameters until the inverter is
stopped.
• You cannot configure the inverter to use [SET] and
[S-ST] terminals at the same time.

Example (requires input configuration—see
page 3–47):
SET
(or S-ST)

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS

See I/O specs on page 4–6.

Operations
and Monitoring

4–18

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

Two-stage Acceleration and Deceleration
When terminal [2CH] is turned ON, the
Output
inverter changes the rate of acceleration and frequency
deceleration from the initial settings (F002
second
and F003) to use the second set of accelerainitial
tion/deceleration values. When the terminal is
turned OFF, the inverter is returned to the
1
[2CH]
original acceleration and deceleration time
0
(F002 acceleration time 1, and F003 decelera- [FW], 1
[RV] 0
tion time 1). Use A092 (acceleration time 2)
and A0093 (deceleration time 2) to set the
second stage acceleration and deceleration
times.

target
frequency

In the graph shown above, the [2CH] becomes active during the initial acceleration. This
causes the inverter to switch from using acceleration 1 (F002) to acceleration 2 (A092).
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

2CH

Function Name
Two-stage Acceleration and Deceleration

Input
State
ON

Frequency output uses 2nd-stage acceleration
and deceleration values

OFF

Frequency output uses the initial acceleration 1
and deceleration 1 values

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005

Required settings:

A092, A093, A094=00

Notes:
• Function A094 selects the method for second stage

Operations
and Monitoring

Description

acceleration. It must be set = 00 to select the input
terminal method in order for the [2CH] terminal
assignment to operate.

Example (default input configuration
shown—see page 3–47):
2CH

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS
–FU models

See I/O specs on page 4–6.

L2002 Inverter

4–19

Free-run Stop
When the terminal [FRS] is turned ON, the inverter stops the output and the motor enters
the free-run state (coasting). If terminal [FRS] is turned OFF, the output resumes sending
power to the motor if the Run command is still active. The free-run stop feature works
with other parameters to provide flexibility in stopping and starting motor rotation.
In the figure below, parameter B088 selects whether the inverter resumes operation from
0 Hz (left graph) or the current motor rotation speed (right graph) when the [FRS]
terminal turns OFF. The application determines the best setting.
Parameter B003 specifies a delay time before resuming operation from a free-run stop.
To disable this feature, use a zero delay time.
Resume from motor speed B088 = 01

B088 = 00
Zero-frequency start

B003 wait time

Motor
speed

1
0
[FW], 1
[RV] 0
FRS

Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

FRS

Function Name
Free-run Stop

Input
State

1
FRS 0
[FW], 1
[RV] 0

Description

Causes output to turn OFF, allowing motor to
free run (coast) to stop

OFF

Output operates normally, so controlled deceleration stops motor

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005

Required settings:

B003, B088, C011 to C015

Notes:
• When you want the [FRS] terminal to be active low

Example (requires input configuration—
see page 3–47):
FRS

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS

(normally closed logic), change the setting (C011
to C015) that corresponds to the input (C001 to
C005) that is assigned the [FRS] function.
See I/O specs on page 4–6.

Operations
and Monitoring

Valid for inputs:

4–20

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

External Trip
When the terminal [EXT] is turned ON, the inverter enters the trip state, indicates error
code E12, and stops the output. This is a general purpose interrupt type feature, and the
meaning of the error depends on what you connect to the [EXT] terminal. Even if the
[EXT] input is turned OFF, the inverter remains in the trip state. You must reset the
inverter or cycle power to clear the error, returning the inverter to the Stop Mode.
In the graph below, the [EXT] input turns ON during normal Run Mode operation. The
inverter lets the motor free-run to a stop, and the alarm output turns ON immediately.
When the operator initiates a Reset command, the alarm and error are cleared. When the
Reset is turned OFF, the motor begins rotation since the Run command is already active.
[EXT] terminal
Motor revolution speed
[RS] terminal
Alarm output terminal
RUN command [FW, RV]

1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0

free run

Operations
and Monitoring

Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

EXT

Function Name
External Trip

Input
State

Description

When assigned input transitions OFF to ON,
inverter latches trip event and displays E12

OFF

No trip event for ON to OFF, any recorded trip
events remain in history until Reset

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005

Required settings:

(none)

EXT

Notes:
• If the USP (Unattended Start Protection) feature is

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS

Example (requires input configuration—
see page 3–47):

in use, the inverter will not automatically restart
after cancelling the EXT trip event. In that case, it
must receive either another Run command (OFF-toON transition), a keypad Reset command, or an
[RS] intelligent terminal input signal.
See I/O specs on page 4–6.

L2002 Inverter

4–21

Unattended Start Protection
If the Run command is already set when power is turned ON, the inverter starts running
immediately after powerup. The Unattended Start Protection (USP) function prevents
that automatic startup, so that the inverter will not run without outside intervention.
When USP is active and you need to reset an alarm and resume running, either turn the
Run command OFF, or perform a reset operation by the terminal [RS] input or the
keypad Stop/reset key.
In the figure below, the [UPS] feature is enabled. When the inverter power turns ON, the
motor does not start, even though the Run command is already active. Instead, it enters
the USP trip state, and displays E13 error code. This requires outside intervention to
reset the alarm by turning OFF the Run command per this example (or applying a reset).
Then the Run command can turn ON again and start the inverter output.
1
RUN command [FW, RV] 0
1
[USP] terminal 0
1
Alarm output terminal 0
1
Inverter output frequency 0
1
Inverter power supply 0
Events: Alarm E13
display
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

USP

Function Name
Unattended Start
Protection

Input
State

Alarm
cleared

Run
command

Description
On powerup, the inverter will not resume a Run
command (mostly used in the US)

OFF

On powerup, the inverter will resume a Run
command that was active before power loss

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005

Required settings:

(none)

Notes:
• Note that when a USP error occurs and it is
canceled by a reset from a [RS] terminal input, the
inverter restarts running immediately.
• Even when the trip state is canceled by turning the
terminal [RS] ON and OFF after an under voltage
protection E09 occurs, the USP function will be
performed.
• When the running command is active immediately
after the power is turned ON, a USP error will
occur. When this function is used, wait for at least
three (3) seconds after the powerup to generate a
Run command.

Example (default input configuration shown for
–FU models; –FE and –FR models require input
configuration—see page 3–47):

USP

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS

See I/O specs on page 4–6.

Operations
and Monitoring

4–22

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

Software Lock
When the terminal [SFT] is turned ON, the data of all the parameters and functions
(except the output frequency, depending on the setting of B031) is locked (prohibited
from editing). When the data is locked, the keypad keys cannot edit inverter parameters.
To edit parameters again, turn OFF the [SFT] terminal input.
Use parameter B031 to select whether the output frequency is excluded from the lock
state or is locked as well.
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

SFT

Function Name
Software Lock

Input
State

Description

The keypad and remote programming devices
are prevented from changing parameters

OFF

The parameters may be edited and stored

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005

Required settings:

B031 (excluded from lock)

Notes:
• When the [SFT] terminal is turned ON, only the

Example (requires input configuration—see
page 3–47):
SFT

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS

output frequency can be changed.

• Software lock can include the output frequency by

Operations
and Monitoring

setting B031.
• Software lock by the operator is also possible
without the [SFT] terminal being used (B031).

See I/O specs on page 4–6.

L2002 Inverter

4–23

Analog Input Current/Voltage Select
The [AT] terminal selects whether the inverter uses the voltage [O] or current [OI] input
terminals for external frequency control. When intelligent input [AT] is ON, you can set
the output frequency by applying a current input signal at [OI]-[L]. When the [AT] input
is OFF, you can apply a voltage input signal at [O]-[L] to set the output frequency. Note
that you must also set parameter A001 = 01 to enable the analog terminal set for controlling the inverter frequency.
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

Function Name
Analog Input
Voltage/current
Select

Input
State

Description

Terminal OI is enabled for current input (uses
terminal L for power supply return)

OFF

Terminal O is enabled for voltage input (uses
terminal L for power supply return)

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005

Required settings:

A001 = 01

Notes:
• If the [AT] option is not assigned to any intelligent
input terminal, then inverter uses the algebraic sum
of both the voltage and current inputs for the
frequency command (and A001=01).
• When using either the analog current and voltage
input terminal, make sure that the [AT] function is
allocated to an intelligent input terminal.
• Be sure to set the frequency source setting
A001=01 to select the analog input terminals.

Example (default input configuration shown
for –FU models; –FE models require input
configuration—see page 3–47):

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS

AM H O OI L

+–

0-10 V, AT=OFF

See I/O specs on page 4–6.

Operations
and Monitoring

4-20 mA, AT=ON

4–24

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

Reset Inverter
The [RS] terminal causes the inverter to
execute the reset operation. If the inverter is
in Trip Mode, the reset cancels the Trip state. [RS]
When the signal [RS] is turned ON and OFF,
the inverter executes the reset operation. The Alarm
minimum pulse width for [RS] must be 12 ms signal
or greater. The alarm output will be cleared
within 30 ms after the onset of the Reset command.

12 ms
minimum

1
0

approx. 30 ms
1
0

WARNING: After the Reset command is given and the alarm reset occurs, the motor
will restart suddenly if the Run command is already active. Be sure to set the alarm reset
after verifying that the Run command is OFF to prevent injury to personnel.
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

Function Name
Reset Inverter

Input
State
ON

The motor output is turned OFF, the Trip Mode
is cleared (if it exists), and powerup reset is
applied

OFF

Normal power-ON operation

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005

Required settings:

(none)

Notes:
• When the control terminal [RS] input is already ON

Operations
and Monitoring

Description

at powerup for more than 4 seconds, the remote
operator display is “R-ERROR COMM<2>” (the
display of the digital operator is – – –. However,
the inverter has no error. To clear the digital
operator error, turn OFF the terminal [RS] input
and press one of the operator keys.

Example (default input configurations
shown—see page 3–47):
RS

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS
–FE
models

See I/O specs on page 4–6.

• Pressing the Stop/Reset key of the digital operator can generate a reset operation only when an alarm
•
•
•
•
•

occurs.
A terminal configured with the [RS] function can only be configured for normally open operation. The
terminal cannot be used in the normally closed contact state.
When input power is turned ON, the inverter performs the same reset operation as it does when a pulse
on the [RS] terminal occurs.
The Stop/Reset key on the inverter is only operational for a few seconds after inverter powerup when a
hand-held remote operator is connected to the inverter.
If the [RS] terminal is turned ON while the motor is running, the motor will be free running (coasting).
If you are using the output terminal OFF delay feature (any of C145, C147, C149 > 0.0 sec.), the [RS]
terminal affects the ON-to-OFF transition slightly. Normally (without using OFF delays), the [RS]
input causes the motor output and the logic outputs to turn OFF together, immediately. However, when
any output uses an OFF delay, then after the [RS] input turns ON, that output will remain ON for an
additional 1 sec. period (approximate) before turning OFF.

L2002 Inverter

4–25

Thermistor Thermal Protection
Motors that are equipped with a PTC thermistor can be protected from overheating.
Input terminal [5] has the unique ability to sense a thermistor resistance. When the resistance value of the thermistor connected to terminal [PTC] at [5] and [L] is more than
3 k Ω ±10%, the inverter enters the Trip Mode, turns OFF the output to the motor, and
indicates the trip status E35. Use this function to protect the motor from overheating
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

PTC

Function Name
Thermistor Thermal
Protection

Input
State

Sensor When a thermistor is connected to terminals [5]
and [L], the inverter checks for over-temperature
and will cause trip (E35) and turn OFF the
output to the motor
Open

Valid for inputs:

C005 only

Required settings:

C085

Description

Notes:
• Be sure the thermistor is connected to terminals [5]
and [L]. If the resistance is above the threshold the
inverter will trip. When the motor cools down
enough, the thermistor resistance will change
enough to permit you to clear the error. Press the
STOP/Reset key to clear the error.

An open circuit in the thermistor causes a trip,
and the inverter turns OFF the output
Example (requires input configuration—
see page 3–47):
PTC

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS

thermistor

MOTOR

Operations
and Monitoring

4–26

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

Three-wire Interface Operation
The 3-wire interface is an industry standard motor control interface. This function uses
two inputs for momentary contact start/stop control, and a third for selecting forward or
reverse direction. To implement the 3-wire interface, assign 20 [STA] (Start), 21 [STP]
(Stop), and 22 [F/R] (Forward/Reverse) to three of the intelligent input terminals. Use a
momentary contact for Start and Stop. Use a selector switch, such as SPST for the
Forward/Reverse input. Be sure to set the operation command selection A002=01 for
input terminal control of motor.
If you have a motor control interface that needs logic-level control (rather than momentary pulse control), use the [FW] and [RV] inputs instead.
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

STA

STP

F/R

Function Name
Start Motor

Stop Motor

Forward/Reverse

Input
State
ON

Start motor rotation on momentary contact (uses
acceleration profile)

OFF

No change to motor operation

OFF

Stop motor rotation on momentary contact (uses
deceleration profile)

Select reverse direction of rotation

OFF

Select forward direction of rotation

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005

Required settings:

A002 = 01

Notes:
• The STP logic is inverted. Normally the switch will

Operations
and Monitoring

Description

be closed, so you open the switch to stop. In this
way, a broken wire causes the motor to stop
automatically (safe design).
• When you configure the inverter for 3-wire interface control, the dedicated [FW] terminal is
automatically disabled. The [RV] intelligent
terminal assignment is also disabled.

Example (requires input configuration—
see page 3–47):
STP
F/R

STA

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS

See I/O specs on page 4–6.

L2002 Inverter

4–27

The diagram below shows the use of 3-wire control. STA (Start Motor) is an edge-sensitive input; an OFF-to-ON transition gives the Start command. The control of direction is
level-sensitive, and the direction may be changed at any time. STP (Stop Motor) is also a
level-sensitive input.

[STA] terminal
[STP terminal]
[F/R] terminal
Motor revolution speed

1
0
1
0
1
0

Operations
and Monitoring

4–28

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

PID ON/OFF and PID Clear
The PID loop function is useful for controlling motor speed to achieve constant flow,
pressure, temperature, etc. in many process applications. The PID Disable function
temporarily suspends PID loop execution via an intelligent input terminal. It overrides
the parameter A071 (PID Enable) to stop PID execution and return to normal motor
frequency output characteristics. the use of PID Disable on an intelligent input terminal
is optional. Of course, any use of the PID loop control requires setting PID Enable
function A071=01.
The PID Clear function forces the PID loop integrator sum = 0. So, when you turn ON
an intelligent input configured as [PIDC], the integrator sum is reset to zero. This is
useful when switching from manual control to PID loop control and the motor is
stopped.
CAUTION: Be careful not to turn PID Clear ON and reset the integrator sum when the
inverter is in Run Mode (output to motor is ON). Otherwise, this could cause the motor
to decelerate rapidly, resulting in a trip.
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

PID

Operations
and Monitoring

PIDC

Function Name
PID Disable

PID Clear

Input
State

Description

Disables PID loop execution

OFF

Allows PID loop execution if A71=01

Force the value of the integrator to zero

OFF

No change to PID loop execution

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005

Required settings:

A071

Notes:
• The use of [PID] and [PIDC] terminals are
optional. Use A071=01 if you want PID loop
control enabled all the time.
• Do not enable/disable PID control while the motor
is running (inverter is in Run Mode).
• Do not turn ON the [PIDC] input while the motor is
running (inverter is in Run Mode).

Example (requires input configuration—see
page 3–47):
PIDC

PID

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS

See I/O specs on page 4–6.

L2002 Inverter

4–29

Remote Control Up and Down Functions
The [UP] [DWN] terminal functions can adjust the output frequency for remote control
while the motor is running. The acceleration time and deceleration time of this function
is same as normal operation ACC1 and DEC1 (2ACC1,2DEC1). The input terminals
operate according to these principles:
• Acceleration - When the [UP] contact is turned ON, the output frequency accelerates
from the current value. When it is turned OFF, the output frequency maintains its
current value at that moment.
• Deceleration - When the [DWN] contact is turned ON, the output frequency decelerates from the current value. When it is turned OFF, the output frequency maintains its
current value at that moment.
In the graph below, the [UP] and [DWN] terminals activate while the Run command
remains ON. The output frequency responds to the [UP] and [DWN] commands.
Output
frequency
1
0
1
[DWN] 0
1
[FW], [RV]
0
[UP]

Operations
and Monitoring

4–30

Using Intelligent Input Terminals
It is possible for the inverter to retain the frequency set from the [UP] and [DWN] terminals through a power loss. Parameter C101 enables/disables the memory. If disabled, the
inverter retains the last frequency before an UP/DWN adjustment. Use the [UDC]
terminal to clear the memory and return to the original set output frequency.

Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

DWN

UDC

Function Name
Remote Control
UP Function (motorized speed pot.)
Remote Control
DOWN Function
(motorized speed
pot.)
Remote Control Data
Clear

Input
State

Description

Accelerates (increases output frequency) motor
from current frequency

OFF

Output to motor operates normally

Decelerates (decreases output frequency) motor
from current frequency

OFF

Output to motor operates normally

Clears the Up/down frequency memory

OFF

No effect on Up/down memory

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005

Required settings:

A001 = 02

Notes:
• This feature is available only when the frequency
command source is programmed for operator
control. Confirm A001 is set to 02.
• This function is not available when [JG] is in use.
• The range of output frequency is 0 Hz to the value
in A004 (maximum frequency setting).

Example (requires input configuration—
see page 3–47):
DWN UP

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS

See I/O specs on page 4–6.

Operations
and Monitoring

• The minimum ON time of [UP] and [DWN] is 50 ms.
• This setting modifies the inverter speed from using F001 output frequency setting as a starting point.

L2002 Inverter

4–31

Force Operation from Digital Operator
This function permits a digital operator interface to override the following two settings
in the inverter:
• A001 - Frequency source setting
• A002 - Run command source setting
When using the [OPE] terminal input, typically A001 and A002 are configured for
sources other than the digital operator interface for the output frequency and Run
command sources, respectively. When the [OPE] input is ON, then user has immediate
command of the inverter, to start or stop the motor and to set the speed.
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

OPE

Function Name
Force Operation
from Digital
Operator

Input
State

Description

Forces the operator interface to override:
A001 - Frequency Source Setting, and
A002 - Run Command Source Setting

OFF

Parameters A001 and A002 are in effect again,
for the frequency source and the Run command
source, respectively

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005

Required settings:

A001 (set not equal to 00)
A002 (set not equal to 02)

Notes:
• When changing the [OPE] state during Run Mode

OPE

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS

See I/O specs on page 4–6.

Operations
and Monitoring

(inverter is driving the motor), the inverter will stop
the motor before the new [OPE] state takes effect.
• If the [OPE] input turns ON and the digital operator
gives a Run command while the inverter is already
running, the inverter stops the motor. Then the
digital operator can control the motor.

Example (requires input configuration—see
page 3–47):

4–32

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

ADD Frequency Enable
The inverter can add or subtract an offset value to the output frequency setting which is
specified by A001 (will work with any of the five possible sources). The ADD
Frequency is a value you can store in parameter A145. The ADD Frequency is summed
with or subtracted from the output frequency setting only when the [ADD] terminal is
ON. Function A146 selects whether to add or subtract. By configuring an intelligent
input as the [ADD] terminal, your application can selectively apply the fixed value in
A145 to offset (positively or negatively) the inverter output frequency in real time.
Keypad potentiometer

A001 Frequency source setting

Control terminal
+

Function F001 setting
Network variable F001

∑

Output frequency setting
+/–

Calculate function output

A146 ADD direction select

A145 ADD frequency

Operations
and Monitoring

Intelligent input

Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

ADD

[ADD]

Function Name
ADD Frequency
Enable

Input
State

Description

Applies the A145 Add Frequency value to the
output frequency.

OFF

Does not apply the Add Frequency. The output
frequency retains its normal value.

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005

Required settings:

A001, A145, A146

Notes:
• A001 may specify any source; the Add Frequency

Example (requires input configuration—see
page 3–47):
ADD

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS

will be added to or subtracted from that value to
yield the output frequency value.

See I/O specs on page 4–6.

L2002 Inverter

4–33

Force Terminal Mode
The purpose of this intelligent input is to allow a device to force the inverter to allow
control of the following two parameters via the control terminals:
• A001 - Frequency source setting (01 = control terminals [FW] and [RV])
• A002 - Run command source setting (01 = control terminals [O] or [OI])
Some applications will require one or both settings above to use a source other than the
terminals. You may prefer to normally use the inverter’s keypad and potentiometer, or to
use the ModBus network for control, for example. However, an external device can turn
ON the [F-TM] input to force the inverter to (temporarily) allow control (frequency
source and Run command) via control terminals. When the [F-TM] input is OFF, then
the inverter uses the regular sources specified by A001 and A002 again.
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

F-TM

Function Name
Force Terminal
Mode

Input
State

Description

Forces A001=01 (frequency source setting =
control terminal), and
A002=01(Run command source setting = control
terminal)

OFF

Inverter applies the user setting for A001 and
A002 normally

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005

Required settings:

A001, A002

Notes:
• When changing the [F-TM] state during Run Mode

Example (requires input configuration—see
page 3–47):
F-TM

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS

(inverter is driving the motor), the inverter will stop
the motor before the new [F-TM] state takes effect.

Operations
and Monitoring

See I/O specs on page 4–6.

4–34

Using Intelligent Input Terminals

Quick Start Enable
When the [RDY] input is ON, the inverter is always in Run Mode, even when the motor
rotation has stopped. The pupose of the quick start feature is to improve (decrease) the
startup time of the motor in response to a Run Command.
CAUTION: While the [RDY] input is ON, voltage will be present on the output of the
inverter, even when the motor is still. In this case:
• Do not touch the motor output terminals. Otherwise, there is the danger of electric
shock.
• Do not short the motor leads together or to ground. Otherwise, you may damage the
inverter output circuit
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

RDY

Function Name
Quick Start Enable

Input
State
ON

Inverter output is always ON (even when motor
rotation has stopped) to improve motor startup
time.

OFF

Inverter output turns OFF normally in Stop
Mode.

Valid for inputs:

C001, C002, C003, C004,
C005

Required settings:

B151=00

Notes:
• When the [RDY] input is ON, the inverter output is

Operations
and Monitoring

Description

energized the Run LED is always ON.
• When the [RDY] input is ON, you may edit only
parameters that can be edited in Run Mode. To edit
any parameter, turn OFF the [RDY] input and the
Run Command to put the inverter in Stop Mode.
• Function B151 can also enable the Quick Start
function (B151=01). In that case, the [RDY] input
should not be used, because the inverter ignores it.

Example (requires input configuration—see
page 3–47):
RDY

L 5 4 3 2 1 PCS

See I/O specs on page 4–6.

4–35

L2002 Inverter

Using Intelligent Output Terminals
The intelligent output terminals are programmable in a similar way to the intelligent
input terminals. The inverter has several output functions that you can assign individually to three physical logic outputs. Two of the outputs are open-collector transistors, and
the third output is the alarm relay (form C – normally open and normally closed
contacts). The relay is assigned the alarm function by default, but you can assign it to
any of the functions that the open-collector outputs use.

Sinking Outputs,
Open Collector

L2002 Inverter
Open collector outputs

The open-collector transistor
outputs can handle up to
50mA each. We highly recommend that you use an external
power source as shown. It
must be capable of providing
at least 100mA to drive both
outputs at full load. To drive
loads that require more than
50mA, use external relay
circuits as shown to the right.

Logic output
common

CM2

–
+
Load
Load

If you need output current
greater than 50mA, use the
inverter output to drive a small
relay. Be sure to use a diode
across the coil of the relay as
shown (reverse-biased) in
order to suppress the turn-off
spike, or use a solid-state
relay.

L2002 Inverter
Open collector outputs

Logic output
common

CM2

–
+
Load
Load

Operations
and Monitoring

Sinking Outputs,
Open Collector with
External Relays

4–36

Using Intelligent Output Terminals

Internal Relay Output
The inverter has an internal relay output with
normally open and normally closed contacts (Type
1 form C). The output signal that controls the relay
is configurable; the Alarm Signal is the default
setting. Thus, the terminals are labeled [AL0],
[AL1], [AL2], as shown to the right. However, you
can assign any one of the nine intelligent outputs to
the relay. For wiring purposes, the general terminal
function are:

Inverter logic
circuit board

AL0 AL1 AL2

• [AL0] – Common contact
• [AL1] – Normally open contact
• [AL2] – Normally closed contact
The relay itself can be configured as “normally open or closed.” Parameter C036, Alarm
Relay Active State, is the setting. This setting determines whether or not the relay coil is
energized when its output signal is OFF:
• C036=00 – “Normally open” (relay coil is de-energized when output signal is OFF)

Operations
and Monitoring

• C036=01 – “Normally closed” (relay coil is energized when the output signal is OFF)
Since the relay already has normally open [AL1]
and normally closed [AL2] contacts, the purpose of
the ability to invert the relay coil’s active state may
not be obvious. It allows you to determine whether
or not an inverter power loss causes the relay to
change state. The default relay configuration is the
Alarm Signal (C026=05), as shown to the right.
And, C036=01 sets the relay to “normally closed”
(relay coil normally energized). The reason for this
is that a typical system design will require an
inverter power loss to assert an alarm signal to
external devices.
The relay can be used for other intelligent output
signals, such as the Run Signal (set C026=00). For
these remaining output signal types, the relay coil
typically must NOT change state upon inverter
power loss (set C036=00). The figure to the right
shows the relay settings for the Run Signal output.
If you assign the relay an output signal other than
the Alarm Signal, the inverter can still have an
Alarm Signal output. In this case, you can assign it
to either terminal [11] or [12], providing an open
collector output.

Inverter logic
circuit board

C026=05
C036=01

AL0 AL1 AL2
Relay shown with inverter
power ON, Alarm Signal OFF

Inverter logic
circuit board

RUN

C026=00
C036=00

AL0 AL1 AL2
Relay shown with inverter
power ON, Run Signal OFF

4–37

L2002 Inverter

Output Signal ON/OFF Delay Function
Intelligent outputs including terminals [11], [12], and the output relay, have configurable
signal transition delays. Each output can delay either the OFF-to-ON or ON-to-OFF
transitions, or both. Signal transition delays are variable from 0.1 to 100.0 seconds. This
feature is useful in applications that must tailor inverter output signals to meet timing
requirements of certain external devices.
The timing diagram below shows a sample output signal (top line) and the results of
various ON/OFF delay configurations.
• Original signal - This example signal waveform consists of three separate pulses
named “A,” “B,” and “C.”
• ...with ON delay - Pulse A is delayed by the duration of the ON delay time. Pulses B
and C do not appear at the output, because they are shorter than the ON delay.
• ...with OFF delay - Pulse A is lengthened by the amount of the OFF delay time. The
separation between pulses B and C does not appear at the output, because it is shorter
than the OFF delay time.
• ...with ON/OFF delays - Pulse A is delayed on both leading and trailing edges by the
amounts of the ON and OFF delay times, respectively. Pulses B and C do not appear at
the output, because they are shorter than the ON delay time.
ON
delay
Output Signals:

ON
delays

OFF
delays

To configure ON and OFF delays, use the following table to set the desired delay times.
Func.

Description

Range

Default

C144

Terminal [11] ON delay

0.0 to 100.0 sec.

0.0

C145

Terminal [11] OFF delay

0.0 to 100.0 sec.

0.0

C146

Terminal [12] ON delay

0.0 to 100.0 sec.

0.0

C147

Terminal [12] OFF delay

0.0 to 100.0 sec.

0.0

C148

Output relay ON delay

0.0 to 100.0 sec.

0.0

C149

Output relay OFF delay

0.0 to 100.0 sec.

0.0

Use of the ON/OFF signal delay functions are optional. Note that any of the
intelligent output assignments in this section can be combined with ON/OFF signal
timing delay configurations.

Operations
and Monitoring

1
original (no delays) 0
1
...with ON delay
0
1
...with OFF delay
0
1
...with ON/OFF delays
0

OFF
delay

4–38

Using Intelligent Output Terminals

Run Signal
When the [RUN] signal is selected as an
intelligent output terminal, the inverter
outputs a signal on that terminal when it is in
Run Mode. The output logic is active low, and
is the open collector type (switch to ground).

[FW], 1
[RV] 0
B082
Output
freq.

start freq.

Run 1
Signal 0

ON
t

Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

RUN

Function Name
Run Signal

Valid for outputs:

11, 12, AL0 – AL2

Required settings:

(none)

Output
State

Description

when inverter is in Run Mode

OFF

when inverter is in Stop Mode

Notes:
• The inverter outputs the [RUN] signal whenever the

Example for terminals [11] and [12] (default
output configuration shown—see page 3–54):

inverter output exceeds the start frequency specified
by parameter B082. The start frequency is the initial
inverter output frequency when it turns ON.
• The example circuit for terminal [12] drives a relay
coil. Note the use of a diode to prevent the negativegoing turn-off spike generated by the coil from
damaging the inverter’s output transistor.

Operations
and Monitoring

RUN

Inverter output
terminal circuit

CM2 12 11
+
–

Example for terminals [AL0], [AL1], [AL2]
(requires output configuration—
see pages 4–36 and 3–54):
RUN

Inverter logic
circuit board

AL0 AL1 AL2

See I/O specs
on page 4–6.

Power
supply

Load

L2002 Inverter

4–39

Frequency Arrival Signals
The Frequency Arrival group of outputs help coordinate external systems with the
current velocity profile of the inverter. As the name implies, output [FA1] turns ON
when the output frequency arrives at the standard set frequency (parameter F001).
Output [FA2] relies on programmable accel/ decel thresholds for increased flexibility.
For example, you can have an output turn ON at one frequency during acceleration, and
have it turn OFF at a different frequency during deceleration. All transitions have hysteresis to avoid output chatter if the output frequency is near one of the thresholds.
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

FA1

FA2

Function Name
Frequency Arrival
Type 1 – Constant
Speed
Frequency Arrival
Type 2 – Overfrequency

Valid for outputs:

11, 12, AL0 – AL2

Required settings:

(none)

Output
State
ON

when output to motor is at the set frequency

OFF

when output to motor is OFF, or in any acceleration or deceleration ramp

when output to motor is at or above the FA2
threshold (C042) during accel

OFF

when output to motor is below the FA2 threshold
(C043) during decel

Notes:
• For most applications you will need to use only one

•
•

•

type of frequency arrival outputs (see examples).
However, it is possible assign both output terminals
to output functions [FA1] and [FA2].
For each frequency arrival threshold, the output
anticipates the threshold (turns ON early) by 1.5Hz.
The output turns OFF as the output frequency
moves away from the threshold, delayed by 0.5Hz.
The delay time of the output signal is 60 ms
(nominal).
The example circuit for terminal [12] drives a relay
coil. Note the use of a diode to prevent the negativegoing turn-off spike generated by the coil from
damaging the inverter’s output transistor.

Example (default output configuration
shown—see page 3–54):

Inverter output
terminal circuit

FA1

CM2 12 11
+
–

Example for terminals [AL0], [AL1], [AL2]
(requires output configuration—
see pages 4–36 and 3–54):
FA1

Inverter logic
circuit board

AL0 AL1 AL2

See I/O specs
on page 4–6.

Power
supply

Load

Operations
and Monitoring

•

Description

4–40

Using Intelligent Output Terminals

Operations
and Monitoring

Frequency arrival output [FA1] uses the
Output
standard output frequency (parameter
freq.
F001) as the threshold for switching. In
the figure to the right, Frequency Arrival
[FA1] turns ON when the output
frequency gets within 0.5 Hz below or
1.5 Hz above the target constant
0
frequency. This provides hysteresis that
prevents output chatter near the threshold FA1
value.The hysteresis effect causes the
signal
output to turn ON slightly early as the
speed approaches the threshold. Then the
turn-OFF point is slightly delayed. The
timing is further modified by a small
60 ms delay. Note the active low nature of
the signal, due to the open collector output.
Frequency arrival output [FA2] works the
same way; it just uses two separate
thresholds as shown in the figure to the
right. These provide for separate acceleration and deceleration thresholds to
provide more flexibility than for [FA1].
[FA2] uses C042 during acceleration for
the ON threshold, and C0043 during
deceleration for the OFF threshold. This
signal also is active low and has a 60 ms
delay after the frequency thresholds are
crossed. Having different accel and decel
thresholds provides an asymmetrical
output function. However, you can use
equal ON and OFF thresholds, if desired.

0.5 Hz

F001

1.5 Hz

F001
1.5 Hz

0.5 Hz

t
ON

t
60 ms

60 ms

Output
freq.
Thresholds

C042 accel.
C043 decel.

0.5 Hz

1.5 Hz

0
t
FA2
signal

60 ms

L2002 Inverter

4–41

Overload Advance Notice Signal
When the output current exceeds a preset
value, the [OL] terminal signal turns ON.
The parameter C041 sets the overload
threshold. The overload detection circuit
operates during powered motor operation and during regenerative braking. The
output circuits use open-collector
transistors, and are active low.

Current

threshold

C041

power running

C041

regeneration
threshold

[OL] 1
Signal 0

t
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

Function Name
Overload Advance
Notice Signal

Valid for outputs:

11, 12, AL0 – AL2

Required settings:

C041

Output
State

Description

when output current is more than the set threshold for the overload signal

OFF

when output current is less than the set threshold
for the overload signal

Notes:
• The default value is 100%. To change the level

Example (requires output configuration—
see page 3–54):
Inverter output
terminal circuit

from the default, set C041 (overload level).

• The accuracy of this function is the same as the

CM2 12 11
+
–

Example for terminals [AL0], [AL1], [AL2]
(requires output configuration—
see pages 4–36 and 3–54):
OL

Inverter logic
circuit board

AL0 AL1 AL2

See I/O specs
on page 4–6.

Power
supply

Load

Operations
and Monitoring

function of the output current monitor on the [FM]
terminal (see “Analog Output Operation” on
page 4–55).
• The example circuit for terminal [12] drives a relay
coil. Note the use of a diode to prevent the negativegoing turn-off spike generated by the coil from
damaging the inverter’s output transistor.

4–42

Using Intelligent Output Terminals

Output Deviation for PID Control
The PID loop error is defined as the
magnitude (absolute value) of the difference between the Setpoint (target value)
and the Process Variable (actual value).
When the error magnitude exceeds the
preset value for C044, the [OD] terminal
signal turns ON. Refer to “PID Loop
Operation” on page 4–56.

SP, PV

Process variable
Setpoint

C044
C044

[OD] 1
Signal 0

t
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

Function Name
Output Deviation for
PID Control

Valid for outputs:

11, 12, AL0 – AL2

Required settings:

C044

Output
State

Description

when PID error is more than the set threshold for
the deviation signal

OFF

when PID error is less than the set threshold for
the deviation signal

Notes:
• The default difference value is set to 3%. To change

Example (requires output configuration—
see page 3–54):

this value, change parameter C044 (deviation
level).
• The example circuit for terminal [12] drives a relay
coil. Note the use of a diode to prevent the negativegoing turn-off spike generated by the coil from
damaging the inverter’s output transistor.

Operations
and Monitoring

Inverter output
terminal circuit

CM2 12 11
+
–

Example for terminals [AL0], [AL1], [AL2]
(requires output configuration—
see pages 4–36 and 3–54):
OD

Inverter logic
circuit board

AL0 AL1 AL2

See I/O specs
on page 4–6.

Power
supply

Load

4–43

L2002 Inverter

Alarm Signal
The inverter alarm signal is active when a fault has
occurred and it is in the Trip Mode (refer to the
diagram at right). When the fault is cleared the
alarm signal becomes inactive.

STOP
RESET

Run

Stop

RUN

STOP

RESET
We must make a distinction between the alarm
Fault
Trip
Fault
signal AL and the alarm relay contacts [AL0],
[AL1] and [AL2]. The signal AL is a logic
function, which you can assign to the open collecAlarm signal active
tor output terminals [11] or [12] or the relay
outputs. The most common (and default) use of the relay is for AL, thus the labeling of
its terminals. Use an open collector output (terminal [11] or [12]) for a low-current logic
signal interface or to energize a small relay (50 mA maximum). Use the relay output to
interface to higher voltage and current devices (10 mA minimum).

Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

Function Name
Alarm Signal

Valid for outputs:

11, 12, AL0 – AL2

Required settings:

C026, C036

Output
State
ON

when an alarm signal has occurred and has not
been cleared

OFF

when no alarm has occurred since the last
clearing of alarm(s)

Notes:
• By default, the relay is configured as normally
•

•

•
•

closed (C036=01). Refer to the next page for an
explanation.
In the default relay configuration, an inverter power
loss turns ON the alarm output. the alarm signal
remains ON as long as the external control circuit
has power.
When the relay output is set to normally closed, a
time delay of less than 2 seconds occurs after
powerup before the contact is closed.
Terminals [11] and [12] are open collector outputs,
so the electric specifications of [AL] are different
from the contact output terminals [AL0], [AL1],
[AL2].
This signal output has the delay time (300 ms
nominal) from the fault alarm output.
The relay contact specifications are in “Control
Logic Signal Specifications” on page 4–6. The
contact diagrams for different conditions are on the
next page.

Example for terminal [11] or [12] (requires
output configuration—see page 3–54):
Inverter output
terminal circuit

CM2 12 11
+
–

Example for terminals [AL0], [AL1], [AL2]
(default output configuration shown—
see page 3–54):
AL

Inverter logic
circuit board
Relay position
shown is for
normal operation (no alarm).

See I/O specs
on page 4–6.

AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply

Load

Operations
and Monitoring

•

Description

4–44

Using Intelligent Output Terminals
The alarm relay output can be configured in two main ways:
• Trip/Power Loss Alarm – The alarm relay is configured as normally closed
(C036=1) by default, shown below (left). An external alarm circuit that detects broken
wiring also as an alarm connects to [AL0] and [AL1]. After powerup and short delay
(< 2 seconds), the relay energizes and the alarm circuit is OFF. Then, either an inverter
trip event or an inverter power loss will de-energize the relay and open the alarm
circuit.
• Trip Alarm – Alternatively, you can configure the relay as normally open (C036=0),
shown below (right). An external alarm circuit that detects broken wiring also as an
alarm connects to [AL0] and [AL2]. After powerup, the relay energizes only when an
inverter trip event occurs, opening the alarm circuit. However, in this configuration, an
inverter power loss does not open the alarm circuit.
Be sure to use the relay configuration that is appropriate for your system design. Note
that the external circuits shown assume that a closed circuit = no alarm condition (so that
a broken wire also causes an alarm). However, some systems may require a closed
circuit = alarm condition. In that case, then use the opposite terminal [AL1] or [AL2]
from the ones shown.
N.C. contacts (C036=01)

During normal operation

Operations
and Monitoring

AL0 AL1 AL2

Power
supply

When an alarm occurs
or when power is OFF

AL0 AL1 AL2

Alarm
device

Power

N.O. contact (C036=00)

Power
supply

Alarm
device

During normal operation
or when power is OFF

AL0 AL1 AL2

Power
supply

When an alarm occurs

AL0 AL1 AL2

Alarm
device

Power
supply

Alarm
device

AL0–
AL1

AL0–
AL2

Power

Run
Mode

AL0–
AL1

AL0–
AL2

Normal Closed

Open

Normal

Open

Closed

Run
Mode

Trip

Open

Closed

Trip

Closed

Open

OFF

—

Open

Closed

OFF

—

Open

Closed

L2002 Inverter

4–45

Analog Input Disconnect Detect
This feature is useful when the inverter receives a speed reference from an external
device. Upon input signal loss at either the [O] or [OI] terminal, the inverter normally
just decelerates the motor to a stop. However, the inverter can use the intelligent output
terminal [Dc] to signal other machinery that a signal loss has occurred.
Voltage signal loss at [O] terminal - Parameter B082 is the Start Frequency Adjustment. It sets the beginning (minimum) output frequency when the speed reference
source is greater than zero. If the analog input at terminal [O] is less than the Start
Frequency, the inverter turns ON the [Dc] output to indicate a signal loss condition.
Current signal loss at [OI] terminal - The [OI] terminal accepts a 4mA to 20mA
signal, with 4mA representing the beginning of the input range. If the input current falls
below 4mA, the inverter applies a threshold to detect signal loss.
Note that a signal loss is not an inverter trip event. When the analog input value is again
above the B082 value, the [Dc] output turns OFF. There is no error condition to clear.
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

Function Name

Output
State

Analog Input
Disconnect Detect

Valid for outputs:

11, 12, AL0 – AL2

Required settings:

A001=01, B082

Description

when the [O] input value < B082 Start
Frequency Adjustment (signal loss detected), or
when the [OI input current is less than 4mA

OFF

when no signal loss is detected

Notes:
• The [Dc] output can indicate an analog signal

Example (requires output configuration—
see page 3–54):
Dc

Inverter output
terminal circuit

disconnect when the inverter is in Stop Mode, as
well as Run Mode.
• The example circuit for terminal [12] drives a relay
coil. Note the use of a diode to prevent the negativegoing turn-off spike generated by the coil from
damaging the inverter’s output transistor.

CM2 12 11
RY

Example for terminals [AL0], [AL1], [AL2]
(requires output configuration—
see pages 4–36 and 3–54):
Dc

Inverter logic
circuit board

AL0 AL1 AL2

See I/O specs
on page 4–6.

Power
supply

Load

Operations
and Monitoring

+
–

4–46

Using Intelligent Output Terminals

PID Second Stage Output
The inverter has a built-in PID loop feature for two-stage control, useful for certain
applications such as building ventilation or heating and cooling (HVAC). In an ideal
control environment, a single PID loop controller (stage) would be adequate. However,
in certain conditions, the maximum output energy from the first stage is not enough to
maintain the Process Variable (PV) at or near the Setpoint (SP). And, the output of the
first stage is in saturation. A simple solution is to add a second stage, which puts an
additional and constant amount of energy into the system under control. When sized
properly, the boost from the second stage brings the PV toward the desired range,
allowing the first stage PID control to return to its linear range of operation.
The two-stage method of control has some advantages for particular applications.
• The second stage is only ON in adverse conditions, so there is an energy savings
during normal conditions.
• Since the second stage is simple ON/OFF control, it is less expensive to add than just
duplicating the first stage.
• At powerup, the boost provided by the second stage helps the process variable reach
the desired setpoint sooner than it would if the first stage acted alone.
• Even though the second stage is simple ON/OFF control, when it is an inverter you
can still adjust the output frequency to vary the boost it provides.
Refer to the example diagram below. Its two stages of control are defined as follows:
• Stage 1 - Inverter #1 operating in PID loop mode, with motor driving a fan
• Stage 2 - Inverter #2 operating as an ON/OFF controller, with motor driving a fan

Operations
and Monitoring

Stage #1 provides the ventilation needs in a building most of the time. On some days,
there is a change in the building’s air volume because large warehouse doors are open. In
that situation, Stage #1 alone cannot maintain the desired air flow (PV sags under SP).
Inverter #1 senses the low PV and its PID Second Stage Output at [FBV] terminal turns
ON. This gives a Run FWD command to Inverter #2 to provide the additional air flow.
Fan#1
Air flow
Fan#2

Stage #1

Stage #2

Inverter #1

Inverter#2

[U, V, W]

[O or [OI]]
[FBV]

PID Second
Stage Output

Process Variable

[FW]

Sensor

4–47

L2002 Inverter

To use the PID Second Stage Output feature, you will need to choose upper and lower
limits for the PV, via C053 and C052 respectively. As the timing diagram below shows,
these are the thresholds Stage #1 inverter uses to turn ON or OFF Stage #2 inverter via
the [FBV] output. The vertical axis units are percent (%) for the PID setpoint, and for the
upper and lower limits. The output frequency, in Hz, is superimposed onto the same
diagram.
When the system control begins, the following events occur (in sequence in the timing
diagram):
1. Stage #1 inverter turns ON via the [FW] Run command.
2. Stage #1 inverter turns ON the [FBV] output, because the PV is below the PV low
limit C053. So, Stage #2 is assisting in loop error correction from the beginning.
3. The PV rises and eventually exceeds the PV high limit C052. Stage #1 inverter then
turns OFF the [FBV] output to Stage #2, since the boost is no longer needed.
4. When the PV begins decreasing, only Stage #1 is operating, and it is in the linear
control range. This region is where a properly configured system will operate most
often.
5. The PV continues to decrease until it crosses under the PV low limit (apparent
external process disturbance). Stage #1 inverter turns ON the [FBV] output, and Stage
#2 inverter is assisting again.
6. After the PV rises above the PV low limit, the [FW] Run command to Stage #1
inverter turns OFF (as in a system shutdown).
7. Stage #1 inverter enters Stop Mode and automatically turns OFF the [FBV] output,
which causes Stage #2 inverter to also stop.
PID feedback (PV)
%/Hz

PID setpoint (SP)

Output frequency

PV high limit C052

Operations
and Monitoring

PV low limit

C053

Stage #1 [FW]
[FBV] to Stage #2 [FW]

1
0
1
0
t

Events:

1,2

The terminal [FBV] configuration table is on the following page.

4–48

Using Intelligent Output Terminals

Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

FBV

Function Name
Feedback Value
Check

Output
State

Description

• Transitions to ON when the inverter is in RUN
Mode and the PID Process Variable (PV) is
less than the Feedback Low Limit (C053)

OFF

• Transitions to OFF when the PID Feedback
Value (PV) exceeds the PID High Limit
(C052)
• Transitions to OFF when the inverter goes
from Run Mode to Stop Mode

Valid for outputs:

11, 12, AL0 – AL2

Required settings:

A076, C052, C053

Notes:
• The [FBV] is designed for implementing two-stage

Example (requires output configuration—
see page 3–54):
FBV

Inverter output
terminal circuit

control. The PV high limit and PV low limit parameters, C052 and C053, do not function as process
alarm thresholds. Terminal [FBV] does not provide
a PID alarm function.
• The example circuit for terminal [12] drives a relay
coil. Note the use of a diode to prevent the negativegoing turn-off spike generated by the coil from
damaging the inverter’s output transistor.

CM2 12 11
+
–

Example for terminals [AL0], [AL1], [AL2]
(requires output configuration—
see pages 4–36 and 3–54):
FBV

Operations
and Monitoring

Inverter logic
circuit board

AL0 AL1 AL2

See I/O specs
on page 4–6.

Power
supply

Load

L2002 Inverter

4–49

Network Detection Signal
The Network Detection Signal output indicates the general status of network communications. The inverter has a programmable watchdog timer to monitor network activity.
Parameter C077 sets the time-out period. If communications stop or pause longer than
the specified time-out period, the Ndc output turns ON.
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

NDc

Function Name
Network Detection
Signal

Valid for outputs:

11, 12, AL0 – AL2

Required settings:

C076, C077

Output
State

Description

when the communications watchdog timer
(period specified by C077) has timed out

OFF

when the communications watchdog timer is
satisfied by regular communications activity

Notes:
• To disable the communications watchdog timer, set

Example (requires output configuration—
see page 3–54):
NDc

Inverter output
terminal circuit

C077=00.00 sec.

CM2 12 11

• If you set Communications Error Select to
“Disable” (C076=02), you still have the option of
using the Network Detection Signal and setting the
watchdog time-out period with C077.

+
–

Example for terminals [AL0], [AL1], [AL2]
(requires output configuration—
see pages 4–36 and 3–54):
NDc

AL0 AL1 AL2

See I/O specs
on page 4–6.

Power
supply

Load

Additionally, the inverter can respond to a communications time-out in various ways.
Refer to the following diagram (top of next page). You configure the desired response
via function C076, Communications Error Select. This selects whether or not you want
the inverter to trip (alarm with error code E60) and whether to stop the motor or just let it
coast. Together, parameters C076 and C077 set the network detection watchdog time-out
and the inverter’s response.

Operations
and Monitoring

Inverter logic
circuit board

4–50

Using Intelligent Output Terminals

Master
Slave
Watchdog timer
C077 =xx.xx sec.

Time-out

[NDc]
Alarm
C076 =00 or 01

Logic Output Function
The Logic Output Function uses the inverter’s built-in logic feature. You can select any
two of the other nine intelligent output options for internal inputs (use C141 and C142).
Then, use C143 to configure the logic function to apply the logical AND, OR, or XOR
(exclusive OR) operator as desired to the two inputs.
Intelligent outputs used
as internal inputs:

C141

RUN, FA1, FA2, OL, OD,
AL, Dc, FBV, NDc

C143

Input A

Logic function
AND, OR, XOR

Operations
and Monitoring

C142
RUN, FA1, FA2, OL, OD,
AL, Dc, FBV, NDc

Input B

Input States

[LOG] Output State

A Input
B Input
(C141 select) (C142 select)

AND
(C143=00)

OR
(C143=01)

XOR
(C143=02)

[LOG]

L2002 Inverter

Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

LOG

Function Name
Logic Output
Function

Valid for outputs:

11, 12, AL0 – AL2

Required settings:

C141, C142, C143

Notes:

Output
State

4–51

Description

when the Boolean operation specified by C143
has a logical “1” result

OFF

when the Boolean operation specified by C143
has a logical “0” result
Example (requires output configuration—
see page 3–54):
LOG

Inverter output
terminal circuit

CM2 12 11
+
–

Example for terminals [AL0], [AL1], [AL2]
(requires output configuration—
see pages 4–36 and 3–54):
LOG

Inverter logic
circuit board

AL0 AL1 AL2
Power
supply

Load

Operations
and Monitoring

See I/O specs
on page 4–6.

4–52

Using Intelligent Output Terminals

Option Card Detection Signal
The expansion card provides a CANopen network interface for the inverter. When the
card is installed, you can configure an intelligent input to indicate the network status.
The watchdog timer value is set by parameter P044.
Option
Code

Terminal
Symbol

ODc

Function Name
Option Card Detection Signal

Valid for outputs:

11, 12, AL0 – AL2

Required settings:

P044

Notes:

Output
State

Description

when the network is detected and operating
normally

OFF

when the network is not detected or not operating normally
Example (requires output configuration—
see page 3–54):
ODc

Inverter output
terminal circuit

CM2 12 11
+
–

Example for terminals [AL0], [AL1], [AL2]
(requires output configuration—
see pages 4–36 and 3–54):
ODc

Operations
and Monitoring

Inverter logic
circuit board

AL0 AL1 AL2

See I/O specs
on page 4–6.

Power
supply

Load

L2002 Inverter

4–53

Analog Input Operation
The L2002 inverters provide for analog input
to command the inverter frequency output
value. The analog input terminal group
includes the [L], [OI], [O], and [H] terminals
on the control connector, which provide for
Voltage [O] or Current [OI] input. All analog
input signals must use the analog ground [L].
If you use either the voltage or current analog
input, you must select one of them using the
logic input terminal function [AT] analog
type. If terminal [AT] is OFF, the voltage
input [O] can command the inverter output
frequency. If terminal [AT] is ON, the current
input [OI] can command the inverter output
frequency. The [AT] terminal function is
covered in“Analog Input Current/Voltage
Select” on page 4–23. Remember that you
must also set A001 = 01 to select analog input
as the frequency source.

AM H O OI L
+V Ref.
Voltage input
Current input
A GND
V/I input
select
[AT]

A001
Freq.
setting

AM H O OI L

4-20 mA, AT=ON
+–

0-10 V, AT=OFF

NOTE: If no logic input terminal is configured for the [AT] function, then inverter sums
the voltage and current input to determine the desired input value.

Voltage Input – The voltage input circuit uses
terminals [L] and [O]. Attach the signal
cable’s shield wire only to terminal [L] on the
inverter. Maintain the voltage within specifications (do not apply negative voltage).

AM H O OI L
0 to 9.6 VDC,
0 to 10V nominal

+–

Current Input – The current input circuit
AM H O OI L
uses terminals [OI] and [L]. The current
comes from a sourcing type transmitter; a
4 to 19.6 mA DC,
sinking type will not work! This means the
4 to 20 mA nominal
current must flow into terminal [OI], and
terminal [L] is the return back to the transmitSee I/O specs on page 4–6.
ter. The input impedance from [OI] to [L] is
250 Ohms. Attach the cable shield wire only to terminal [L] on the inverter.

Operations
and Monitoring

Using an external potentiometer is a common
AM H O OI L
way to control the inverter output frequency
(and a good way to learn how to use the
analog inputs). The potentiometer uses the
built-in 10V reference [H] and the analog
ground [L] for excitation, and the voltage
1 to 2kΩ, 2W
input [O] for the signal. By default, the [AT]
terminal selects the voltage input when it is OFF. Take care to use the proper resistance
for the potentiometer, which is 1 to 2 k Ohms, 2 Watts.

4–54

Analog Input Operation
The following table shows the available analog input settings. Parameter A005 and the
input terminal [AT] determine the External Frequency Command input terminals that are
available, and how they function. The analog inputs [O] and [OI] use terminal [L] as the
reference (signal return).
A005
00
01
02

[AT] Input

Analog Input Configuration

OFF

[O]

[OI]

(ignored)

Sum ([O] + [OI])

OFF

[O]

Keypad potentiometer

OFF

[OI]

Keypad potentiometer

Other Analog Input-related topics:
• “Analog Input Settings” on page 3–14
• “Additional Analog Input Settings” on page 3–29
• “Analog Signal Calibration Settings” on page 3–59
• “Analog Input Current/Voltage Select” on page 4–23
• “ADD Frequency Enable” on page 4–32

Operations
and Monitoring

• “Analog Input Disconnect Detect” on page 4–45

4–55

L2002 Inverter

Analog Output Operation
In inverter applications it is useful to monitor
the inverter operation from a remote location or
from the front panel of an inverter enclosure. In
some cases, this requires only a panel-mounted
volt meter. In other cases, a controller such as a
PLC may provide the inverter’s frequency
command, and require inverter feedback data
(such as output frequency or output current) to
confirm actual operation. The analog output
terminal [AM] serves these purposes.

AM H O OI L
Analog
Voltage
Output

–
A GND

10VDC
full scale,
1mA max
See I/O specs on page 4–6.

The inverter provides an analog voltage output on terminal [AM] with terminal [L] as
analog GND reference. The [AM] can output inverter frequency or current output value.
Note that the voltage range is 0 to +10V (positive-going only), regardless of forward or
reverse motor rotation. Use C028 to configure terminal [FM] as indicated below.
Func.
C028

Code

Description

Output frequency

Output current

Range
0 – Max. frequency (Hz)
0 – 200%

The [AM] signal offset and gain are adjustable, as indicated below.
Func.

Description

Range

Default

B080

[AM] analog signal gain

0 to 255

100

C086

[AM] terminal offset tuning

0 – 10V

0.0

[AM]
10V

B080=200%
B080=100%

1. Verify that the inverter is in Stop Mode.
2. Use C086 to adjust the offset voltage. The
factory default (0V) is the correct value for
most cases. Otherwise, you can have a
positive voltage at zero speed or current.
3. Run the motor at the full scale speed.
a. If [AM] represents output frequency, use
B080 to set the voltage for full scale
output (up to 10V).

5V
B080=50%

0
1/2 full
scale

Full Hz
scale or
output A

b. If [AM] represents motor current, use B080 to set the voltage for full scale
output. Remember to leave room at the upper end of the range for increased
current when the motor is under heavier loads.

Operations
and Monitoring

The graph to the right shows the effect of the
gain setting. To calibrate the [AM] output for
your application, follow the steps below:

4–56

PID Loop Operation

PID Loop Operation
In standard operation, the inverter uses a reference source selected by parameter A001
for the output frequency, which may be a fixed value (F001), a variable set by the front
panel potentiometer, or value from an analog input (voltage or current). To enable PID
operation, set A071 = 01. This causes the inverter to calculate the target frequency, or
setpoint.
A calculated target frequency can have a lot of advantages. It lets the inverter adjust the
motor speed to optimize some other process of interest, potentially saving energy as
well. Refer to the figure below. The motor acts upon the external process. To control that
external process, the inverter must monitor the process variable. This requires wiring a
sensor to either the analog input terminal [O] (voltage) or terminal [OI] (current).

Setpoint
SP

∑

Error

PID
Freq.
Inverter
Calculation

Motor

External
Process

PV
Process Variable (PV)

Sensor

When enabled, the PID loop calculates the ideal output frequency to minimize the loop
error. This means we no longer command the inverter to run at a particular frequency, but
we specify the ideal value for the process variable. That ideal value is called the setpoint,
and is specified in the units of the external process variable. For a pump application it
may be gallons/minute, or it could be air velocity or temperature for an HVAC unit.
Parameter A075 is a scale factor that relates the external process variable units to motor
frequency. The figure below is a more detailed diagram of the PID function.
Standard
setting

Operations
and Monitoring

F001
Multi-speed
settings

Setpoint
(Target)
Scale factor
reciprocal
1

Scale factor

A075
Frequency
source select

A001

A075

P gain

A020 to A035

A072

Potentiometer
on keypad
V/I input
select
[AT]
Voltage

Error
SP

I gain

∑

A073

PV
Process Variable
(Feedback)

A GND
L

A012
A011
A015 A013 A014

OI
Current

A076 PID V/I input select

∑

Frequency
setting

D gain

A074

Analog input scaling

F001

Scale factor

Monitor

A075

D004

L2002 Inverter

4–57

PID Loop Configuration
The inverter’s PID loop algorithm is configurable for various applications.
PID Output Limit - The PID loop controller has a built-in output limit function. This
function monitors the difference between the PID setpoint and the loop output (inverter
output frequency), measured as a percentage of the full scale range of each. The limit is
specified by parameter A078.
• When the difference |(Setpoint – loop output)| is smaller than or equal to the A078
limit value, the loop controller operates in its normal linear range.
• When the difference |(Setpoint – loop output)| is larger than the A078 limit value, the
loop controller changes the output frequency as needed so that the difference does not
exceed the limit.
The diagram below shows PID setpoint changes and the related output frequency
behavior when a limit value in A078 exists.
%
Output limit

Limit imposed
on output
A078 Limit value

PID Setpoint
Output frequency

A078
Limit value

Limit imposed
on output

Output limit

A077 = 00
SP

+
PV

Error

∑

A077 = 01
PID
Freq.
Calculation

–
PV from process with
positive correlation

Other PID-related topics:
• “PID Control” on page 3–24
• “PID ON/OFF and PID Clear” on page 4–28
• “Output Deviation for PID Control” on page 4–42
• “PID Second Stage Output” on page 4–46

–
PV

Error

∑

PID
Freq.
Calculation

+
PV from process with
negative correlation

Operations
and Monitoring

Error Inversion - In typical heating loops or ventilation loops, an increase in energy
into the process results in an increasing PV. In this case, the Loop Error = (SP – PV). For
cooling loops, an increase in energy into the process results in a decreasing PV. In this
case, the Loop Error = –(SP – PV). Use A077 to configure the error term.

4–58

Configuring the Inverter for Multiple Motors

Configuring the Inverter for Multiple Motors
Simultaneous Connections
For some applications, you may need to connect two
or more motors (wired in parallel) to a single inverter’s
output. For example, this is common in conveyor
applications where two separate conveyors need to
have approximately the same speed. The use of two
motors may be less expensive than making the
mechanical link for one motor to drive multiple
conveyors.

L2002

U/T1
V/T2
W/T3

Some of the characteristics of using multiple motors
with one drive are:

U/T1
V/T2
W/T3

• The inverter output must be rated to handle the sum
of the currents from the motors.
• You must use separate thermal protection switches
or devices to protect each motor. Locate the device
for each motor inside the motor housing or as close
to it as possible.

Motor 1

Motor 2

to Nth motor

• The wiring for the motors must be permanently connected in parallel (do not remove
one motor from the circuit during operation).
NOTE: The motor speeds are identical only in theory. That is because slight differences
in their loads will cause one motor to slip a little more than another, even if the motors
are identical. Therefore, do not use this technique for multi-axis machinery that must
maintain a fixed position reference between its axes.

Operations
and Monitoring

Inverter Configuration for Two Motor Types
Some equipment manufacturers may have a single type of machine that has to support
two different motor types—and only one motor will be connected at a time. For
example, an OEM may sell basically the same machine to the US market and the
European market. Some reasons why the OEM needs two motor profiles are:
• The inverter power input voltage is different for these markets.
• The required motor type is also different for each destination.
In other cases, the inverter needs two profiles because the machine characteristics vary
according to these situations:
• Sometimes the motor load is very light and can move fast. Other times the motor load
is heavy and must move slower. Using two profiles allows the motor speed, acceleration and deceleration to be optimal for the load and avoid inverter trip (fault) events.
• Sometimes the slower version of the machine does not have special braking options,
but a higher performance version does have braking features.

L2002 Inverter

4–59

Having two motor profiles lets you store two “personalities” for motors in one inverter’s
memory. The inverter allows the final selection between the two motor types to be made
in the field through the use of an intelligent input terminal function [SET]. This provides
an extra level of flexibility needed in particular situations. See the following table.
Parameters for the second motor have a function code of the form x2xx. They appear
immediately after the first motor’s parameter in the menu listing order. The following
table lists the parameters that have the second parameter register for programming.
Parameter Codes
Function Name
2nd motor

Multi-speed frequency setting

A020

A220

Acceleration (1) time setting

F002

F202

Deceleration (1) time setting

F003

F203

Acceleration (2) time setting

A092

A292

Deceleration (2) time setting

A093

A293

Select method to use Acc2/Dec2

A094

A294

Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transition point

A095

A295

Dec1 to Dec2 frequency transition point

A096

A296

Level of electronic thermal setting

B012

B212

Electronic thermal characteristic

B013

B213

Torque boost select

A041

A241

Manual torque boost value

A042

A242

Manual torque boost frequency adjustment

A043

A243

V/f characteristic curve selection

A044

A244

iSLV voltage gain

A046

A246

iSLV slip compensation

A047

A247

Base frequency setting

A003

A203

Maximum frequency setting

A004

A204

Frequency upper limit setting

A061

A261

Frequency lower limit setting

A062

A262

Motor capacity

H003

H203

Motor poles setting

H004

H204

Motor stabilization constant

H006

H206

Operations
and Monitoring

1st motor

Inverter System
Accessories
In This Chapter....

5
page

— Introduction ..................................................... 2
— Component Descriptions................................. 3
— Dynamic Braking ............................................. 5

5–2

Introduction

Introduction
A motor control system will obviously include a motor and inverter, as well as fuses for
safety. If you are connecting a motor to the inverter on a test bench just to get started,
that’s all you may need for now. But a fully developed system can also have a variety of
additional components. Some can be for noise suppression, while others may enhance
the inverter’s braking performance. The figure below shows a system with several
possible optional components, and the table gives part number information.
From power supply
Part No. Series
Breaker,
MCCB or
GFI

HRL–x

5–3

AC reactor

RF noise filter, input
side

ZCL–xxx

5–4

RF noise filter

EMI filter (for CE)

FFL100–xxx

5–4

Capacitive filter

CFI–x

5–4

DC link choke

DCL–x–xx

HDC–xxx

5–4

Braking resistor

JRB–xxx–x
SRB–xxx–x

5–5

HRB-x,
NSRBx00–x
NJRB–xxx

5–5

Braking resistor,
NEMA-rated

L3
+1
DC link choke

+
Inverter
Braking
unit

–

GND
T2 T3
RF noise
filter

Motor Control
Accessories

USA

See
page

ALI–xxx2

Capacitive filter

Europe,
Japan

AC reactor, input side

EMI filter

Name

AC reactor, or
LCR filter

Motor
Thermal
switch

—

Resistance braking
unit

BRD–xxx

5–5

RF noise filter, output
side

ZCL–xxx

5–4

AC reactor, output
side

ALI–x2–xxx

HRL–xxx

5–3

LCR filter

Combination:
ALI–x2–xxx
LPF–xxx
R–2–xxx

HRL–xxC

5–3

Note: The Hitachi part number series for accessories includes different sizes of each part type,
specified by the –x suffix. Hitachi product literature can help match size and rating of your
inverter to the proper accessory size.
Each inverter accessory comes with its own printed
instruction manual. Please refer to those manuals for
complete installation details. This chapter gives only an
overview of these optional system devices.

L2002 Inverter

5–3

Component Descriptions
AC Reactors, Input Side
This is useful in suppressing harmonics induced on the power supply lines, or when the
main power voltage imbalance exceeds 3% (and power source capacity is more than
500 kVA), or to smooth out line fluctuations. It also improves the power factor.
In the following cases for a general-purpose inverter, a large peak current flows on the
main power supply side, and is able to destroy the inverter module:
• If the unbalanced factor of the power supply is 3% or higher
• If the power supply capacity is at least 10 times greater than the inverter capacity (the
power supply capacity is 500 kVA or more)
• If abrupt power supply changes are expected
Examples of these situations include:
1. Several inverters are connected in parallel, sharing the same power bus
2. A thyristor converter and an inverter are connected in parallel, sharing the same
power bus
3. An installed phase-advance (power factor correction) capacitor opens and closes
Where these conditions exist or when the connected equipment must be highly reliable,
you MUST install an input-side AC reactor of 3% (at a voltage drop at rated current)
with respect to the supply voltage on the power supply side. Also, where the effects of an
indirect lightning strike are possible, install a lightning conductor.
Example calculation:
VRS = 205V, VST = 203V, VTR = 197V,
where VRS is R-S line voltage, VST is S-T line voltage, VTR is T-R line voltage
Max. line voltage (min.) – Mean line voltage
Unbalance factor of voltage = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- × 100
Meanline voltage
V RS – ( V RS + V ST + V TR ) ⁄ 3
205 – 202
= ------------------------------------------------------------------- × 100 = ------------------------ × 100 = 1.5%
( V RS + V ST + V TR ) ⁄ 3
202
Please refer to the documentation that comes with the AC reactor for installation instructions.

AC Reactors, Output Side
Motor Control
Accessories

This reactor reduces the vibrations in the motor caused by the inverter’s switching
waveforms, by smoothing the waveforms to approximate commercial power quality. It is
also useful to reduce the reflected voltage wave phenomenon when wiring from the
inverter to the motor is more than 10m in length. Please refer to the documentation that
comes with the AC reactor for installation instructions.

5–4

Component Descriptions

Zero-phase Reactor (RF Noise Filter)
The zero-phase reactor helps reduce
radiated noise from the inverter wiring. It
can be used on the input or output side of
the inverter. The example zero-phase
reactor shown to the right comes with a
mounting bracket. The wiring must go
through the opening to reduce the RF
component of the electrical noise. Loop
the wires three times (four turns) to attain
the full RF filtering effect. For larger wire
sizes, place multiple zero-phase reactors
(up to four) side-by-side for a greater
filtering effect.

ZCL–xxx

EMI Filter
The EMI filter reduces the conducted noise on the power supply wiring generated by the
inverter. Connect the EMI filter to the inverter primary (input side). The FFL100 series
filter is required for compliance to the EMC Class A directive (Europe) and C-TICK
(Australia). See “CE–EMC Installation Guidelines” on page D–2.
WARNING: The EMI filter has high internal leakage current from power wiring to the
chassis. Therefore, connect the chassis ground of the EMI filter before making the power
connections to avoid danger of shock or injury.

FFL100–xxx

Motor Control
Accessories

RF Noise Filter (Capacitive)
This capacitive filter reduces radiated noise from the main power wires in the inverter
input side. This filter is not for achieving CE compliance and is applicable to the input
side only of the inverter. It comes in two versions—for 200V class inverters or 400V
class inverters. Please refer to the documentation that comes with the radio noise filter
for installation instructions.

DC Link Choke
The DC choke (reactor) suppresses harmonics generated by the inverter. It attenuates the
high-frequency components on the inverter’s internal DC bus (link). However, note that
it does not protect the diode rectifiers in the inverter input circuit.

5–5

L2002 Inverter

Dynamic Braking
Introduction
The purpose of dynamic braking is to improve the ability of the inverter to stop (decelerate) the motor and load. This becomes necessary when an application has some or all of
the following characteristics:
• High load inertia compared to the available motor torque
• The application requires frequent or sudden changes in speed
• System losses are not great enough to slow the motor as needed
When the inverter reduces its output frequency to decelerate the load, the motor can
temporarily become a generator. This occurs when the motor rotation frequency is
higher than the inverter output frequency. This condition can cause the inverter DC bus
voltage to rise, resulting in an over-voltage trip. In many applications, the over-voltage
condition serves as a warning signal that we have exceeded the deceleration capabilities
of the system. The L2002 inverter can connect to an external braking unit, which sends
the regenerative energy from the motor during deceleration to the optional braking resistor(s). The dynamic braking resistor serves as a load, developing heat to stop the motor
just as brakes on an automobile develop heat during braking.
A switching circuit and power resistor are the main components of the dynamic braking
unit that includes a fuse and thermally activated alarm relay for safety. However, be
careful to avoid overheating its resistor. The fuse and thermal relay are safeguards for
extreme conditions, but the inverter can maintain braking usage in a safe zone.

Dynamic Braking Usage
Dynamic braking usage must follow guidelines to avoid overheating. The timing diagram Output
to the right shows the output frequency versus freq.
time. Dynamic braking is in effect during the
deceleration ramp, and has the following
constraints:
• Dynamic braking maximum duty cycle
= 10%, where Tb/Tc ≤ 0.1 sec.

Dynamic braking

Dynamic braking maximum continuous ON
time Tb ≤ 10 sec.

Selecting Braking Resistors for External Braking Units

Inverter

+
–

Braking
unit

Motor Control
Accessories

200V Class Inverters – The following tables
specify the braking options for 200V class
L2002 inverters and the braking torque for
each option. You can connect a single braking
unit to the inverter, or two braking units for
additional stopping torque.

5–6

Dynamic Braking
Use one BRD–E2 braking unit for the braking torque listed in the following table.
Note the column meanings in the tables:
• Column “A” = Average braking torque from 60 Hz to 3 Hz.
• Column “B” = Average braking torque from 120 Hz to 3 Hz
L2002 Inverter 200V Models

Model Number

Braking
torque
without
braking unit

Braking Torque with BRD–E2 Braking Unit
External resistor added

Using built-in
resistor only
A

HRB1

HRB2

HRB3

002NFE(F)2/NFU2

1/4

50%

150%

120%

004NFE(F)2/NFU2

1/2

50%

150%

120%

005NFE(F)2/NFU2

3/4

50%

150%

120%

007NFE(F)2/NFU2

50%

100%

80%

150%

120%

011NFE(F)2/NFU2

1.5

50%

60%

100%

80%

015NFE(F)2/NFU2

50%

100%

80%

022NFE(F)2/NFU2

20%

50%

100%

80%

037LFU2

20%

40%

60%

100%

150%

120%

055LFU2

7.5

20%

30%

50%

70%

100%

80%

075LFU2

20%

40%

50%

80%

Connect a second braking unit in parallel for additional braking torque listed in the
following table.
L2002 Inverter 200V Models

Motor Control
Accessories

Model Number

Braking
torque
without
braking unit

Braking Torque with TWO (2) BRD–E2 Braking Units
External resistor added

Using built-in
resistor only
A

HRB1

HRB2

HRB3

002NFE(F)2/NFU2

1/4

50%

150%

120%

004NFE(F)2/NFU2

1/2

50%

150%

120%

005NFE(F)2/NFU2

3/4

50%

150%

120%

007NFE(F)2/NFU2

50%

150%

120%

011NFE(F)2/NFU2

1.5

50%

100%

80%

015NFE(F)2/NFU2

50%

100%

80%

022NFE(F)2/NFU2

20~40%

70%

150%

120%

037LFU2

20~40%

50%

110%

90%

055LFU2

7.5

20%

30%

80%

100%

150%

075LFU2

20%

30%

60%

80%

100%

5–7

L2002 Inverter
400V Class Inverters – The following tables
specify the braking options for 400V class
L2002 inverters and the braking torque for
each option. You can connect a single braking
unit to the inverter, or two braking units for
additional braking torque.

Braking
unit

Inverter

Braking
unit

–

Use one BRD–EZ2 braking unit for the
braking torque listed in the following table.
L2002 Inverter 400V Models

Model Number

Braking
torque
without
braking unit

Braking Torque with BRD–EZ2 Braking Unit
Using built-in
resistor only
A

External resistor added
HRB1 x (2)
A

HRB2 x (2)
A

004HFE(F)2/HFU2

1/2

50%

150%

007HFE(F)2/HFU2

50%

150%

015HFE(F)2/HFU2

50%

100%

022HFE(F)2/HFU2

20%

60%

030HFE(F)2/HFU2

20%

50%

150%

040HFE(F)2/HFU2

20%

40%

130%

150%

055HFE(F)2/HFU2

7.5

20%

30%

100%

130%

075HFE(F)2/HFU2

20%

70%

100%

HRB3 x (2)
A

Connect a second braking unit in parallel for additional braking torque listed in the
following table.
L2002 Inverter 400V Models

Model Number

Braking
torque
without
braking unit

Braking Torque with TWO (2)BRD–EZ2 Braking Units
Using built-in
resistor only
A

External resistor added
HRB1 x (2)
A

1/2

50%

150%

007HFE(F)2/HFU2

50%

150%

015HFE(F)2/HFU2

50%

150%

022HFE(F)2/HFU2

20%

130%

030HFE(F)2/HFU2

20%

100%

040HFE(F)2/HFU2

20%

70%

055HFE(F)2/HFU2

7.5

20%

50%

150%

075HFE(F)2/HFU2

20%

40%

140%

HRB3 x (2)
A

Motor Control
Accessories

004HFE(F)2/HFU2

HRB2 x (2)

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance
In This Chapter....

6
page

— Troubleshooting............................................... 2
— Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions . 5
— Restoring Factory Default Settings ................. 8
— Maintenance and Inspection ........................... 9
— Warranty........................................................ 16

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

6–2

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
Safety Messages
Please read the following safety messages before troubleshooting or performing maintenance on the inverter and motor system.
WARNING: Wait at least five (5) minutes after turning OFF the input power supply
before performing maintenance or an inspection. Otherwise, there is the danger of
electric shock.
WARNING: Make sure that only qualified personnel will perform maintenance, inspection, and part replacement. Before starting to work, remove any metallic objects from
your person (wristwatch, bracelet, etc.). Be sure to use tools with insulated handles.
Otherwise, there is a danger of electric shock and/or injury to personnel.
WARNING: Never remove connectors by pulling on its wire leads (wires for cooling
fan and logic P.C.board). Otherwise, there is a danger of fire due to wire breakage and/or
injury to personnel.

General Precautions and Notes
• Always keep the unit clean so that dust or other foreign matter does not enter the
inverter.
• Take special care in regard to breaking wires or making connection mistakes.
• Firmly connect terminals and connectors.
• Keep electronic equipment away from moisture and oil. Dust, steel filings and other
foreign matter can damage insulation, causing unexpected accidents, so take special
care.

Inspection Items
This chapter provides instructions or checklists for these inspection items:
• Daily inspection
• Periodic inspection (approximately once a year)
• Insulation resistance test

L2002 Inverter

6–3

Troubleshooting Tips

Symptom/condition

Probable Cause

Solution

• Is the frequency command source

• Make sure the parameter

A001 parameter setting correct?
• Is the Run command source A002
parameter setting correct?

setting A001 is correct.
• Make sure the parameter
setting A002 is correct.

• Is power being supplied to termi-

• Check terminals [L1], [L2],

nals [L1], [L2], and [L3/N]? If so,
the POWER lamp should be ON.

• Is there an error code E X X
displayed?
The inverter
outputs [U], [V],
[W] are not
• Are the signals to the intelligent
supplying
input terminals correct?
voltage.
• Is the Run Command active?
The motor
• Is the [FW] terminal (or [RV])
will not run.
connected to [PCS] (via switch,
etc.)

and [L3/N], then [U/T1],
[V/T2], and [W/T3].
• Turn ON the power supply
or check fuses.

• Press the Func. key and
determine the error type.
Eliminate the error cause,
then clear the error (Reset).

• Verify the terminal functions
for C001 – C005 are correct.
• Turn ON Run Command
enable.
• Supply 24V to [FW] or [RV]
terminal, if configured.

• Has the frequency setting for F001

• Set the parameter for F001

been set greater than zero?
• Are the control circuit terminals
[H], [O], and [L] connected to the
potentiometer?

to a safe, non-zero value.
• If the potentiometer is the
frequency setting source,
verify voltage at [O] > 0V.

• Is the RS (reset) function or FRS

• Turn OFF the command(s).

(free-run stop) function ON?
Inverter outputs
[U], [V], [W]
are supplying
voltage.

• Is the motor load too heavy?

The optional
remote operator
is used (SRW).

• Are the operational settings

motor independently.

between the remote operator and
the inverter unit correct?

• Are the connections of output

The direction of the motor is
reversed.

• Reduce load, and test the

terminals [U/T1], [V/T2], and
[W/T3] correct?
• Is the phase sequence of the motor
forward or reverse with respect to
[U/T1], [V/T2], and [W/T3]?

• Check the operator type
setting.

• Make connections according
to the phase sequence of the
motor. In general:
FWD = U-V-W, and
REV=U-W-V.

• Are the control terminals [FW] and • Use terminal [FW] for
[RV] wired correctly?
• Is parameter F004 properly set?

forward, and [RV] for
reverse.
• Set motor direction in F004.

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

The table below lists typical symptoms and the corresponding solution(s).

6–4

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

Symptom/condition

Probable Cause

• If using the analog input, is the
current or voltage at [O] or [OI]?

Solution

• Check the wiring.
• Check the potentiometer or
signal generating device.

• Is the load too heavy?
The motor speed will not reach
the target frequency (desired
speed).

overload restriction feature
(reduces output as needed).

• Is the inverter internally limiting
the output frequency?

• Is the load fluctuation too great?
The rotation is unstable.

• Was power turned OFF after a

Inverter data
is not
correct.

A parameter
will not
change after
an edit
(reverts to
old setting).

• Check max frequency
setting (A004)
• Check frequency upper limit
setting (A061)

• Increase the motor capacity

(both inverter and motor).
• Is the supply voltage unstable?
• Fix power supply problem.
• Is the problem occurring at a partic- • Change the output frequency
ular frequency?
slightly, or use the jump
frequency setting to skip the
problem frequency.

The RPM of the motor does not • Is the maximum frequency setting
match the inverter output
A004 correct?
frequency setting.
• Does the monitor function D001
display the expected output
frequency?

No downloads
have occurred.

• Reduce the load.
• Heavy loads activate the

parameter edit but before pressing
the Store key?

• Edits to data are permanently
stored at power down. Was the time
from power OFF to power ON less
than six seconds?

• Verify the V/f settings match
motor specifications.

• Make sure all scaling (such
as A011 to A014) is
properly set.

• Edit the data and press the
Store key once.

• Wait six seconds or more
before turning power OFF
after editing data.

A download to
the inverter was
attempted.

• Was the power turned OFF within

True for certain
parameters

• Is the inverter in Run Mode? Some • Put inverter in Stop Mode

True for all
parameters

• If you’re using the [SFT] intelligent • Change the state of the SFT

six seconds after the display
changed from REMT to INV?

parameters cannot be edited during
Run Mode.
input (software lock function)—is
the [SFT] input ON?

• Copy the data to the inverter
again, and keep power ON
for six seconds or more after
copying.
(press the Stop/reset key).
Then edit the parameter.
input, and check the B031
parameter (SFT mode).

L2002 Inverter

6–5

Fault Detection and Clearing
The microprocessor in the inverter detects a variety
STOP
of fault conditions and captures the event, recordRESET
Run
Stop
ing it in a history table. The inverter output turns
RUN
OFF, or “trips” similar to the way a circuit breaker
STOP
trips due to an over-current condition. Most faults
RESET
Fault
occur when the motor is running (refer to the
Trip
Fault
diagram to the right). However, the inverter could
have an internal fault and trip in Stop Mode. In
either case, you can clear the fault by pressing the Stop/Reset key. Additionally, you can
clear the inverter’s cumulative trip history by performing the procedure “Restoring
Factory Default Settings” on page 6–8 (setting B084=00 will clear the trip history but
leave inverter settings intact).

Error Codes
An error code will appear on the display automatically when a fault causes the inverter to
trip. The following table lists the cause associated with the error.
Error
Code

Name

Cause(s)

E 02

The inverter output was short-circuited, or the motor
shaft is locked or has a heavy load. These conditions
cause excessive current for the inverter, so the inverter
Over-current event during output is turned OFF.
deceleration

E 03

Over-current event during The dual-voltage motor is wired incorrectly.
acceleration

E 04

Over-current event during
other conditions

E 05

Overload protection

When a motor overload is detected by the electronic
thermal function, the inverter trips and turns OFF its
output.

E 07

Over-voltage protection

When the DC bus voltage exceeds a threshold, due to
regenerative energy from the motor.

E 08

EEPROM error

When the built-in EEPROM memory has problems
due to noise or excessive temperature, the inverter
trips and turns OFF its output to the motor.

E 09

Under-voltage error

A decrease of internal DC bus voltage below a threshold results in a control circuit fault. This condition can
also generate excessive motor heat or cause low
torque. The inverter trips and turns OFF its output.

E1 1
E22

CPU error

A malfunction in the built-in CPU has occurred, so
the inverter trips and turns OFF its output to the
motor.

E 01

Over-current event while
at constant speed

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

6–6

Monitoring Trip Events, History, & Conditions

Error
Code

Name

Cause(s)

E1 2

External trip

A signal on an intelligent input terminal configured as
EXT has occurred. The inverter trips and turns OFF
the output to the motor.

E1 3

USP

When the Unattended Start Protection (USP) is
enabled, an error occurred when power is applied
while a Run signal is present. The inverter trips and
does not go into Run Mode until the error is cleared.

E1 4

Ground fault

The inverter is protected by the detection of ground
faults between the inverter output and the motor upon
during powerup tests. This feature protects the
inverter, and does not protect humans.

E1 5

Input over-voltage

The inverter tests for input over-voltage after the
inverter has been in Stop Mode for 100 seconds. If an
over-voltage condition exists, the inverter enters a
fault state. After the fault is cleared, the inverter can
enter Run Mode again.

E21

Inverter thermal trip

When the inverter internal temperature is above the
threshold, the thermal sensor in the inverter module
detects the excessive temperature of the power
devices and trips, turning the inverter output OFF.

E30

Driver error

An internal inverter error has occurred at the safety
protection circuit between the CPU and main driver
unit. Excessive electrical noise may be the cause. The
inverter has turned OFF the IGBT module output.

E35

Thermistor

When a thermistor is connected to terminals [6] and
[L] and the inverter has sensed the temperature is too
high, the inverter trips and turns OFF the output.

E 60

Communications error

The inverter’s watchdog timer for the communications network has timed out.

Under-voltage (brownout) with output shutoff

Due to low input voltage, the inverter turns its output
OFF and tries to restart. If it fails to restart, then the
alarm trips to record the under-voltage error event.

---

NOTE: If an EEPROM error (E08) occurs, be sure to confirm the parameter data values
are still correct. If the power is turned OFF while the [RS] (Reset) intelligent input
terminal is ON, an EEPROM error will occur when power is restored.

L2002 Inverter

6–7

Trip History and Inverter Status

The following Monitor Menu map shows how to access the error codes. When fault(s)
exist, you can review their details by first selecting the proper function: D081 is the most
recent, and D083 is the oldest.
Monitor Menu
2

d 083
2

d 081

d 082
FUNC.

No error
Error
exists?

FUNC.

Yes

E 09
1

DC bus voltage
at trip point

15
1

Motor current
at trip point

28 4.0
1

Output frequency
at trip point

2.5
1

Error Code

1 0.0
1

Trip
Conditions

Cumulative inverter
operation time at
trip point
Cumulative powerON time at trip point

1
FUNC.

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

We recommend that you first find the cause of the fault before clearing it. When a fault
occurs, the inverter stores important performance data at the moment of the fault. To
access the data, use the monitor functions (Dxxx) and select D081 for details about the
present fault (En). The previous two faults are stored in D082 and D083, with D(En-1 and
En-2). Each error shifts D081–D082 to D082–D083, and writes the new error to D081.

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

6–8

Restoring Factory Default Settings

Restoring Factory Default Settings
You can restore all inverter parameters to the original factory (default) settings for the
intended country of use. After initializing the inverter, use the powerup test in Chapter 2
to get the motor running again. To initialize the inverter, follow the steps below.
No.

Action

Display

Func./Parameter

Use the FUNC. , 1 , and 2 keys to
navigate to the “B” Group.

b– – –

“B” Group selected

Press the

b 001

First “B” parameter selected

Press and hold the

b 085

Country code for initialization
selected

Press the

Confirm the country code is correct. Do not change it unless you are absolutely sure the
power input voltage range and frequency match the country code setting.

FUNC.

key.
1

key until ->

key.

To change the country code, press

to set,

00 = Japan, 01 = Europe,
02 = USA

STR

to store.

Press the

FUNC.

key.

b 085

Country code for initialization
selected

Press the

key.

b 084

Initialization function selected

Press the

FUNC.

key.

00 = initialization disabled,
clear trip history only

Press the

key.

01 = initialization enabled

Press the

STR

key.

Press and hold the FUNC. and
keys. Do not release yet.

STOP
Press and hold the RESET
key for 3
seconds and then release.

After the display “D000” is blinking,
only then release all the keys.

Initialization is complete.

b 084

Initialization now enabled to
restore all defaults

b 084

First part of special key
sequence

d 000

Final part of key sequence;
display is blinking

EU
USA
d 001

Default parameter country code
shown during initialization
process (left-most char displays
alternating pattern)
Function code for output
frequency monitor shown

NOTE: Initialization cannot be performed with a remote operator panel. Disconnect the
device and use the inverter’s front panel keypad.

L2002 Inverter

6–9

Monthly and Yearly Inspection Chart
Inspection Cycle

Item Inspected

Check for...
Month

Control
circuit

Criteria

Ambient
environment

Extreme
temperatures
& humidity

✔

Thermometer,
hygrometer

Ambient temperature
between -10 to 40°C,
non-condensing

Major devices

Abnormal
noise & vib.

✔

Visual and aural

Stable environment for
electronic controls

Power supply
voltage

Voltage
tolerance

✔

Digital volt meter,
measure between
inverter terminals
[L1], [L2], [L3]

200V class:
200 to 240V 50/60 Hz
400V class:
380 to 460V 50/60 Hz

Ground
Insulation

Adequate
resistance

✔

Digital volt meter,
GND to terminals

5 Meg. Ohms or greater

Mounting

No loose
screws

✔

Torque wrench

M3: 0.5 – 0.6 Nm
M4: 0.98 – 1.3 Nm
M5: 1.5 – 2.0 Nm

Components

Overheating

✔

Thermal trip events No trip events

Housing

Dirt, dust

✔

Visual

Vacuum dust and dirt

✔

Visual

No abnormalities

Visual

No abnormalities

Overall

Main
circuit

Year

Inspection
Method

Terminal block Secure
connections
✔

Smoothing
capacitor

Leaking,
swelling

Relay(s)

Chattering

✔

Aural

Single click when
switching ON or OFF

Resistors

Cracks or
discoloring

✔

Visual

Check Ohms of
optional braking res.

Cooling fan

Noise

✔

Power down,
manually rotate

Rotation must be
smooth

Dust

✔

Visual

Vacuum to clean

Visual

No abnormalities

✔

Overall

No odor,
discoloring,
corrosion

Capacitor

No leaks or
deformation

✔

Visual

Undistorted appearance

Legibility

✔

Visual

All LED segments work

Display LEDs

Note 1:
Note 2:

The life of a capacitor is affected by the ambient temperature. See “Capacitor
Life Curve” on page 6–11.
The inverter must be cleaned periodically. If dust accumulates on the fan and
heat sink, it can cause overheating of the inverter.

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

Maintenance and Inspection

6–10

Maintenance and Inspection

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

Megger Test
The megger is a piece of test equipment that uses a high voltage to determine if an
insulation degradation has occurred. For inverters, it is important that the power terminals be isolated from the Earth GND terminal via the proper amount of insulation.
The circuit diagram below shows the inverter wiring for performing the megger test. Just
follow the steps to perform the test:
1. Remove power from the inverter and wait at least 5 minutes before proceeding.
2. Open the front housing panel to access the power wiring.
3. Remove all wires to terminals [R, S, T, PD/+1, PD/+, N/–, U, V, and W]. Most importantly, the input power and motor wires will be disconnected from the inverter.
4. Use a bare wire and short terminals [R, S, T, PD/+1, PD/+, N/–, U, V, and W] together
as shown in the diagram.
5. Connect the megger to the inverter Earth GND and to the shorted power terminals as
shown. Then perform the megger test at 500 VDC and verify 5MΩ or greater resistance.
Add test jumper wire
Disconnect
power source

Disconnect
motor wires

L2002
R

W
PD/+1

Motor

Megger, 500VDC

PD/+
N/–

Earth GND

6. After completing the test, disconnect the megger from the inverter.
7. Reconnect the original wires to terminals [R, S, T, PD/+1, PD/+, N/–, U, V, and W].
CAUTION: Do not connect the megger to any control circuit terminals such as intelligent I/O, analog terminals, etc. Doing so could cause damage to the inverter.
CAUTION: Never test the withstand voltage (HIPOT) on the inverter. The inverter has a
surge protector between the main circuit terminals above and the chassis ground.

L2002 Inverter

6–11

Spare parts

Quantity
Part description

Symbol

Notes
Used

Spare

Cooling fan

FAN

015NF, 022NF, 037LF,
015HF to 075HF

Case

•
•
•
•

Front case
Key cover
Case
Bottom cover

Capacitor Life Curve
The DC bus inside the inverter uses a large capacitor as shown in the diagram below. The
capacitor handles high voltage and current as it smooths the power for use by the
inverter. So, any degradation of the capacitor will affect the performance of the inverter.
Power
Input

Variable-frequency Drive
Converter

L1
L2

Internal
DC Bus

Inverter

Motor

Rectifier

U/T1
V/T2

W/T3
–

Capacitor

Capacitor life is reduced in higher ambient temperatures, as the graph below demonstrates. Be sure to keep the ambient temperature at acceptable levels, and perform
maintenance inspections on the fan, heat sink, and other components. If the inverter is
installed on a cabinet, the ambient temperature is the temperature inside the cabinet.
Capacitor Life Curve

50
Ambient
temperature, °C

Operation for 12 hours/day

40
30
20
10
0
-10
1

Years

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

We recommend that you stock spare parts to reduce down time, including these parts:

6–12

Maintenance and Inspection

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

General Inverter Electrical Measurements
The following table specifies how to measure key system electrical parameters. The
diagrams on the next page show inverter-motor systems and the location of measurement
points for these parameters.
Parameter

Circuit location
of measurement

Measuring
instrument

Notes

Reference Value

Supply voltage
E1

ER – across L1 and L2
ES – across L2 and L3
ET – across L3 and L1

Fundamental
Moving-coil
type voltmeter or wave effective
value
rectifier type
voltmeter

Supply current
I1

Ir – L1, Is – L2, It – L3

Total effective
value

—

Supply power
W1

W11 – across L1 and L2
W12 – across L2 and L3

Total effective
value

—

Supply power
factor Pf1

Commercial
supply voltage
(200V class) 200–
240V, 50/60 Hz
400V class 380–
460V, 50/60 Hz

—

W1
Pf 1 = ------------------------------ × 100%
3 × E1 × I1

Output voltage
E0

EU – across U and V
EV – across V and W
EW – across W and U

Rectifier type
voltmeter

Total effective
value

—

Output current
Io

IU – U
IV – V
IW – W

Moving-coil
ammeter

Total effective
value

—

Output power
Wo

W01 – across U and V
W02 – across V and W

Electronic type
wattmeter

Total effective
value

—

Output power
factor Pfo

Calculate the output power factor from the output voltage E,
output current I, and output power W.

—

W0
Pf 0 = ------------------------------ × 100%
3 × E0 × I0
Note 1:
Note 2:

Note 3:

Use a meter indicating a fundamental wave effective value for voltage, and
meters indicating total effective values for current and power.
The inverter output has a distorted waveform, and low frequencies may cause
erroneous readings. However, the measuring instruments and methods listed
above provide comparably accurate results.
A general-purpose digital volt meter (DVM) is not usually suitable to measure
a distorted waveform (not pure sinusoid).

L2002 Inverter

6–13

Single-phase Measurement Diagram
Inverter
L1

I1
EU-V

W01
Motor

W02
T3

I1
EU-V

Three-phase Measurement Diagram
Inverter
L1

I1
E1

EU-V
S

EU-V
W

W01

W02
T

W01

I2
E1

W02
T3

I1
EU-V

Motor

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

The figures below show measurement locations for voltage, current, and power measurements listed in the table on the previous page. The voltage to be measured is the fundamental wave effective voltage. The power to be measured is the total effective power.

6–14

Maintenance and Inspection

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

Inverter Output Voltage Measurement Techniques
Taking voltage measurements around drives equipment requires the right equipment and
a safe approach. You are working with high voltages and high-frequency switching
waveforms that are not pure sinusoids. Digital voltmeters will not usually produce
reliable readings for these waveforms. And, it is usually risky to connect high voltage
signals to oscilloscopes. The inverter output semiconductors have some leakage, and
no-load measurements produce misleading results. So, we highly recommend using the
following circuits to measure voltage for performing the equipment inspections.
Voltage measurement with load

L2/S

Inverter

L3/T

U/T1

L1/R

U/T1

L1/R

Voltage measurement without load

V/T2

L2/S

W/T3

L3/T

Inverter

V/T2
W/T3

Additional resistor

220 kΩ
2W

V Class

Diode Bridge

5 kΩ
30W

–

Voltmeter

V Class

Diode Bridge

–

Voltmeter

200V Class

600V 0.01A min. 300V range

200V Class

600V 0.01A min. 300V range

400V Class

100V 0.1A min.

400V Class

100V 0.1A min.

600V range

HIGH VOLTAGE: Be careful not to touch wiring or connector terminals when working
with the inverters and taking measurements. Be sure to place the measurement circuitry
components above in an insulated housing before using them.

6–15

L2002 Inverter

IGBT Test Method
1. Disconnect input power to terminals [R, S, and T] and motor terminals [U, V, and W].
2. Disconnect any wires from terminals [+] and [–] for regenerative braking.
3. Use a Digital Volt Meter (DVM) and set it for 1Ω resistance range. You can check the
status of the charging state of terminals [R, S, T, U, V, W, +, and –] of the inverter and
the probe of the DVM by measuring the charging state.
D1

[+1]
D3

[R]

[+]
TR1

TR2

TR3

[U]

[S]

[V]

[T]

[W]

TR4

TR5

TR6

[–]

Table Legend – Almost infinite resistance: ≅ ∞ Ω Almost zero resistance: ≅ 0 Ω
DVM
Part
D1

DVM

Measured
Value

Part
D5

–

[R]

≅∞Ω

[R]

≅0Ω

[S]

≅∞Ω

[S]

≅0Ω

[T]

≅∞Ω

[T]

≅0Ω

[R]

[N]

≅0Ω

[N]

[R]

≅∞Ω

TR1

TR2

DVM

Measured
Value

Part
TR3

–

[S]

[N]

≅0Ω

[N]

[S]

≅∞Ω

[T]

[N]

≅0Ω

[N]

[T]

≅∞Ω

[U]

[+]

≅∞Ω

[+]

[U]

≅0Ω

[V]

[+]

≅∞Ω

[+]

[V]

≅0Ω

TR4

TR5

TR6

Measured
Value

–

[W]

[+]

≅∞Ω

[+]

[W]

≅0Ω

[U]

[–]

≅0Ω

[–]

[U]

≅∞Ω

[V]

[–]

≅0Ω

[–]

[V]

≅∞Ω

[W]

[–]

≅0Ω

[–]

[W]

≅∞Ω

NOTE: The resistance values for the diodes or the transistors will not be exactly the
same, but they will be close. If you find a significant difference, a problem may exist.
NOTE: Before measuring the voltage between [+] and [–] with the DC current range,
confirm that the smoothing capacitor is discharged fully, then execute the tests.

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

The following procedure will check the inverter transistors (IGBTs) and diodes:

Troubleshooting
and Maintenance

6–16

Warranty

Warranty
Warranty Terms
The warranty period under normal installation and handling conditions
shall be two (2) years from the date of manufacture (“DATE” on product
nameplate), or one (1) year from the date of installation, whichever occurs
first. The warranty shall cover the repair or replacement, at Hitachi's sole
discretion, of ONLY the inverter that was installed.
1. Service in the following cases, even within the warranty period, shall
be charged to the purchaser:
a. Malfunction or damage caused by mis-operation or modification
or improper repair
b. Malfunction or damage caused by a drop after purchase and
transportation
c. Malfunction or damage caused by fire, earthquake, flood,
lightening, abnormal input voltage, contamination, or other natural
disasters
2. When service is required for the product at your work site, all expenses
associated with field repair shall be charged to the purchaser.
3. Always keep this manual handy; please do not lose it. Please contact
your Hitachi distributor to purchase replacement or additional manuals.

Glossary and
Bibliography
In This Appendix....

A
page

— Glossary .......................................................... 2
— Bibliography .................................................... 8

A–2

Glossary

Appendix A

Glossary
Ambient Temperature The air temperature in the chamber containing a powered electronic
unit. A unit’s heat sinks rely on a lower ambient temperature in
order to dissipate heat away from sensitive electronics.

Arrival Frequency

The arrival frequency refers to the set output frequency of the
inverter for the constant speed setting. The arrival frequency feature
turns on an output when the inverter reaches the set constant speed.
The inverter has various arrival frequencies and pulsed or latched
logic options.

Auto-tuning

The ability of a controller to execute a procedure that interacts with
a load to determine the proper coefficients to use in the control
algorithm. Auto-tuning is a common feature of process controllers
with PID loops. Hitachi inverters feature auto tuning to determine
motor parameters for optimal commutation. Auto-tuning is available as a special command from a digital operator panel. See also
Digital Operator Panel.

Base Frequency

The power input frequency for which an AC induction motor is
designed to operate. Most motors will specify a 50 to 60 Hz value.
The Hitachi inverters have a programmable base frequency, so you
must ensure that parameter matches the attached motor. The term
base frequency helps differentiate it from the carrier frequency. See
also Carrier Frequency and Frequency Setting.

Braking Resistor

An energy-absorbing resistor that dissipates energy from a decelerating load. Load inertia causes the motor to act as a generator
during deceleration. For the L2002 inverter models, the braking unit
and braking resistor are optional (external) components. See also
Four-quadrant Operation and Dynamic Braking.

Break-away Torque

The torque a motor must produce to overcome the static friction of a
load, in order to start the load moving.

Carrier Frequency

The frequency of the constant, periodic, switching waveform that
the inverter modulates to generate the AC output to the motor. See
also PWM.

A regulatory agency for governing the performance of electronic
products in Europe. Drive installations designed to have CE
approval must have particular filter(s) installed in the application.

Choke

An inductor that is tuned to react at radio frequencies is called a
“choke,” since it attenuates (chokes) frequencies above a particular
threshold. Tuning is often accomplished by using a movable
magnetic core. In variable-frequency drive systems, a choke
positioned around high-current wiring can help attenuate harmful
harmonics and protect equipment. See also Harmonics.

L2002 Inverter

A–3

The inverter DC braking feature stops the AC commutation to the
motor, and sends a DC current through the motor windings in order
to stop the motor. Also called “DC injection braking,” it has little
effect at high speed, and is used as the motor is nearing a stop.

Deadband

In a control system, the range of input change for which there is no
perceptible change in the output. In PID loops, the error term may
have a dead band associated with it. Deadband may or may not be
desirable; it depends on the needs of the application.

Digital Operator Panel For Hitachi inverters, “digital operator panel” (DOP) refers first to
the operator keypad on the front panel of the inverter. It also
includes hand-held remote keypads, which connect to the inverter
via a cable. Finally, the DOP Professional is a PC-based software
simulation of the keypad devices.

Diode

A semiconductor device that has a voltage-current characteristic
that allows current to flow only in one direction, with negligible
leakage current in the reverse direction. See also Rectifier.

Duty Cycle

1. The percent of time a square wave of fixed frequency is ON
(high) versus OFF (low). 2. The ratio of operating time of a device
such as a motor to its resting time. This parameter usually is specified in association with the allowable thermal rise for the device.

Dynamic Braking

For the L2002 inverter models, the braking unit and braking resistor
are optional (external) components. The dynamic braking feature
shunts the motor-generated EMF energy into a special braking
resistor. The added dissipation (braking torque) is effective at
higher speeds, having a reduced effect as the motor nears a stop.

Error

In process control, the error is the difference between the desired
value or setpoint (SP) and the actual value of a the process variable
(PV). See also Process Variable and PID Loop.

EMI

Electromagnetic Interference - In motor/drive systems, the switching of high currents and voltages creates the possibility of generating radiated electrical noise that may interfere with the operation of
nearby sensitive electrical instruments or devices. Certain aspects of
an installation, such as long motor lead wire lengths, tend to
increase the chance of EMI. Hitachi provides accessory filter
components you can install to decrease the level of EMI.

Four-quadrant
operation

Referring to a graph of torque versus direction, a four-quadrant
drive can turn the motor either forward or reverse, as well as decelerate in either direction (see also reverse torque). A load that has a
relatively high inertia and must move in both directions and change
directions rapidly requires four-quadrant capability from its drive.

Appendix A

DC Braking

Appendix A

A–4

Glossary

Free-run Stop

A method of stopping a motor, caused when the inverter simply
turns OFF its motor output connections. This may allow the motor
and load to coast to a stop, or a mechanical brake may intervene and
shorten the deceleration time.

Frequency Setting

While frequency has a broad meaning in electronics, it typically
refers to motor speed for variable-frequency drives (inverters). This
is because the output frequency of the inverter is variable, and is
proportional to the attained motor speed. For example, a motor with
a base frequency of 60 Hz can be speed controlled with an inverter
output varying form 0 to 60 Hz. See also Base Frequency, Carrier
Frequency, and Slip.

Harmonics

A harmonic is a whole number multiple of a base of fundamental
frequency. The square waves used in inverters produce highfrequency harmonics, even though the main goal is to produce
lower-frequency sine waves. These harmonics can be harmful to
electronics (including motor windings) and cause radiated energy
that interferes with nearby electronic devices. Chokes, line reactors,
and filters are sometimes used to suppress the transmission of
harmonics in an electrical system. See also Choke.

Horsepower

A unit of physical measure to quantify the amount of work done per
unit of time. You can directly convert between horsepower and
Watts as measurements of power.

IGBT

Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) – A semiconductor
transistor capable of conducting very large currents when in saturation and capable of withstanding very high voltages when it is OFF.
This high-power bipolar transistor is the type used in Hitachi inverters.

Inertia

The natural resistance a stationary object to being moved by an
external force. See also Momentum.

Intelligent Terminal

A configurable input or output logic function on the Hitachi inverters. Each terminal may be assigned one of several functions.

Inverter

A device that electronically changes DC to AC current through an
alternating process of switching the input to the output, inverted and
non-inverted. A variable speed drive such as the Hitachi L2002 is
also called an inverter, since it contains three inverter circuits to
generate 3-phase output to the motor.

Isolation Transformer A transformer with 1:1 voltage ratio that provides electrical isolation between its primary and secondary windings. These are
typically used on the power input side of the device to be protected.
An isolation transformer can protect equipment from a ground fault
or other malfunction of nearby equipment, as well as attenuate
harmful harmonics and transients on the input power.

L2002 Inverter

A–5

Usually done manually, a jog command from an operator’s panel
requests the motor/drive system to run indefinitely in a particular
direction, until the machine operator ends the jog operation.

Jump Frequency

A jump frequency is a point on the inverter output frequency range
that you want the inverter to skip around. This feature may be used
to avoid a resonant frequency, and you can program up to three
jump frequencies in the inverter.

Line Reactor

A three-phase inductor generally installed in the AC input circuit of
an inverter to minimize harmonics and to limit short-circuit current.

Momentum

The physical property of a body in motion that causes it to remain
in motion. In the case of motors, the rotor and attached load are
rotating and possesses angular momentum.

Multi-speed Operation The ability of a motor drive to store preset discrete speed levels for
the motor, and control motor speed according to the currently
selected speed preset. The Hitachi inverters have 16 preset speeds.

Motor Load

In motor terminology, motor load consists of the inertia of the
physical mass that is moved by the motor and the related friction
from guiding mechanisms. See also Inertia.

NEC

The National Electric Code is a regulatory document that governs
electrical power and device wiring and installation in the United
States.

NEMA

The National Electric Manufacturer’s Association. NEMA Codes
are a published series of device ratings standards. Industry uses
these to evaluate or compare the performance of devices made by
various manufacturers to a known standard.

Open-collector Outputs A common logic-type discrete output that uses an NPN transistor
that acts as a switch to a power supply common, usually ground.
The transistor’s collector is open for external connection (not
connected internally). Thus, the output sinks external load current to
ground.

Power Factor

A ratio that expresses a phase difference (timing offset) between
current and voltage supplied by a power source to a load. A perfect
power factor = 1.0 (no phase offset). Power factors less than one
cause some energy loss in power transmission wiring (source to
load).

PID Loop

Proportional - Integral-Derivative - A mathematical model used for
process control. A process controller maintains a process variable
(PV) at a setpoint (SP) by using its PID algorithm to compensate for
dynamic conditions and vary its output to drive the PV toward the
desired value. For variable-frequency drives, the process variable is
the motor speed. See also Error.

Appendix A

Jogging Operation

Appendix A

A–6

Glossary

Process Variable

A physical property of a process that is of interest because it affects
the quality of the primary task accomplished by the process. For an
industrial oven, temperature is the process variable. See also PID
Loop and Error.

PWM

Pulse-width modulation: A type of AC adjustable frequency drive
that accomplishes frequency and voltage control at the output
section (inverter) of the drive. The drive output voltage waveform is
at a constant amplitude, and by “chopping” the waveform (pulsewidth-modulating), the average voltage is controlled. The chopping
frequency is sometimes called the Carrier Frequency.

Reactance

The impedance of inductors and capacitors has two components.
The resistive part is constant, while the reactive part changes with
applied frequency. These devices have a complex impedance
(complex number), where the resistance is the real part and the
reactance is the imaginary part.

Rectifier

An electronic device made of one or more diodes that converts AC
power into DC power. Rectifiers are usually used in combination
with capacitors to filter (smooth) the rectified waveform to closely
approximate a pure DC voltage source.

Regenerative Braking A particular method of generating reverse torque to a motor, an
inverter will switch internally to allow the motor to become a generator and will either store the energy internally, deliver the braking
energy back to the main power input, or dissipate it with a resistor.

Regulation

The quality of control applied to maintain a parameter of interest at
a desired value. Usually expressed as a percent (±) from the
nominal, motor regulation usually refers to its shaft speed.

Reverse Torque

The torque applied in the direction opposite to motor shaft rotation.
As such, reverse torque is a decelerating force on the motor and its
external load.

Rotor

The windings of a motor that rotate, being physically coupled to the
motor shaft. See also Stator.

Saturation Voltage

For a transistor semiconductor device, it is in saturation when an
increase in input current no longer results in an increase in the
output current. The saturation voltage is the voltage drop across the
device. The ideal saturation voltage is zero.

Sensorless Vector
Control

A technique used in some variable-frequency drives (featured in
some other Hitachi inverter model families) to rotate the force
vector in the motor without the use of a shaft position sensor
(angular). Benefits include an increase in torque at the lowest speed
and the cost savings from the lack of a shaft position sensor.

L2002 Inverter

A–7

The setpoint is the desired value of a process variable of interest.
See also Process Variable (PV) and PID Loop.

Single-phase power

An AC power source consisting of Hot and Neutral wires. An Earth
Ground connection usually accompanies them. In theory, the
voltage potential on Neutral stays at or near Earth Ground, while
Hot varies sinusoidally above and below Neutral. This power source
is named Single Phase to differentiate it from three-phase power
sources. Some Hitachi inverters can accept single phase input
power, but they all output three-phase power to the motor. See also
Three-phase.

Slip

The difference between the theoretical speed of a motor at no load
(determined by its inverter output waveforms) and the actual speed.
Some slip is essential in order to develop torque to the load, but too
much will cause excessive heat in the motor windings and/or cause
the motor to stall.

Squirrel Cage

A “nick-name” for the appearance of the rotor frame assembly for
an AC induction motor.

Stator

The windings in a motor that are stationary and coupled to the
power input of the motor. See also Rotor.

Tachometer

1. A signal generator usually attached to the motor shaft for the
purpose of providing feedback to the speed controlling device of the
motor. 2. A speed-monitoring test meter that may optically sense
shaft rotation speed and display it on a readout.

Thermal Switch

An electromechanical safety device that opens to stop current flow
when the temperature at the device reaches a specific temperature
threshold. Thermal switches are sometimes installed in the motor in
order to protect the windings from heat damage. The inverter can
use thermal switch signals to trip (shut down) if the motor
overheats. See also Trip.

Thermistor

A type of temperature sensor that changes its resistance according
to its temperature. The sensing range of thermistors and their
ruggedness make them ideal for motor overheating detection.
Hitachi inverters have built-in thermistor input circuits, which can
detect an overheated motor and shut off (trip) the inverter output.

Three-phase power

An AC power source with three Hot connections that have phase
offsets of 120 degrees is a 3-phase power source. Usually, Neutral
and Earth Ground wires accompany the three Hot connections.
Loads may be configured in a delta or Y configuration. A Yconnected load such as an AC induction motor will be a balanced
load; the currents in all the Hot connections are the same. Therefore, the Neutral connection is theoretically zero. This is why
inverters that generate 3-phase power for motors do not generally
have a Neutral connection to the motor. However, the Earth Ground
connection is important for safety reasons, and is provided.

Appendix A

Setpoint (SP)

Appendix A

A–8

Bibliography

Torque

The rotational force exerted by a motor shaft. The units of measurement consist of the distance (radius from shaft center axis) and
force (weight) applied at that distance. Units are usually given as
pound-feet, ounce-inches, or Newton-meters.

Transistor

A solid state, three-terminal device that provides amplification of
signals and can be used for switching and control. While transistors
have a linear operating range, inverters use them as high-powered
switches. Recent developments in power semiconductors have
produced transistors capable of handling high voltages and currents,
all with high reliability. The saturation voltage has been decreasing,
resulting in less heat dissipation. Hitachi inverters use state-of-theart semiconductors to provide high performance and reliability in a
compact package. See also IGBT and Saturation Voltage.

Trip Event

An event that causes the inverter to stop operation is called a “trip”
event (as in tripping a circuit breaker). The inverter keeps a history
log of trip events. They also require an action to clear.

Watt Loss

A measure of the internal power loss of a component, the difference
between the power it consumes and what its output delivers. An
inverter’s watt loss is the input power minus the power delivered to
the motor. The watt loss is typically highest when an inverter is
delivering its maximum output. Therefore, watt loss is usually
specified for a particular output level. Inverter watt loss specifications are important when designing enclosures.

Bibliography
Title

Author and Publisher

Variable Speed Drive Fundamentals, 2nd Ed.

Phipps, Clarence A.
The Fairmont Press, Inc. / Prentice-Hall, Inc. 1997
ISBN 0-13-636390-3

Electronic Variable Speed Drives

Brumbach, Michael E.
Delmar Publishers 1997
ISBN 0-8273-6937-9

Hitachi Inverter Technical Guide Book

Published by Hitachi, Ltd. Japan 1995
Publication SIG-E002

ModBus Network
Communications
In This Appendix....

B
page

— Introduction ..................................................... 2
— Connecting the Inverter to ModBus................. 3
— Network Protocol Reference ........................... 6
— ModBus Data Listing ..................................... 19

B–2

Introduction

Introduction
L2002 Series inverters have built-in RS-485 serial communications, featuring the
ModBus RTU protocol. The inverters can connect directly to existing factory networks
or work with new networked applications, without any extra interface equipment. The
specifications for L2002 serial communications are in the following table.

Appendix B

Item

Specifications

User-selectable

Transmission speed

4800 / 9600 / 19200 bps

✔

Communication mode

Asynchronous

✘

Character code

Binary

✘

LSB placement

Transmits LSB first

✘

Electrical interface

RS-485 differential transceiver

✘

Data bits

8-bit (ModBus RTU mode)

Parity

None / even / odd

✔

Stop bits

1 or 2 bits

✔

Startup convention

One-way start from host device

✘

Wait time for response

0 to 1000 msec.

✔

Connections

Station address numbers from 1 to 32

✔

Connector

RJ45 modular jack

—

Error check

Overrun, Fleming block check code,
CRC-16, or horizontal parity

—

(ASCII mode not
available)

The network diagram below shows a series of inverters communicating with a host
computer. each inverter must have a unique address, from 1 to 32, on the network. In a
typical application, a host computer or controller is the master and each of the inverter(s)
or other devices is a slave.
Host computer

ModBus Network
1

2
POWER

HITACHI

5 0.0

ALARM

POWER

HITACHI

5 0.0

RUN

STOP
RESET

ALARM

POWER

HITACHI

5 0.0

A
RUN

RUN

FUNC.

PRG

RUN
STR

L2002

FUNC.

STOP
RESET

ALARM

Hz
A
RUN

PRG

RUN
STR

L2002

FUNC.

STOP
RESET

PRG

STR

L2002

L2002 Inverter

B–3

Connecting the Inverter to ModBus
Follow the steps in this section to connect the inverter to the ModBus network.
1. Open Serial Port Cover - The inverter keypad has a hinged dust cover protecting the
serial port connector. Lift the cover from the bottom edge, and tilt upward as shown
(below left).
2. Modular Interconnect Removal - With the serial port cover opened, notice the RJ45
modular connector behind it. Connect the serial cable and engage the locking tab in
the connector as shown (below right).

Serial cable with RJ45 end

Dust
cover

3. Cable Wiring - The inverter communications
port uses RS485 differential transceiver. The
pinout is shown to the right and listed below. Be
sure the cable connection you make matches the
diagram.

5 0.0

Symbol

Description

—

Not used. Do not connect

—

Not used. Do not connect

—

Not used. Do not connect

—

Not used. Do not connect

Send/Receive data Positive

Send/Receive data Negative

—

Not used. Do not connect

—

Not used. Do not connect

ALARM

Hz
A
RUN

RUN
FUNC.

POWER

HITACHI

STOP
RESET

PRG

STR

L2002

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
S S
Not used N P Not used

Appendix B

RJ45 modular
communications
connector

B–4

Connecting the Inverter to ModBus
4. Terminate Network Wiring - The RS-485 wiring must be terminated at each
physical end to suppress electrical reflections and help decrease transmission errors.
The L2002 communications port does not include a termination resistor. Therefore,
you will need to add termination to the inverter if it is at the end of the network
wiring. Select termination resistors that match the characteristic impedance of the
network cable. The diagram below shows a network with the needed termination
resistor at each end.

Appendix B

ModBus
Network
POWER

HITACHI

5 0.0
RUN
FUNC.

Host device

ALARM

POWER

HITACHI

5 0.0

STOP
RESET

POWER

HITACHI

ALARM

5 0.0

A
RUN

RUN
PRG

RUN
STR

L2002

FUNC.

STOP
RESET

ALARM

Hz
A
RUN

PRG

RUN
STR

FUNC.

L2002

STOP
RESET

PRG

STR

L2002

5. Set Inverter OPE/485 Switch - The inverter serial port accepts a connection to either
a remote keypad device or to the network. You will need to set the DIP switch on the
inverter to configure the port for ModBus communications. Setting the switch will
require removing the front housing cover. Remember to power OFF the inverter
before removing the cover or changing the DIP switch setting. Refer to “Front
Housing Cover” on page 2–3 for detailed instructions.
Locate the OPE/485 DIP switch as shown in the figure below. Carefully move the
switch to the upper position labeled “485” (slide in direction of arrow). Then replace
the front housing cover.

485

OPE

PRG

At this point the electrical network connection is complete. The next step will show
how to configure parameters and settings related to ModBus communications.

L2002 Inverter

B–5

6. Inverter Parameter Setup - The inverter has several settings related to ModBus
communications. The table below lists them together. The Required column indicates
which parameters must be set properly to allow communications. You may need to
refer to the host computer documentation in order to match some of its settings.
Func.
Code

Name

Required

Settings

Frequency source setting

✔

00... Keypad potentiometer
01... Control terminal
02... Function F001 setting
03... ModBus network input
10... Calculate function output

A002

Run command source setting

✔

01... Control terminal
02... Run key on keypad, or digital operator
03... ModBus network input

B089

Monitor display select for
networked inverter

—

01... Output frequency monitor
02... Output current monitor
03... Rotation direction monitor
04... Process variable (PV), PID feedback
monitor
05... Intelligent input terminal status
06... Intelligent output terminal status
07... Scaled output frequency monitor

C071

Communication speed selection

✔

04... 4800 bps
05... 9600 bps
06... 19200 bps

C072

Node allocation

✔

Network address, range is 1 to 32

C074

Communication parity selection

✔

00... No parity
01... Even parity
02... Odd parity

C075

Communication stop bit selection

✔

Range is 1 to 2

C076

Communication error select

—

00... Trip (error code E60)
01... Decelerate to a stop and trip (error code
E60)
02... Disable
03... Free run stop (coasting)
04... Decelerate to a stop

C077

Communication error time-out

—

Comm. watchdog timer period,
range is 0.00 to 99.99 sec.

C078

Communication wait time

✔

Time the inverter waits after receiving a
message before it transmits.
Range is 0. to 1000. ms

NOTE: When you edit and store any of the parameters above, the inverter causes it to
take effect immediately. ModBus transmission occurs only after you set the OPE/485
DIP switch to the “485” position and turn on the inverter. Note that parameters C071 to
C078 cannot be changed via the network. To edit them, reconnect the inverter keypad (or
other digital operator) and edit the parameters.

Appendix B

A001

B–6

Network Protocol Reference

Network Protocol Reference
Transmission procedure
The transmission between the external control equipment and the inverter takes the
procedure below
External control
equipment

Query

Response

Appendix B

Inverter
t
Latency time
(silent interval plus C078 setting)

• Query - A frame sent from the external control equipment to the inverter
• Response - A frame returned from inverter to the external control equipment
The inverter returns the response only after the inverter receives a query from the
external control equipment and does not output the response positively. Each frame is
formatted (with commands) as follows:
Frame Format
Header (silent interval)
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
trailer (silent interval)

Message Configuration: Query
Slave address:
• This is a number of 1 to 32 assigned to each inverter (slave). (Only the inverter having
the address given as a slave address in the query can receive the query.)
• When slave address “0” is specified, the query can be addressed to all inverters simultaneously. (Broadcasting)
• In broadcasting, you cannot call and loop back data.

L2002 Inverter

B–7

Data:
• A function command is set here.
• The data format used in the L2002 series is corresponding to the Modbus data format
below.
Name of Data

Description

Coil

Binary data that can be referenced and changed (1 bit long)

Holding Register

16-bit data that can be referenced and changed

Function code:

Function
Code

Function

Maximum data size
(bytes available per
message)

Maximum number of
data elements available
per message

01h

Read Coil Status

32 coils (in bits)

03h

Read Holding Register

4 registers (in bytes)

05h

Write in Coil

1 coil (in bits)

06h

Write in Holding Register

1registers (in bytes)

08h

Loopback Test

—

0Fh

Write in Coils

32 coils (in bits)

10h

Write in Registers

4 registers (in bytes)

—

Error check:
Modbus-RTU uses CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) for error checking.
• The CRC code is 16-bit data that is generated for 8-bit blocks of arbitrary length.
• The CRC code is generated by a generator polynomial CRC-16 (X16+ X15+ X2+ 1).
Header and trailer (silent interval):
Latency is the time between the reception of a query from the master and transmission of
a response from the inverter.
• 3.5 characters (24 bits) are always required for latency time. If the latency time shorter
than 3.5 characters, the inverter returns no response.
• The actual transmission latency time is the sum of silent interval (3.5 characters long)
+ C078 (transmission latency time).

Appendix B

Specify a function you want to make the inverter execute. Function codes available to the
L2002 series are listed below.

B–8

Network Protocol Reference

Message Configuration: Response
Transmission time required:
• A time period between reception of a query from the master and transmission of a
response from the inverter is the sum of the silent interval (3.5 characters long) + C078
(transmission latency time).
• The master must provide a time period of the silent interval (3.5 characters long or
longer) before sending another query to an inverter after receiving a response from the
inverter.

Appendix B

Normal response:
• When receiving a query that contains a function code of Loopback (08h), the inverter
returns a response of the same content of the query.
• When receiving a query that contains a function code of Write in Register or Coil
(05h, 06h, 0Fh, or 10h), the inverter directly returns the query as a response.
• When receiving a query that contains a function code of Read Register or Coil (01h or
03h), the inverter returns, as a response, the read data together with the same slave
address and function code as those of the query.
Response when an error occurs:
• When finding any error in a query (except for a transmission error), the inverter
returns an exception response without executing anything.
• You can check the error by the function code in the response. The function code of the
exception response is the sum of the function code of the query and 80h.
• The content of the error is known from the exception code.
Field Configuration
Slave address
Function code
Exception code
CRC–16
Exception
Code

Description

01h

The specified function is not supported

02h

The specified address is not found.

03h

The format of the specified data is not acceptable.

21h

The data to be written in a holding register is outside the inverter.

22h

The specified functions are not available to the inverter.

• Function to change the content of a register that cannot be changed while the
inverter is in service
• Function to submit an ENTER command during running (UV)
• Function to write in a register during tripping (UV)
• Function to write in a read-only register (or coil)

L2002 Inverter

B–9

No response occurs:
In the cases below, the inverter ignores a query and returns no response.
• When receiving a broadcasting query
• When detecting a transmission error in reception of a query
• When the slave address set in the query is not equal to the slave address of the inverter
• When a time interval between data elements constituting a message is shorter than 3.5
characters
• When the data length of the query is invalid

Appendix B

NOTE: Provide a timer in the master and make the master retransmit the same query
when no response is made within a preset time period after the preceding query was sent.

B–10

Network Protocol Reference

Explanation of function codes
Read Coil Status [01h]:
This function reads the status (ON/OFF) of selected coils. An example follows below.
• Read intelligent input terminals [1] to [5] of an inverter having a slave address “8.”
• This example assumes the intelligent input terminals have terminal states listed below.

Appendix B

Item

Data

Intelligent input
terminal

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

Coil Status

OFF

Query:

Response:

No.

Field Name

Example
(Hex)

No.

Example
(Hex)

Field Name

Slave address *1

Slave address

Function code

Coil start number
(high order)

Data size (in bytes)

Coil data *3

Coil start number
(low order)

CRC-16 (high order)

Number of coils
(high order) *2

CRC-16 (low order)

Number of coils (low
order) *2

CRC-16 (high order)

CRC-16 (low order)

Note 1:
Note 2:

Note 3:

Data is transferred by the
specified number of data bytes
(data size).

Broadcasting is disabled.
When 0 or more than 32 is
specified as a number of coils,
error code “03h” is returned.

• The data set in the response shows terminal states of coils 7 to 14.
• Data “17h = 00010111b” indicates the following assuming coil 7 is the LSB.
Item

Data

Coil Number

Coil Status

OFF

B–11

L2002 Inverter
• When a read coil is outside the defined coils, the final coil data to be transmitted
contains “0“as the status of the coil outside the range.

• When the Read Coil Status command cannot be executed normally, see the exception
response.
Read Holding Register [03h]:
This function reads the contents of the specified number of consecutive holding registers
(of specified register addresses). An example follows below.
• Reading previous three trip factors from an inverter having a slave address “5”
• This example assumes the previous three trip factors are as follows:
D081 (N)

D082 (N-1)

D083 (N-2)

Coil Number

0019h

001Ah

0018h

Trip factor

Over-voltage (E07)

Under-voltage (E09)

No trip

Query:
No.

.Response:
Field Name

Example
(Hex)

No.

Field Name

Example
(Hex)

Slave address *1

Slave address

Function code

Data size (in bytes) *2

Number of holding
registers (high order)

Number of holding
registers (low order)

CRC-16 (high order)

7
8

CRC-16 (low order)

CRC-16 (high order)

CRC-16 (low order)

Note 1:

Broadcasting is disabled.

Note 2:

Data is transferred by the
specified number of data bytes
(data size). In this case, 6 bytes
are used to return the content
of three holding registers.

Appendix B

L2002 Command

B–12

Network Protocol Reference
The data set in the response is as follows:
Response Buffer

Coil Number

+ 0 (high
order)

+ 0 (low
order)

+ 1 (high
order)

+ 1 (low
order)

+ 2 (high
order)

+ 2 (low
order)

Coil Status

00h

07h

00h

09h

00h

FFh

Trip data

Over-voltage trip

Under-voltage trip

No trip

Appendix B

When the Read Coil Status command cannot be executed normally, refer to the
exception response.
Write in Coil [05h]:
This function writes data in a single coil. Coil status changes are as follows:
Coil Status
Data
OFF to ON

ON to OFF

Change data (high order)

FFh

00h

Change data (low order)

00h

An example follows (note that to command the inverter, set A002=03):
• Sending a RUN command to an inverter having slave address “10”
• This example writes in coil number “1.”
Query:
No.

Response:
Field Name

Example
(Hex)

No.

Field Name

Example
(Hex)

Slave address *1

Slave address

Function code

Coil start number
(high order)

Coil start number
(low order)

Change data
(high order)

Change data
(low order)

CRC-16 (high order)

CRC-16 (low order)

Note 1:

No response is made for a
broadcasting query.

B–13

L2002 Inverter
When writing in a selected coil fails, see the exception response.
Write in Holding Register [06h]:
This function writes data in a specified holding register. An example follows:

• Write “50Hz” as the first Multi-speed 0 (A020) in an inverter having slave address
“5.”
• This example uses change data “500(1F4h)” to set “50Hz” as the data resolution of the
register “003Ah” holding the first Multi-speed 0 (A020) is 0.1Hz
Query:
Field Name

Example
(Hex)

No.

Field Name

Example
(Hex)

Slave address *1

Slave address

Function code

Change data
(high order)

Change data
(low order)

CRC-16 (high order)

CRC-16 (low order)

Note 1:

No response is made for a
broadcasting query.

When writing in a selected holding register fails, see the exception response.

Appendix B

No.

Response:

B–14

Network Protocol Reference
Loopback Test [08h]:
This function checks a master-slave transmission using any test data. An example
follows:
• Send test data to an inverter having slave address “1” and receiving the test data from
the inverter (as a loopback test).
Query:

Appendix B

No.

Response:
Field Name

Example
(Hex)

No.

Field Name

Example
(Hex)

Slave address *1

Slave address

Function code

Test subcode
(high order)

Test subcode
(low order)

Data
(high order)

Any

Data
(high order)

Any

Data
(low order)

Any

Data
(low order)

Any

CRC-16 (high order)

CRC

CRC-16 (high order)

CRC

CRC-16 (low order)

CRC

CRC-16 (low order)

CRC

Note 1:

Broadcasting is disabled.

The test subcode is for echo (00h,00h) only and not available to the other commands.

B–15

L2002 Inverter
Write in Coils [0Fh]:
This function writes data in consecutive coils. An example follows:

• Change the state of intelligent input terminal [1] to [5] of an inverter having a slave
address “5.”
• This example assumes the intelligent input terminals have terminal states listed below.
Item
Intelligent input terminal

Data
[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

OFF

Coil number
Terminal status

No.

Response:
Field Name

Example
(Hex)

No.

Field Name

Example
(Hex)

Slave address *1

Slave address

Function code

Coil start number
(high order)

Data size (in bytes)

Coil data *3

Coil start number
(low order)

Number of coils
(high order)

Number of coils
(low order)

Number of coils (low
order)

CRC-16 (high order)

Byte number *2

CRC-16 (low order)

Change data
(high order) *2

Change data
(low order) *2

CRC-16 (high order)

CRC-16 (low order)

Note 1:
Note 2:

Broadcasting is disabled.
The change data is a set of
high-order data and low-order
data. So when the size (in
bytes) of data to be changed is
an odd number, add “1” to the
data size (in bytes) to make it
an even number.

Appendix B

Query:

B–16

Network Protocol Reference
Writing in Holding Registers [10h]:
This function writes data in consecutive holding registers. An example follows:
• Write “3000 seconds” as the first acceleration time 1 (F002) in an inverter having a
slave address “1.”
• This example uses change data “300000(493E0h)” to set “3000 seconds” as the data
resolution of the registers “0024h” and “0025h” holding the first acceleration time 1
(F002) is 0.01 second.
Query:

Appendix B

No.

Response:
Field Name

Example
(Hex)

No.

Field Name

Example
(Hex)

Slave address *1

Slave address

Function code

Start address (high
order)

Start address (low
order)

Number of holding
registers (high order)

Number of holding
registers (low order)

Byte number *2

CRC-16 (high order)

Change data 1
(high order)

CRC-16 (low order)

Change data 1
(low order)

Change data 2
(high order)

Change data 2
(low order)

CRC-16 (high order)

CRC-16 (low order)

Note 1:
Note 2:

Broadcasting is disabled.
This is not the number of
holding registers. Specify the
number of bytes of data to be
changed.

When writing in selected holding registers fails, see the exception response.

L2002 Inverter

B–17

Exception Response:
When sending a query (excluding a broadcasting query) to an inverter, the master always
requests a response from the inverter. Usually, the inverter returns a response according
to the query. However, when finding an error in the query, the inverter returns an exception response. The exception response consists of the fields shown below.
Field Configuration
Slave address
Function code
Exception code

The content of each field is explained below. The function code of the exception
response is the sum of the function code of the query and 80h. The exception code
indicates the factor of the exception response.
Function Code
Query

Exception Response

01h

81h

03h

83h

05h

85h

06h

86h

0Fh

8Fh

10h

90h

Exception Code
Code

Description

01h

The specified function is not supported.

02h

The specified address is not found.

03h

The format of the specified data is not acceptable.

21h

The data to be written in a holding register is outside the inverter

22h

These specified functions are not available to the inverter:

Appendix B

CRC–16

B–18

Network Protocol Reference

Store New Register Data (ENTER command)
After being written in a selected holding register by the Write in Holding Register
command (06h) or in selected holding registers by the Write in Holding Registers
command (10h), new data is temporary and still outside the storage element of the
inverter. If power to the inverter is shut off, this new data is lost and the previous data
returns. The ENTER command is used to store this new data in the storage element of
the inverter. Follow the instructions below to submit the ENTER command.
Submitting an ENTER Command:

Appendix B

• Write any data in all memory (of a holding register at 0900h) by the Write in Holding
Register command [06h].
NOTE: The ENTER command takes much time to run. You can check its progress by
monitoring the Data Writing signal (of a coil at 001Ah).
NOTE: The service life of the storage element of the inverter is limited (to about
100,000 write operations). Frequent use of the ENTER command may shorten its service
life.

L2002 Inverter

B–19

ModBus Data Listing
ModBus Coil List
The following tables list the primary coils for the inverter interface to the network. The
table legend is given below.
• Coil Number - The network register address offset for the coil, in hex and decimal.
Actual network address is 30001 + offset. The coil data is a single bit (binary) value.
• Name - The functional name of the coil
• R/W - The read-only (R) or read-write (R/W) access permitted to the inverter data
• Description - The meaning of each of the states of the coils

Coil Number
hex

Name

R/W

Description

—

dec.

0000h 00000 (Reserved)
0001h 00001 Run command

R/W 0 .... Stop
1 .... Run (enabled when A003=03)

0002h 00002 FW/REV command

R/W 0 .... REV
1 .... FW (enabled when A003=03)

0003h 00003 External trip (EXT)

R/W 0 .... No trip event
1 .... Trip occurred

0004h 00004 Trip reset (RS)

R/W 0 .... No reset condition
1 .... Reset

0005h 00005 (Reserved)

—

0006h 00006 (Reserved)

—

0007h 00007 Intelligent input terminal 1
0008h 00008 Intelligent input terminal 2

R/W 0 .... OFF
1 .... ON
R/W

0009h 00009 Intelligent input terminal 3

R/W

000Ah 00010 Intelligent input terminal 4

R/W

000Bh 00011 Intelligent input terminal 5

R/W

000Dh 00013 (Not used)

—

000Eh 00014 Run/Stop status

0 .... Stop (corresponds to D003
monitor)
1 .... Run

000Fh 00015 FW/REV status

0 .... FW
1 .... RV

0010h 00016 Inverter ready

0 .... Not ready
1 .... Ready

0011h 00017 (Reserved)

—

0012h 00018 (Reserved)

—

Appendix B

List of Coil Numbers

B–20

ModBus Data Listing

List of Coil Numbers
Coil Number

R/W

Description

0013h 00019 (Reserved)

—

0014h 00020 Alarm signal

0..... Normal
1..... Trip

0015h 00021 PID deviation signal

0016h 00022 Overload signal

0..... OFF
1..... ON

0017h 00023 Frequency arrival signal
(set frequency or above)

0018h 00024 Frequency arrival signal
(at constant speed)

0019h 00025 Run Mode signal

001Ah 00026 Data writing

0..... Normal status
1..... Writing

001Bh 00027 CRC error

001Ch 00028 Overrun error

0..... No error
1..... Error

001Dh 00029 Framing error

001Eh 00030 Parity error

001Fh 00031 Check sum error

Appendix B

hex

Note 1:

Note 2:

Name

dec.

ON usually when either the control circuit terminal board or a coil is ON.
Among intelligent input terminals, the control circuit terminal board is a highpriority terminal. If the master cannot reset the coil ON status due to a transmission line break, turn ON and OFF the control circuit terminal board to
make the coil OFF status.
The content of a transmission error is held until the error is reset. (The error
can be reset while the inverter is running.)

L2002 Inverter

B–21

ModBus Holding Registers
The following tables list the holding registers for the inverter interface to the network.
The table legend is given below.
• Function Code - The inverter’s reference code for the parameter or function (same as
inverter keypad display)
• Name - The standard functional name of the parameter or function for the inverter
• R/W - The read-only or read-write access permitted to the data in the inverter
• Description - How the parameter or setting works (same as Chapter 3 description).

• Range - The numerical range for the network value that is sent and/or received
TIP: The network values are binary integers. Since these values cannot have an
embedded decimal point, for many parameters it represents the actual value (in engineering units) multiplied by a factor of 10 or 100. Network communications must use the
listed range for network data. The inverter automatically divides received values by the
appropriate factor in order to establish the decimal point for internal use. Likewise, the
network host computer must apply the same factor when it needs to work in engineering
units. However, when sending data to the inverter, the network host computer must scale
values to the integer range listed for network communications.
• Resolution - This is the quantity represented by the LSB of the network value, in
engineering units. When the network data range is greater than the inverter’s internal
data range, this 1-bit resolution will be fractional.
List of Holding Registers
Network Data
Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

Reg.ister
Range

Res.

0002h 00002

0 to
4000

0.1 Hz

0003h 00003

0 to 9

—

hex
—

Output frequency
command

—

Inverter status

Inverter output frequency (set
A001=03 to enable this
network register),
range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
R/W 00 ...Initial status
01 ...(Reserved)
02 ...Stop Mode
03 ...Run Mode
04 ...Free-run stop (FRS)
05 ...Jogging
06 ...DC braking
07 ...Retry
08 ...Trip alarm
09 ...Under-voltage

dec.

Appendix B

• Register - The network register address offset for the value, in hex and decimal.
Actual network address is 40001 + offset. Some values have a high-byte and low-byte
address.

B–22

ModBus Data Listing

List of Holding Registers
Network Data
Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

Reg.ister
hex

Res.

PID loop PV value from the
network (set A076=02 to
enable this setting), range is
0.0 to 100.0%

0005h 00005

0 to
1000

0.1%

D001 Output frequency
monitor

Real-time display of output
frequency to motor, from
0.0 to 400.0 Hz

1002h 04098

0 to
4000

0.1 Hz

D002 Output current monitor
*1

Filtered display of output
current to motor (100 ms
internal filter time constant),
range is 0 to 200% of inverter
rated current

1003h 04099

0 to
2000

0.1%

D003 Rotation direction
monitor

Three different indications:
00 ...Stop
01 ...Forward
02 ...Reverse

1004h 04100

0, 1, 2

—

D004 Process variable (PV),
(high) PID feedback monitor

1005h 04101

0 to
999900

D004
(low)

Displays the scaled PID
process variable (feedback)
value (A075 is scale factor),
range is 0.00 to 99900

0.00%
times
const.

D005 Intelligent input
terminal status

Displays the state of the intelligent input terminals [x],
Bit 0 = [1] to Bit 4 = [5]

1007h 04103

0 to 31

—

D006 Intelligent output
terminal status

Displays the state of the intelligent output terminals [x],
Bit 0 = [11], Bit 1 = [12],
Bit 2 = [AL]

1008h 04104

0 to 7

—

D007 Scaled output frequency
(high) monitor

0 to
999999

D007
(low)

Displays the output frequency 1009h 04105
scaled by the constant in
B086. Decimal point indicates
100Ah 04106
range:
0.00 to 99999

0.01 Hz
times
const.

D013 Output voltage monitor

Voltage of output to motor,
range is 0.00 to 200.00%

100Ch 04108

0 to
20000

0.01%

D016 Cumulative operation
(high) RUN time monitor

100Eh 04110

0 to
999999

1 hour

D016
(low)

Displays total time the
inverter has been in RUN
mode in hours.
Range is 0 to 999000

D017 Cumulative power-on
(high) time monitor

1010h 04112

0 to
999999

1 hour

D017
(low)

Displays total time the
inverter has been in RUN
mode in hours.
Range is 0 to 999000

—

Appendix B

Range
dec.

Process Variable (PV)

1006h 04102

100Fh 04111

1011h 04113

B–23

L2002 Inverter

List of Holding Registers
Network Data
Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

Reg.ister
hex

D080 Trip counter

Note 1:

Number of trip events,
range is 0 to 65535

Range

Res.

0 to
65535

1 trip
event

dec.

0011h 00024

Assume that the inverter current rating is 1000 (for D002).

Holding Registers, “D” Group Monitor Functions
Network Data
Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

D081

D082

Trip monitor 1

Trip monitor 2

dec.

Trip monitor 1: factor code

0012h 00018

—

Frequency

0014h 00020

0.1 Hz

Current

0016h 00022

0.1 %

Voltage

0017h 00023

0.1 V

Run time (high)

0018h 00024

1. h

Run time (low)

0019h 00025

ON time (high)

001Ah 00026

ON time (low)

001Bh 00027

Trip monitor 1: factor code

001Ch 00028

—

Frequency

001Eh 00030

0.1 Hz

Current

0020h 00032

0.1 %

Voltage

0021h 00033

0.1 V

Run time (high)

0022h 00034

1. h

Run time (low)

0023h 00035

ON time (high)

0024h 00036

ON time (low)

0025h 00037

1. h

Appendix B

The following table lists holding registers for the “D” Group Monitor Functions.

B–24

ModBus Data Listing

Holding Registers, “D” Group Monitor Functions
Network Data
Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

Appendix B

D083

Trip monitor 3

dec.

Trip monitor 1: factor code

0026h 00272

—

Frequency

0028h 00273

0.1 Hz

Current

002Ah 00274

0.1 %

Voltage

002Bh 00275

0.1 V

Run time (high)

002Ch 00276

1. h

Run time (low)

002Dh 00277

ON time (high)

002Eh 00278

ON time (low)

002Fh 00279

1. h

L2002 Inverter

B–25

The table below lists the holding registers for the “F” Group Main Profile Parameters.
Holding Registers, “F” Group Main Profile Parameters
Network Data
Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

R/W Standard default acceleration,
range is 0.01 to 3000 sec.

1014h 04116

F002
(low)

R/W

1015h 04117

F202 Acceleration (1) time
(high) setting, 2nd motor *1

R/W Standard default acceleration,
2nd motor,
range is 0.01 to 3000 sec.
R/W

1501h 05377

R/W Standard default deceleration,
range is
0.01 to 3000 sec.
R/W

1016h 04118

R/W Standard default deceleration,
2nd motor,
range is 0.01 to 3000 sec.
R/W

1503h 05379

F003 Deceleration (1) time
(high) setting *1
F003
(low)
F203 Deceleration (1) time
(high) setting, 2nd motor *1
F203
(low)
F004

Keypad Run key routing R/W Two options; select codes:
00 ...Forward
01 ...Reverse

Note 1:

Res.

1 to
300000

0.01
sec

1 to
300000

0.01
sec

1 to
300000

0.01
sec

1 to
300000

0.01
sec

0, 1

—

1502h 05378

1017h 04119

1504h 05380
1018h 04120

When the value is 10000 (100.0 seconds), a value in the second decimal place
is ignored.

Appendix B

F002 Acceleration (1) time
(high) setting *1

F202
(low)

Range
dec.

B–26

ModBus Data Listing
The following table lists the holding registers for the “A” Group Standard Functions.
Holding Registers for “A” Group Standard Functions
Network Data

Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

Appendix B

hex

Range

Res.

dec.

A001 Frequency source
setting

1019h
R/W Five options; select codes:
00... Keypad potentiometer
01... Control terminal
02... Function F001 setting
03... ModBus network input
10... Calculate function output

04121

0 to 3, 10

—

A002 Run command source
setting

R/W Three options; select codes:
01... Control terminal
02... Run key on keypad, or
digital operator
03... ModBus network input

101Ah

04122

1, 2, 3

—

A003 Base frequency setting

R/W Settable from 30 Hz to the
maximum frequency

101Bh

04123

30 to
max. freq.

1 Hz

A203 Base frequency setting,
2nd motor

R/W Settable from 30 Hz to the
2nd maximum frequency

150Ch

05388

30 to
max. freq.
2

1 Hz

A004 Maximum frequency
setting

R/W Settable from the base
frequency up to 400 Hz

101Ch

04124

30 to 400

1 Hz

A204 Maximum frequency
setting, 2nd motor

R/W Settable from the 2nd base
frequency up to 400 Hz

150Dh 05389

30 to 400

1 Hz

A005 [AT] selection

R/W Four options, select codes:
00... Select between [O] and
[OI] at [AT]
01... [O] + [OI] ([AT] input is
ignored)
02... Select between [O] and
keypad potentiometer
03... Select between [OI] and
keypad potentiometer

101Dh

04125

0, 1, 2, 3

—

A011 O–L input active range
start frequency

R/W The output frequency corresponding to the analog input
range starting point,
range is 0.0 to 400.0

1020h

04128

0 to 4000

0.1 Hz

A012 O–L input active range
end frequency

R/W The output frequency corresponding to the analog input
range ending point,
range is 0.0 to 400.0

1022h

04130

0 to 4000

0.1 Hz

A013 O–L input active range
start voltage

R/W The starting point (offset) for
the active analog input range,
range is 0. to 100

1023h

04131

0 to 100

L2002 Inverter

B–27

Holding Registers for “A” Group Standard Functions
Network Data
Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

dec.

Range

Res.

R/W The ending point (offset) for
the active analog input range,
range is 0. to 100.

1024h

04132

0 to 100

A015 O–L input start
frequency enable

R/W Two options; select codes:
00... Use offset (A011 value)
01... Use 0 Hz

1025h

04133

0, 1

—

A016 External frequency
filter time constant

R/W Range n = 1 to 16, where n = 1026h
number of samples for avg.
Set = 17 to use 16-sample avg.

04134

1 to 17

1
sample

A020 Multi-speed 0 setting

1029h
R/W Defines the first speed of a
multi-speed profile, range is
0.0 / start frequency to 400 Hz
A020 = Speed 0 (1st motor)

04137

0 / start
freq. to
4000

0.1 Hz

A220 Multi-speed 0 setting,
2nd motor

150Fh
R/W Defines the first speed of a
multi-speed profile, range is
0.0 / start frequency to 400 Hz
A220 = Speed 0 (2nd motor)

00059

0 / start
freq. to
4000

0.1 Hz

A021 Multi-speed 1 setting

R/W

102Bh

04139

0.1 Hz

A022 Multi-speed 2 setting

R/W

102Dh 04141

0 / start
freq. to
4000

A023 Multi-speed 3 setting

R/W

102Fh

04143

A024 Multi-speed 4 setting

R/W

1031h

04145

A025 Multi-speed 5 setting

R/W

1033h

04147

A026 Multi-speed 6 setting

R/W

1035h

04149

A027 Multi-speed 7 setting

R/W

1037h

04151

A028 Multi-speed 8 setting

R/W

1039h

04153

A029 Multi-speed 9 setting

R/W

103Bh

04155

A030 Multi-speed 10 setting

R/W

103Dh 04157

A031 Multi-speed 11 setting

R/W

103Fh

04159

A032 Multi-speed 12 setting

R/W

1041h

04161

A033 Multi-speed 13 setting

R/W

1043h

04163

A034 Multi-speed 14 setting

R/W

1045h

04165

A035 Multi-speed 15 setting

R/W

1047h

04167

A038 Jog frequency setting

R/W Defines limited speed for jog,
range is 0.00 / start frequency
to 9.99 Hz

1048h

04168

0 / start
freq. to
999

0.01 Hz

Defines 15 more speeds,
range is 0.0 / start frequency
to 400 Hz.
A021= Speed 1...
A035 = Speed 15

Appendix B

A014 O–L input active range
end voltage

B–28

ModBus Data Listing

Holding Registers for “A” Group Standard Functions
Network Data

Appendix B

Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

dec.

Range

Res.

A039 Jog stop mode

R/W Define how end of jog stops
the motor; three options:
00... Free-run stop
01... Controlled deceleration
02... DC braking to stop

1049h

04169

0, 1, 2

—

A041 Torque boost select

R/W Two options:
00... Manual torque boost
R/W 01... Automatic torque boost

104Ah

04170

0, 1

—

1510h

05392

R/W Can boost starting torque
between 0 and 20% above
normal V/f curve,
R/W range is 0.0 to 20.0%

104Bh

04171

0 to 200

0.1 %

1511h

05393

R/W Sets the frequency of the V/f
breakpoint A in graph (top of
previous page) for torque
R/W boost, range is 0.0 to 50.0%

104Ch

04172

0 to 500

0.1 %

1512h

05394

R/W Two available V/f curves;
two select codes:
00... Constant torque
R/W 01... Reduced torque

104Dh

04173

0, 1, 2

—

1513h

05395

A045 V/f gain setting

R/W Sets voltage gain of the
inverter, range is 20. to 100.%

104Eh

04174

20 to 100

A051 DC braking enable

R/W Two options; select codes:
00... Disable
01... Enable

1051h

04177

0, 1

—

A052 DC braking frequency
setting

R/W The frequency at which DC
braking begins,
range is from the start
frequency (B082) to 60 Hz

1052h

04178

(B082 x
10) to 600

0.1 Hz

A053 DC braking wait time

1053h
R/W The delay from the end of
controlled deceleration to start
of DC braking (motor free
runs until DC braking begins),
range is 0.0 to 5.0 sec.

04179

0, 1

—

A054 DC braking force for
deceleration

R/W Level of DC braking force,
settable from 0 to 100%

1054h

04180

0 to 100

A055 DC braking time for
deceleration

R/W Sets the duration for DC
braking, range is 0.0 to 60.0
seconds

1055h

04181

0 to 600

0.1 sec

A241 Torque boost select, 2nd
motor
A042 Manual torque boost
value
A242 Manual torque boost
value, 2nd motor
A043 Manual torque boost
frequency adjustment
A243 Manual torque boost
frequency adjustment,
2nd motor
A044 V/f characteristic curve
selection
A244 V/f characteristic curve
selection, 2nd motor

L2002 Inverter

B–29

Holding Registers for “A” Group Standard Functions
Network Data
Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

dec.

Range

Res.

R/W Two options; select codes:
00... Edge detection
01... Level detection

1056h

04182

0, 1

—

A061 Frequency upper limit
setting

R/W Sets a limit on output
frequency less than the
maximum frequency (A004).
R/W Range is from frequency
lower limit (A062) to
maximum frequency (A004).
0.0.. setting is disabled
>0.1 setting is enabled

105Ah

04186

0.1 Hz

1517h

05399

(A062 x
10) to
(A004 x
10),
0=disable
>1=enabl
e

R/W Sets a limit on output
frequency greater than zero.
Range is start frequency
R/W (B082) to frequency upper
limit (A061).
0.0.. setting is disabled
>0.1 setting is enabled

105Bh

04187

0.1 Hz

1518h

05400

(B082 x
10) to
(A061 x
10),
0=disable
>1=enabl
e

A063, Jump (center) frequency R/W Up to 3 output frequencies
A065, setting
can be defined for the output
A067
to jump past to avoid motor
resonances (center frequency)
Range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

105Dh
1060h
1063h

04189
04192
04195

0 to 4000

0.1 Hz

A064, Jump (hysteresis)
A066, frequency width setting
A068

R/W Defines the distance from the
center frequency at which the
jump around occurs
Range is 0.0 to 10.0 Hz

105Eh
1061h
1064h

04190
04193
04196

0 to 100

0.1 Hz

A071 PID Enable

R/W Enables PID function,
two option codes:
00... PID Disable
01... PID Enable

1068h

04200

0, 1

—

A072 PID proportional gain

R/W Proportional gain has a range
of 0.2 to 5.0

1069h

04201

2 to 50

0.1

A073 PID integral time
constant

R/W Integral time constant has a
range of 0.0 to 150 seconds

106Ah 04202

0 to 1500

0.1 sec

A074 PID derivative time
constant

R/W Derivative time constant has a
range of 0.0 to 100 seconds

106Bh

04203

0 to 1000

0.1 sec

A075 PV scale conversion

R/W Process Variable (PV) scale
factor (multiplier), range of
0.01 to 99.99

106Ch

04204

1 to 9999

0.01

A261 Frequency upper limit
setting, 2nd motor

A062 Frequency lower limit
setting
A262 Frequency lower limit
setting, 2nd motor

Appendix B

A056 DC braking / edge or
level detection for [DB]
input

B–30

ModBus Data Listing

Holding Registers for “A” Group Standard Functions
Network Data
Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

Appendix B

hex

Range

Res.

dec.

A076 PV source setting

106Dh
R/W Selects source of Process
Variable (PV), option codes:
00... [OI] terminal (current in)
01... [O] terminal (voltage in)
02... Network
03... Calculate function output

04205

0, 1, 2, 3

—

A077 Reverse PID action

R/W Two option codes:
00... PID input = SP – PV
01... PID input = –(SP – PV)

106Eh

04206

0, 1

—

A078 PID output limit

R/W Sets the limit of PID output as
percent of full scale,
range is 0.0 to 100.0%

106Fh

04207

0 to 1000

0.1 %

A081 AVR function select

R/W Automatic (output) voltage
regulation, selects from three
type of AVR functions, three
option codes:
00... AVR enabled
01... AVR disabled
02... AVR enabled except
during deceleration

1070h

04208

0, 1, 2

—

A082 AVR voltage select

R/W 200V class inverter settings:
00... 200
01... 215
02... 220
03... 230
04... 240
400V class inverter settings:
00... 380
01... 400
02... 415
03... 440
04... 460
05... 480

1071h

04209

0 to 5

—

A092 Acceleration (2) time
(high) setting

R/W Duration of 2nd segment of
acceleration, range is:
0.01 to 3000 sec.
R/W

1074h

04212

0.1 sec

1075h

04213

1 to
300000
*1

1518h

05400

0.1 sec

1519h

05401

1 to
300000
*1

A092
(low)
A292 Acceleration (2) time
(high) setting, (2nd motor)
A292
(low)

R/W Duration of 2nd segment of
acceleration, 2nd motor,
range is: 0.01 to 3000 sec
R/W

L2002 Inverter

B–31

Holding Registers for “A” Group Standard Functions
Network Data
Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

1 to
300000
*1

0.1 sec

1 to
300000
*1

0.1 sec

0, 1

—

0 to 4000

0.1 Hz

0 to 4000

0.1 Hz

04221

0, 1

—

107Eh

04222

0, 1

—

R/W The output frequency corresponding to the current input
range starting point.
Range is 0.00 to 400.0 Hz

1080h

04224

0 to 4000

0.1 Hz

R/W The output frequency corresponding to the current input
range ending point.
Range is 0.00 to 400.0 Hz

1082h

04226

0 to 4000

0.1 Hz

dec.

1076h

04214

1077h

04215

R/W Duration of 2nd segment of
deceleration, range is:
0.01 to 3000 sec.
R/W

151Ah

00122

151Bh

00123

R/W Two options for switching
from 1st to 2nd accel/decel:
00... 2CH input from terminal
R/W 01... transition frequency

1078h

04216

151Ch

05404

R/W Output frequency at which
Accel1 switches to Accel2,
range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
R/W

107Ah

04218

151Eh

05406

R/W Output frequency at which
Decel1 switches to Decel2,
range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz
R/W

107Ch

04220

1520h

05408

A097 Acceleration curve
selection

R/W Set the characteristic curve of
Acc1 and Acc2, two options:
00... linear
01... S-curve

107Dh

A098 Deceleration curve
selection

R/W Set the characteristic curve of
Acc1 and Acc2, two options:
00... linear
01... S-curve

A101 [OI]–[L] input active
range start frequency

A102 [OI]–[L] input active
range end frequency

A093 Deceleration (2) time
(high) setting
A093
(low)
A293 Deceleration (2) time
(high) setting, (2nd motor)
A293
(low)
A094 Select method to switch
to Acc2/Dec2 profile
A294 Select method to switch
to Acc2/Dec2 profile,
2nd motor
A095 Acc1 to Acc2 frequency
transition point
A295 Acc1 to Acc2 frequency
transition point, 2nd
motor
A096 Dec1 to Dec2 frequency
transition point
A296 Dec1 to Dec2 frequency
transition point, 2nd
motor

R/W Duration of 2nd segment of
deceleration, range is:
0.01 to 3000 sec.
R/W

Appendix B

Range
hex

B–32

ModBus Data Listing

Holding Registers for “A” Group Standard Functions
Network Data

Appendix B

Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

dec.

Range

Res.

A103 [OI]–[L] input active
range start current

R/W The starting point for the
current input range.
Range is 0. to 100.%

1083h

04227

0 to 100

A104 [OI]–[L] input active
range end current

R/W The ending point for the
current input range.
Range is 0. to 100.%

1084h

04228

0 to 100

A105 [OI]–[L] input start
frequency enable

R/W Two options:
00... Use A101 start value
01... Use 0Hz

1085h

04229

0, 1

—

A141 A input select for calcu- R/W Five options:
late function
00... Digital operator
01... Keypad potentiometer
02... [O] input
03... [OI] input
04... Network variable

108Eh

04238

0 to 4

—

A142 B input select for calcu- R/W Five options:
late function
00... Digital operator
01... Keypad potentiometer
02... [O] input
03... [OI] input
04... Network variable

108Fh

04239

0 to 4

—

A143 Calculation symbol

1090h
R/W Calculates a value based on
the A input source (A141
selects) and the B input source
(A142 selects). Three options:
00... ADD (A input + B
input)
01... SUB (A input – B input)
02... MUL (A input x B input)

04240

0 1, 2

—

A145 ADD frequency

R/W An offset value that is applied
to the output frequency when
the [ADD] terminal is ON.
Range is 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

1091h

04241

0 to 4000

0.1 Hz

A146 ADD direction select

R/W Two options:
00... Plus (adds A145 value to
the output frequency setting)
01... Minus (subtracts A145
value from the output
frequency setting)

1093h

04243

0, 1

—

A151 Pot. input active range
start frequency

R/W The output frequency corresponding to the potentiometer
range starting point,
range is 0.0 to 400.0

1095h

4245

0 to 4000

0.1 Hz

L2002 Inverter

B–33

Holding Registers for “A” Group Standard Functions
Network Data
Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

dec.

Range

Res.

R/W The output frequency corresponding to the potentiometer
range ending point,
range is 0.0 to 400.0

1097h

4247

0 to 4000

0.1 Hz

A153 Pot. input active range
start current

R/W The output frequency corresponding to the potentiometer
range starting point,
range is 0 to 100

1098h

4248

0 to 100

A154 Pot. input active range
end current

R/W The output frequency corresponding to the potentiometer
range ending point,
range is 0 to 100

1099h

4249

0 to 100

A155 Pot. input start
frequency enable

R/W Two options:
00... Disable
01... Enable

109Ah

4250

0, 1

—

Note 1:

When the value is 10000 (100.0 seconds), a value in the second decimal place
is ignored (for A092/A292 and A093/A293).

Appendix B

A152 Pot. input active range
end frequency

B–34

ModBus Data Listing
The following table lists the holding registers for the “B” Group Fine Tuning Functions.
“B” Group Fine Tuning Functions
Network Data

Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

Res.

dec.

R/W Select inverter restart method,
four option codes:
00... Alarm output after trip,
no automatic restart
01... Restart at 0Hz
02... Resume operation after
frequency matching
03... Resume previous freq.
after freq. matching, then
decelerate to stop and display
trip info.

10A5h 04261 0, 1, 2, 3

—

B002 Allowable undervoltage power failure
time

R/W The amount of time a power
input under-voltage can occur
without tripping the power
failure alarm. Range is 0.3 to
25 sec. If under-voltage exists
longer than this time, the
inverter trips, even if the
restart mode is selected.

10A6h 04262 3 to 250

0.1 sec

B003 Retry wait time before
motor restart

R/W Time delay after undervoltage condition goes away,
before the inverter runs motor
again.
Range is 0.3 to 100 seconds.

10A7h 04263

3 to
1000

0.1 sec

B004 Instantaneous power
failure / under-voltage
trip alarm enable

R/W Two option codes:
00... Disable
01... Enable

10A8h 04264

0, 1

—

B005 Number of restarts on
power failure / undervoltage trip events

R/W Two option codes:
00... Restart 16 times
01... Always restart

10A9h 04265

0, 1

—

B012 Level of electronic
thermal setting

R/W Set a level between 20% and
120% for the rated inverter
current
R/W

10AD
h

2000 to
12000

0.01%

0, 1, 2

—

Appendix B

B001 Selection of automatic
restart mode

B212 Level of electronic
thermal setting, 2nd
motor
B013 Electronic thermal
characteristic
B213 Electronic thermal
characteristic, 2nd
motor

R/W Select from two curves,
option codes: *1
00... Reduced torque 1
R/W 01... Constant torque
02... Reduced torque 2

04269

1526h 05414

10AEh 04270
1527h 05415

L2002 Inverter

B–35

“B” Group Fine Tuning Functions
Network Data
Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

Range

Res.

dec.

R/W Select the operating mode
during overload conditions,
three options, option codes:
00... Disabled
01... Enabled for acceleration
and constant speed
02... Enabled for constant
speed only

10B5h 04277

0, 1, 2

—

B022 Overload restriction
setting

R/W Sets the level for overload
restriction, between 20% and
150% of the rated current of
the inverter, setting resolution
is 1% of rated current

10B6h 04278

2000 to
15000

0.01%

B023 Deceleration rate at
overload restriction

R/W Sets the deceleration rate
when inverter detects
overload, range is 0.1 to 30.0,
resolution is 0.1

10B7h 04279 1 to 300

0.1 sec

B028 Overload restriction
source selection

R/W Two options; select codes:
00... B022/B222 setting level
01... [O]–[L] analog input

10BBh 04283

0, 1

—

B228 Overload restriction
source selection, 2nd
motor

R/W Two options; select codes:
00... B022/B222 setting level
01... [O]–[L] analog input

152Bh 05419

0, 1

—

B031 Software lock mode
selection

R/W Prevents parameter changes,
in four options, option codes:
00... all parameters except
B031 are locked when [SFT]
terminal is ON
01... all parameters except
B031 and output frequency
F001 when [SFT] terminal is
ON
02... all parameters except
B031 are locked
03... all parameters except
B031 and output frequency
F001 setting are locked

10BCh 04284 0, 1, 2, 3

—

B080 [AM] analog signal
gain

R/W Adjust of analog output at
terminal [AM],
range is 0 to 255

10CFh 04303 0 to 255

—

B082 Start frequency adjustment

R/W Sets the starting frequency for
the inverter output, range is
0.5 to 9.9 Hz

10D1h 04305

5 to 99

0.1 Hz

Appendix B

B021 Overload restriction
operation mode

B–36

ModBus Data Listing

“B” Group Fine Tuning Functions
Network Data
Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

Appendix B

hex

Range

Res.

dec.

B083 Carrier frequency
setting

R/W Sets the PWM carrier (internal switching frequency),
range is 2.0 to 14.0 kHz

10D2h 04306

20 to
140

0.1 Hz

B084 Initialization mode
(parameters or trip
history)

R/W Select the type of initialization to occur, two option
codes:
00... Trip history clear
01... Parameter initialization
02... Trip history clear and
parameter initialization

10D3h 04307

0, 1, 2

—

10D4h 04308

—

B085 Country code for initialization (not accessible
to ModBus)

—

Select default parameter
values for country on initialization. Note: Write not
allowed from network.

B086 Frequency scaling
conversion factor

R/W Specify a constant to scale the
displayed frequency for D007
monitor, range is 0.1 to 99.9

10D5h 04309 1 to 999

0.1

B087 STOP key enable

R/W Select whether the STOP key
on the keypad is enabled, two
option codes:
00... enabled
01... disabled

10D6h 04310

0, 1

—

B088 Restart mode after FRS

R/W Selects how the inverter
resumes operation when the
free-run stop (FRS) is
cancelled, two options:
00... Restart from 0Hz
01... Restart from frequency
detected from real speed of
motor (frequency matching)

10D7h 04311

0, 1

—

L2002 Inverter

B–37

“B” Group Fine Tuning Functions
Network Data
Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

Range

Res.

1 to 7

—

dec.

R/W Selects the parameter
displayed on the keypad
display when the inverter is
networked, 7 options:
01... Output frequency
monitor
02... Output current monitor
03... Rotation direction
monitor
04... Process variable (PV),
PID feedback monitor
05... Intelligent input terminal
status
06... Intelligent output
terminal status
07... Scaled output frequency
monitor

10D8h 04312

B091 Stop mode selection

R/W Selects how the inverter stops
the motor, two option codes:
00... DEC (decelerate and
stop)
01... FRS (free run to stop)

10DA
h

04314

0, 1

—

B130 Over-voltage
LADSTOP enable

R/W Pauses deceleration ramp
when DC bus voltage rises
above threshold level, in order
to avoid over-voltage trip.
Two option codes:
00... Disable
01... Enable

10F5h 04341

0, 1

—

B131 Over-voltage
LADSTOP level

R/W Sets the threshold level for
over-voltage LADSTOP.
When the DC bus voltage is
above the threshold value, the
inverter stops deceleration
until the DC bus voltage is
less than the threshold setting
again.

10F6h 04342

330 to
390,
660 to
780

10F8h 04344

0, 1

—

B150 Carrier mode (not
accessible to ModBus)

—

Automatically reduces the
carrier frequency as the
ambient temperature
increases.
Two option codes:
00... Disable
01... Enable

Appendix B

B089 Monitor display select
for networked inverter

B–38

ModBus Data Listing

“B” Group Fine Tuning Functions
Network Data
Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Appendix B

B151 Quick-start enable

Note 1:

Description

R/W Enables inverter output for
constant ON operation to
speed up response, two option
codes:
00... Disable
01... Enable

dec.

10F9

4345

Range

Res.

0, 1

—

Assume that the inverter current rating is 10000 (for B013/B213).

L2002 Inverter

B–39

The following table lists the holding registers for the “C” Group Intelligent Input
Functions.I
“C” Group Intelligent Terminal Functions
Network Data
Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

R/W

C002 Terminal [2] function

R/W

C003 Terminal [3] function

R/W

C004 Terminal [4] function

R/W

C005 Terminal [5] function

R/W

See “Input Terminal
Configuration” on page 3–
47

1103h 04355 0, 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7,
1104h 04356 8, 9, 11,
1105h 04357 12, 13,
15, 16,
1106h 04358 18, 19,
1107h 04359 20, 21,
22, 23,
24, 27,
28, 29,
31, 50,
51, 255

—

110Bh 04363

0, 1

—

Appendix B

C001 Terminal [1] function

Res.

dec.

C011 Terminal [1] active state R/W Select logic convention, two
option codes:
C012 Terminal [2] active state R/W 00...normally open [NO]
C013 Terminal [3] active state R/W 01...normally closed [NC]

110Ch 04364

0, 1

—

110Dh 04365

0, 1

—

C014 Terminal [4] active state R/W

110Eh 04366

0, 1

—

C015 Terminal [5] active state R/W

110Fh 04367

0, 1

—

C021 Terminal [11] function

R/W

—

1114h 04372
See “Output Terminal

0, 1, 2, 3,
1115h 04373
4, 5, 6, 7,
8, 9
1119h 04377

C022 Terminal [12] function

R/W

C026 Alarm relay terminal
function

R/W

C028 [AM] signal selection

R/W Two available functions:
00...Actual motor speed
01...Motor current

111Bh 04379

0, 1

—

C031 Terminal [11] active
state

R/W Select logic convention, two
option codes:
00...normally open (NO)
01...normally closed (NC)

111Dh 04381

0, 1

—

C032 Terminal [12] active
state

R/W Select logic convention, two
option codes:
00...normally open (NO)
01...normally closed (NC)

111Eh 04382

0, 1

—

C036 Alarm relay active state

R/W Select logic convention, two
option codes:
00...normally open (NO)
01...normally closed (NC)

1122h 04370

0, 1

—

Configuration” on page 3–
54

B–40

ModBus Data Listing

“C” Group Intelligent Terminal Functions
Network Data
Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

Appendix B

hex

Range

Res.

0 to
20000

0.01 %

dec.

C041 Overload level setting

R/W Sets the overload signal level
between 0% and 200% (from
0 to two times the rated
current of the inverter)

1124h 04388

C042 Frequency arrival
setting for acceleration

R/W Sets the frequency arrival
setting threshold for the
output frequency during
acceleration, range is 0.0 to
400.0 Hz

1126h 04390 0 to 4000
*1

0.1 Hz

C043 Arrival frequency
setting for deceleration

R/W Sets the frequency arrival
setting threshold for the
output frequency during
deceleration, range is 0.0 to
400.0 Hz

1128h 04392 0 to 4000

0.1 Hz

C044 PID deviation level
setting

R/W Sets the allowable PID loop
error magnitude (absolute
value), SP - PV, range is 0.0 to
100%, resolution is 0.1%

1129h 04393 0 to 1000

0.1 %

C052 PID FBV function high
limit

R/W When the PV exceeds this
value, the PID loop turns OFF
the PID Second Stage Output,
range is 0.0 to 100.0%

112Eh 04398 0 to 1000

0.1 %

C053 PID FBV function low
limit

R/W When the PV goes below this
value, the PID loop turns ON
the PID Second Stage Output,
range is 0.0 to 100.0%

112Fh 04399 0 to 1000

0.1 %

C071 Communication speed
selection

—

1138h 04408

—

C072 Node allocation

—

1139h 04409

—

C074 Communication parity
selection

—

113Bh 04411

—

C075 Communication stop bit
selection

—

113Ch 04412

—

C076 Communication error
select

—

113Dh 04413

—

C077 Communication error
time-out

—

113Eh 04414

—

C078 Communication wait
time

—

113Fh 04415

—

NOTE: These network
settings are not accessible to
ModBus. Use the inverter
keypad or digital operator to
edit. Refer to “Network

Communication Settings”
on page 3–58.

L2002 Inverter

B–41

“C” Group Intelligent Terminal Functions
Network Data
Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

Res.

dec.

1141h 04417 0 to 2000

0.1 %

C082 OI input span calibration

R/W Scale factor between the
external frequency command
on terminals L – OI (current
input) and the frequency
output, range is 0.0 to 200.0%

1142h 04418 0 to 2000

0.1 %

C085 Thermistor input tuning

R/W Range is 0.0 to 200.0%

1144h 04420 0 to 2000

0.1 %

C086 [AM] terminal offset
tuning

R/W Range is 0.0 to 10.0V

1145h 04421

0 to 100

0.1 V

1148h 04424

0, 1

—

C091 Debug mode enable

Displays debug parameters.
Two option codes:
00...Disable
01...Enable

C101 Up/Down memory
mode
selection

R/W Controls speed setpoint for
the inverter after power cycle.
Two option codes:
00...Clear last frequency
(return to default frequency
F001)
01...Keep last frequency
adjusted by UP/DWN

1149h 04425

0, 1

—

C102 Reset selection

R/W Determines response to Reset
input [RST].
Three option codes:
00...Cancel trip state at input
signal ON transition, stops
inverter if in Run Mode
01...Cancel trip state at signal
OFF transition, stops inverter
if in Run Mode
02...Cancel trip state at input
signal ON transition, no effect
if in Run Mode

114Ah 04426

0, 1, 2

—

C141 Input A select for logic
output

R/W

C142 Input B select for logic
output

R/W

1150h 04432 0, 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7,
8, 9
1151h 04433

See “Output Logic and

Timing” on page 3–61

—

Appendix B

C081 O input span calibration R/W Scale factor between the
external frequency command
on terminals L – O (voltage
input) and the frequency
output, range is 0.0 to 200.0%

B–42

ModBus Data Listing

“C” Group Intelligent Terminal Functions
Network Data
Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

Appendix B

hex

Range

Res.

0, 1, 2

—

dec.

C143 Logic function select

R/W Applies a logic function to
calculate [LOG] output state,
three options:
00 ... [LOG] = A AND B
01 ...[LOG] = A OR B
02 ...[LOG] = A XOR B

1152h 04434

C144 Terminal [11] ON delay

R/W Range is 0.0 to 100.0 sec.

1153h 04435 0 to 1000

0.1 sec

C145 Terminal [11] OFF
delay

R/W Range is 0.0 to 100.0 sec.

1154h 04436 0 to 1000

0.1 sec

C146 Terminal [12] ON delay R/W Range is 0.0 to 100.0 sec.

1155h 04437 0 to 1000

0.1 sec

C147 Terminal [12] OFF
delay

R/W Range is 0.0 to 100.0 sec.

1156h 04438 0 to 1000

0.1 sec

C148 Output relay ON delay

R/W Range is 0.0 to 100.0 sec.

1157h 04439 0 to 1000

0.1 sec

C149 Output relay OFF delay

R/W Range is 0.0 to 100.0 sec.

1158h 04340 0 to 1000

0.1 sec

Note 1:

Assume that the inverter current rating is 10000 (for C041).

L2002 Inverter

B–43

The following table lists the holding registers for the “H” Group Motor Constants.
“H” Group Motor Constants
Network Data
Func.
Code

Name

R/W

Description

Res.

1165h 04453

0 to 12

—

1540h 05440

0 to 12

—

hex
H003 Motor capacity
H203 Motor capacity, 2nd
setting

Appendix B

R/W Thirteen selections:
0 .....0.20 kW
R/W 1 .....0.37 kW
2 .....0.40 kW
3 .....0.55 kW
4 .....0.75 kW
5 .....1.10 kW
6 .....1.50 kW
7 .....2.2 kW
8 .....3.0 kW
9 .....3.7 kW
10 ...4.0 kW
11 ...5.5 kW
12 ...7.5 kW

dec.

H004 Motor poles setting

R/W Four selections:
2/4/6/8

1166h 04454

2, 4, 6,
8

1 pole

H204 Motor poles setting, 2nd
motor

R/W

1541h 05441

2, 4, 6,
8

1 pole

H006 Motor stabilization
constant

R/W Motor constant (factory set),
range is 0 to 255

1168h 04456 0 to 255

H206 Motor stabilization
constant, 2nd motor

R/W

1543h 05443 0 to 255

Drive Parameter
Settings Tables
In This Appendix....

C
page

— Introduction ..................................................... 2
— Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry.............. 2

C–2

Introduction

Introduction
This appendix lists the user-programmable parameters for the L2002 series inverters and
the default values for European and U.S. product types. The right-most column of the
tables is blank, so you can record values you have changed from the default. This
involves just a few parameters for most applications. This appendix presents the parameters in a format oriented toward the keypad on the inverter.

Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry
L2002 series inverters provide many functions and parameters that can be configured by
the user. We recommend that you record all parameters that have been edited, in order to
help in troubleshooting or recovery from a loss of parameter data.
Inverter model

}

This information is printed
on the specification label
located on the right side of
the inverter.

L2002

Appendix C

MFG. No.

Main Profile Parameters
“F” Group Parameters
Func.
Code

Name

Default Setting
–FE(F)
(Europe)

–FU
(USA)

F001

Output frequency setting

0.0

F002

Acceleration (1) time setting

10.0

F202

Acceleration (1) time setting, 2nd
motor

10.0

F003

Deceleration (1) time setting

10.0

F203

Deceleration (1) time setting, 2nd
motor

10.0

F004

Keypad Run key routing

User
Setting

L2002 Inverter

C–3

Standard Functions
“A” Group Parameters
Func.
Code

Name

Default Setting
-FE(F)
(EU)

-FU
(USA)

Frequency source setting

A201

Frequency source setting, 2nd
motor

A002

Run command source setting

A202

Run command source setting,
2nd motor

A003

Base frequency setting

50.0

60.0

A203

Base frequency setting, 2nd
motor

50.0

60.0

A004

Maximum frequency setting

50.0

60.0

A204

Maximum frequency setting, 2nd
motor

50.0

60.0

A005

[AT] selection

A011

O–L input active range start
frequency

0.0

A012

O–L input active range end
frequency

0.0

A013

O–L input active range start
voltage

0.0

A014

O–L input active range end
voltage

100.

A015

O–L input start frequency enable

A016

External frequency filter time
constant

A020

Multi-speed 0 setting

0.0

A220

Multi-speed 0 setting, 2nd motor

0.0

A021

Multi-speed 1 setting

0.0

A022

Multi-speed 2 setting

0.0

A023

Multi-speed 3 setting

0.0

A024

Multi-speed 4 setting

0.0

A025

Multi-speed 5 setting

0.0

A026

Multi-speed 6 setting

0.0

A027

Multi-speed 7 setting

0.0

Appendix C

A001

User
Setting

C–4

Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry

“A” Group Parameters

Appendix C

Func.
Code

Name

Default Setting
-FE(F)
(EU)

-FU
(USA)

A028

Multi-speed 8 setting

0.0

A029

Multi-speed 9 setting

0.0

A030

Multi-speed 10 setting

0.0

A031

Multi-speed 11 setting

0.0

A032

Multi-speed 12 setting

0.0

A033

Multi-speed 13 setting

0.0

A034

Multi-speed 14 setting

0.0

A035

Multi-speed 15 setting

0.0

A038

Jog frequency setting

1.00

A039

Jog stop mode

A041

Torque boost select

A241

Torque boost select, 2nd motor

A042

Manual torque boost value

1.8

A242

Manual torque boost value, 2nd
motor

0.0

A043

Manual torque boost frequency
adjustment

10.0

A243

Manual torque boost frequency
adjustment, 2nd motor

0.0

A044

V/f characteristic curve selection

A244

V/f characteristic curve selection, 2nd motor

A045

V/f gain setting

100.

A245

V/f gain setting, 2nd motor

100.

A051

DC braking enable

A052

DC braking frequency setting

0.5

A053

DC braking wait time

0.0

A054

DC braking force for deceleration

A055

DC braking time for deceleration

0.0

A056

DC braking / edge or level detection for [DB] input

A061

Frequency upper limit setting

0.0

A261

Frequency upper limit setting,
2nd motor

0.0

User
Setting

L2002 Inverter

“A” Group Parameters
Func.
Code

Name

C–5

Default Setting
-FE(F)
(EU)

-FU
(USA)

Frequency lower limit setting

0.0

A262

Frequency lower limit setting,
2nd motor

0.0

A063,
A065,
A067

Jump (center) frequency setting

0.0

A064,
A066,
A068

Jump (hysteresis) frequency
width setting

0.5

A071

PID Enable

A072

PID proportional gain

1.0

A073

PID integral time constant

1.0

A074

PID derivative time constant

0.0

A075

PV scale conversion

1.00

A076

PV source setting

A077

Reverse PID action

A078

PID output limit

0.0

A081

AVR function select

A082

AVR voltage select

230/400

230/460

A092

Acceleration (2) time setting

15.00

A292

Acceleration (2) time setting,
(2nd motor)

15.00

A093

Deceleration (2) time setting

15.00

A293

Deceleration (2) time setting,
(2nd motor)

15.00

A094

Select method to switch to Acc2/
Dec2 profile

A294

Select method to switch to Acc2/
Dec2 profile, 2nd motor

A095

Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transition point

0.0

A295

Acc1 to Acc2 frequency transition point, 2nd motor

0.0

A096

Dec1 to Dec2 frequency transition point

0.0

Appendix C

A062

User
Setting

C–6

Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry

“A” Group Parameters

Appendix C

Func.
Code

Name

Default Setting
-FE(F)
(EU)

-FU
(USA)

A296

Dec1 to Dec2 frequency transition point, 2nd motor

0.0

A097

Acceleration curve selection

A098

Deceleration curve selection

A101

[OI]–[L] input active range start
frequency

0.0

A102

[OI]–[L] input active range end
frequency

0.0

A103

[OI]–[L] input active range start
current

0.0

A104

[OI]–[L] input active range end
current

100.

A105

[OI]–[L] input start frequency
enable

A141

A input select for calculate
function

A142

B input select for calculate
function

A143

Calculation symbol

A145

ADD frequency

0.0

A146

ADD direction select

A151

Pot. input active range start
frequency

0.0

A152

Pot. input active range end
frequency

0.0

A153

Pot. input active range start
current

0.0

A154

Pot. input active range end
current

0.0

A155

Pot. input start frequency enable

User
Setting

L2002 Inverter

C–7

Fine Tuning Functions
“B” Group Parameters
Func.
Code

Name

Default Setting
-FE(F)
(EU)

-FU
(USA)

Selection of automatic restart
mode

B002

Allowable under-voltage power
failure time

1.0

B003

Retry wait time before motor
restart

1.0

B004

Instantaneous power failure /
under-voltage trip alarm enable

B005

Number of restarts on power
failure / under-voltage trip events

B012

Level of electronic thermal
setting

Rated
current for
each
inverter

B212

Level of electronic thermal
setting, 2nd motor

Rated
current for
each
inverter

B013

Electronic thermal characteristic

B213

Electronic thermal characteristic,
2nd motor

B021

Overload restriction operation
mode

B221

Overload restriction operation
mode, 2nd motor

B022

Overload restriction setting

Rated
current x
1.5

B222

Overload restriction setting, 2nd
motor

Rated
current x
1.5

B023

Deceleration rate at overload
restriction

1.0

30.0

B223

Deceleration rate at overload
restriction, 2nd motor

1.0

30.0

B028

Overload restriction source
selection

Appendix C

B001

User
Setting

C–8

Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry

“B” Group Parameters

Appendix C

Func.
Code

Name

Default Setting
-FE(F)
(EU)

-FU
(USA)

B228

Overload restriction source
selection, 2nd motor

B031

Software lock mode selection

B080

[AM] analog signal gain

100.

B082

Start frequency adjustment

0.5

B083

Carrier frequency setting

5.0

B084

Initialization mode (parameters
or trip history)

B085

Country code for initialization

B086

Frequency scaling conversion
factor

1.0

B087

STOP key enable

B088

Restart mode after FRS

B089

Monitor display select for
networked inverter

B091

Stop mode selection

B130

Over-voltage LADSTOP enable

B131

Over-voltage LADSTOP level

380 / 760

B150

Carrier mode

B151

Quick start enable

User
Setting

L2002 Inverter

C–9

Intelligent Terminal Functions
“C” Group Parameters
Func.
Code

Name

Default Setting
-FE(F)
(EU)

-FU
(USA)

Terminal [1] function

C201

Terminal [1] function, 2nd motor

C002

Terminal [2] function

C202

Terminal [2] function, 2nd motor

C003

Terminal [3] function

C203

Terminal [3] function, 2nd motor

C004

Terminal [4] function

C204

Terminal [4] function, 2nd motor

C005

Terminal [5] function

C205

Terminal [5] function, 2nd motor

C011

Terminal [1] active state

C012

Terminal [2] active state

C013

Terminal [3] active state

C014

Terminal [4] active state

C015

Terminal [5] active state

C021

Terminal [11] function

C022

Terminal [12] function

C026

Alarm relay terminal function

C028

[AM] signal selection

C031

Terminal [11] active state

C032

Terminal [12] active state

C036

Alarm relay active state

C041

Overload level setting

Inverter
rated
current

C241

Overload level setting, 2nd motor

Inverter
rated
current

C042

Frequency arrival setting for
acceleration

0.0

C043

Arrival frequency setting for
deceleration

0.0

Appendix C

C001

User
Setting

C–10

Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry

“C” Group Parameters

Appendix C

Func.
Code

Name

Default Setting
-FE(F)
(EU)

-FU
(USA)

3.0

C044

PID deviation level setting

C052

PID FBV function high limit

100.0

C053

PID FBV function low limit

0.0

C071

Communication speed selection

C072

Node allocation

C074

Communication parity selection

C075

Communication stop bit selection

C076

Communication error select

C077

Communication erorr time-out

0.00

C078

Communication wait time

C081

O input span calibration

100.0

C082

OI input span calibration

100.0

C085

Thermistor input tuning

100.0

C086

[AM] terminal offset tuning

0.0

C091

Debug mode enable

C101

Up/Down memory mode
selection

C102

Reset selection

C141

Input A select for logic output

C142

Input B select for logic output

C143

Logic function select

C144

Terminal [11] ON delay

0.0

C145

Terminal [11] OFF delay

0.0

C146

Terminal [12] ON delay

0.0

C147

Terminal [12] OFF delay

0.0

C148

Output relay ON delay

0.0

C149

Output relay OFF delay

0.0

User
Setting

L2002 Inverter

C–11

Motor Constants Functions
“H” Group Parameters
Func.
Code

Name

Default Setting
-FE(F)
(EU)

-FU
(USA)

H003

Motor capacity

Specified
by the
inverter
capacity

H203

Motor capacity, 2nd setting

Specified
by the
inverter
capacity

H004

Motor poles setting

H204

Motor poles setting, 2nd motor

H006

Motor stabilization constant

100

H206

Motor stabilization constant, 2nd
motor

100

User
Setting

Appendix C

C–12

Parameter Settings for Keypad Entry

Expansion Card Functions
“P” Group Parameters

Appendix C

Func.
Code

Name

Default Setting
-FE(F)
(EU)

-FU
(USA)

P044

Network comm watchdog timer

1.00

P045

Inverter action on network comm
error

P046

Polled I/O output instance
number

P047

Polled I/O input instance number

P048

Inverter action on network idle
mode

P049

Network motor poles setting for
RPM

User
Setting

CE–EMC
Installation
Guidelines
In This Appendix....

D
page

— CE–EMC Installation Guidelines ..................... 2
— Hitachi EMC Recommendations ..................... 6

D–2

CE–EMC Installation Guidelines

CE–EMC Installation Guidelines
You are required to satisfy the EMC directive (89/336/EEC) when using an L2002
inverter in an EU country. To satisfy the EMC directive and to comply with standard,
follow the guidelines in this section.
1. As user you must ensure that the HF (high frequency) impedance between adjustable
frequency inverter, filter, and ground is as small as possible.
• Ensure that the connections are metallic and have the largest possible contact
areas (zinc-plated mounting plates).
2. Avoid conductor loops that act like antennas, especially loops that encompass large
areas.
• Avoid unnecessary conductor loops.
• Avoid parallel arrangement of low-level signal wiring and power-carrying or
noise-prone conductors.
3. Use shielded wiring for the motor cable and all analog and digital control lines.
• Allow the effective shield area of these lines to remain as large as possible; i.e., do
not strip away the shield (screen) further away from the cable end than absolutely
necessary.

Appendix D

• With integrated systems (for example, when the adjustable frequency inverter is
communicating with some type of supervisory controller or host computer in the
same control cabinet and they are connected at the same ground + PE-potential),
connect the shields of the control lines to ground + PE (protective earth) at both
ends. With distributed systems (for example the communicating supervisory
controller or host computer is not in the same control cabinet and there is a
distance between the systems), we recommend connecting the shield of the
control lines only at the end connecting to the adjustable frequency inverter. If
possible, route the other end of the control lines directly to the cable entry section
of the supervisory controller or host computer. The shield conductor of the motor
cables always must connected to ground + PE at both ends.
• To achieve a large area contact between shield and ground + PE-potential, use a
PG screw with a metallic shell, or use a metallic mounting clip.
• Use only cable with braided, tinned copper mesh shield (type “CY”) with 85%
coverage.
• The shielding continuity should not be broken at any point in the cable. If the use
of reactors, contactors, terminals, or safety switches in the motor output is necessary, the unshielded section should be kept as short as possible.
• Some motors have a rubber gasket between terminal box and motor housing. Very
often, the terminal boxes, and particularly the threads for the metal PG screw
connections, are painted. Make sure there is always a good metallic connection
between the shielding of the motor cable, the metal PG screw connection, the
terminal box, and the motor housing. If necessary, carefully remove paint between
conducting surfaces.

L2002 Inverter

D–3

4. Take measures to minimize interference that is frequently coupled in through installation cables.
• Separate interfering cables with 0.25m minimum from cables susceptible to interference. A particularly critical point is laying parallel cables over longer distances.
If two cables intersect (one crosses over the other), the interference is smallest if
they intersect at an angle of 90°. Cables susceptible to interference should therefore only intersect motor cables, intermediate circuit cables, or the wiring of a
rheostat at right angles and never be laid parallel to them over longer distances.
5. Minimize the distance between an interference source and an interference sink (interference-threatened device), thereby decreasing the effect of the emitted interference
on the interference sink.
• You should use only interference-free devices and maintain a minimum distance
of 0.25 m from the adjustable frequency inverter.
6. Follow safety measures in the filter installation.
• Ensure that the ground terminal (PE) of the filter is properly connected to the
ground terminal of the adjustable frequency inverter. An HF ground connection
via metal contact between the housings of the filter and the adjustable frequency
inverter, or solely via cable shield, is not permitted as a protective conductor
connection. The filter must be solidly and permanently connected with the ground
potential so as to preclude the danger of electric shock upon touching the filter if a
fault occurs.
To achieve a protective ground connection for the filter:
• Ground the filter with a conductor of at least 10 mm2 cross-sectional area.
• Connect a second grounding conductor, using a separate grounding terminal
parallel to the protective conductor. (The cross section of each single protective
conductor terminal must be sized for the required nominal load.)

Appendix D

D–4

CE–EMC Installation Guidelines
Some L2002 inverters designed for use in Europe (–xxxLFEF/xxxHFEF models) have
built-in line filters. Inverter models –xxxLFE/xxxHFE do not have built-in line filters. In
the event your application needs additional filtering, the following diagrams show
control panel mounting and wiring examples for different filter types.

Appendix D

L2002 inverter with footprint-type filter

M
3~

L2002 Inverter

D–5

L2002 inverter with book-type filter

Appendix D

M
3~

D–6

Hitachi EMC Recommendations

Hitachi EMC Recommendations
WARNING: This equipment should be installed, adjusted, and serviced by qualified
personal familiar with construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards
involved. Failure to observe this precaution could result in bodily injury.
Use the following checklist to ensure the inverter is within proper operating ranges and
conditions.
1. The power supply to L2002 inverters must meet these specifications:
• Voltage fluctuation ±10% or less
• Voltage imbalance ±3% or less
• Frequency variation ±4% or less
• Voltage distortion THD = 10% or less
2. Installation measure:
• Use a filter designed for L2002 inverter.
3. Wiring:
• Shielded wire (screened cable) is required for motor wiring, and the length must
be less than 5 meters.
• The carrier frequency setting must be less than 5 kHz to satisfy EMC requirements.
• Separate the power input and motor wiring from the signal/process circuit wiring.
4. Environmental conditions—when using a filter, follow these guidelines:
• Ambient temperature: –10 to 40 °C
• Humidity: 20 to 90% RH (non-condensing)

Appendix D

• Vibration: 5.9 m/sec2 (0.6 G) 10 ~ 55Hz
• Location: 1000 meters or less altitude, indoors (no corrosive gas or dust)

Index

A
A Group functions 3–10
AC reactors 5–3
Acceleration 1–22, 3–9
characteristic curves 3–28
second function 3–26
two-stage 4–18
Access levels 3–5, 3–39, 4–22
Accessories 5–2
ADD frequency 3–31
enable input 4–32
Alarm signal 4–36, 4–43
Algorithms, torque control 3–5, 3–63
Ambient temperature 2–10, A–2
Analog inputs
calibration settings 3–59
current/voltage select 4–23
disconnect detect 4–45
operation 4–53
settings 3–14, 3–29
wiring examples 4–53
Analog outputs
configuration 3–56
operation 4–55
Arrival frequency A–2
Automatic restart 3–33
Automatic voltage regulation 2–29, 3–25
Auto-tuning A–2
AVR 2–29, 3–25

B
B Group functions 3–33
Base frequency 2–29, A–2
setting 3–13
Bibliography A–8
Braking 1–21
dynamic 5–5
resistive 1–24
settings 3–21
Braking resistor 2–7, A–2
Braking resistor selection
external braking units 5–5
Braking unit 2–7
Break-away torque A–2

C
C Group functions 3–47
Calculate function 3–30
Capacitor life curve 6–11
Carrier frequency 3–41, A–2
Catching a spinning motor 3–42
Cautions
general ix
index to... iv
inverter mounting 2–9
operating procedures 4–2
CE approval A–2
CE-EMC guidelines D–2
Chassis ground connection 1–24, 2–21
error code 6–6

Index–2
Choke 2–7, 5–4, A–2
Chopper frequency 3–41
Circuit breaker sizes xiv, 2–17
Clearance for ventilation 2–10
Coasting 3–42
Connectors
logic terminals 2–4
removal 2–4
serial port B–3
Constant torque 3–18
Constant volts/hertz operation 1–19
Contact information xviii
Control algorithms 3–18
Copy unit 1–3, 3–2
Cover removal 2–3
Current input 3–14
Current overload 2–30, 3–37
Current/voltage analog input select 4–23

D
D Group parameters 3–6
DC braking 3–21, 4–15, 4–16, A–3
Deadband A–3
Deceleration 1–22, 3–9, 4–15
characteristic curves 3–28
second function 3–26
two-stage 4–18
Default settings
listing C–2
restoring 6–8
Delay function, output circuits 3–62, 4–37
Derating curves 1–12
Derivative gain 3–24
Digital operator 1–3, 2–24, 3–3, A–3
Dimensions
inverter 2–11
terminals 2–18
Diode A–3
DIP switch configuration 2–5, 2–27, 3–11, 4–
9, B–4
Disconnect detect, analog input 4–45
Duty cycle A–3
Dynamic braking 1–21, 5–5, A–3
usage 5–5

E
Editing parameters 2–24, 2–27
in Run Mode 3–5, 3–39, 4–22
Electromagnetic compatibility D–2
Electronic thermal overload xiv
configuration 3–35
error code 6–5
EMC installation
guidelines D–2
recommendations D–6
EMI A–3
EMI filter xi, 5–4
Environmental specs 1–10
Error codes, trip events 6–5
Error, PID loop 4–42, A–3
Event clearing 4–24
Expansion card functions 3–64
External trip 4–20
error code 6–6

F
F Group functions 3–9
Factory default settings 3–41
restoring 6–8
Fan outlet 2–10, 2–22
FAQ 1–23
Features 1–2, 2–2
Filters, noise suppression 5–2
Fine-tuning functions 3–33
Force operation from digital operator 4–31
Force terminal mode 4–33
Forward run command 4–12
Four-quadrant operation A–3
Free-run stop 3–42, 4–15, 4–19, A–4
Frequency arrival signals 4–39
Frequency display scaling 3–41
Frequency limits 3–22
Frequency matching 3–42
Frequency setting A–4
Frequency source setting 3–10, 4–31, 4–33
Frequency-related functions 3–22
Frequently asked questions 1–23
Functions 1–21, 2–25
Fuse sizes xiv, 2–17

L2002 Inverter

G
Glossary of terms A–2

H
H Group parameters 3–63
Harmonics A–4
History of trip events 3–7
Horsepower A–4

I
IGBT 1–18, A–4
test method 6–15
Index of terminal functions 4–7
Inertia A–4
Initialization 6–8
codes 3–41
Input circuits 4–4, 4–9
Inspection
electrical measurements 6–12
IGBT test method 6–15
measurement techniques 6–14
procedures 6–9
unpacking 2–2
Installation instructions 2–8
Instantaneous power failure alarm 3–34
Insulation test 6–10
Integral gain 3–24
Intelligent input terminals 3–47, 4–9
Intelligent output terminals 3–54, 4–35
Intelligent terminals
definition A–4
functions 3–47
index 4–7
Inverter 1–23, A–4
dimensions 2–11
specifications 1–5
iSLV 3–18
Isolation transformer A–4

J
Jog command 4–15
Jog frequency settings 3–16
Jogging operation A–5
Jump frequencies 3–23, A–5

Index–3

K
Keypad 1–3, 2–2, 3–2
features 2–24, 3–3
navigation 2–26, 3–4
navigation, trip events 6–7

L
LEDs 2–23, 2–24, 2–32, 3–3
Line reactor A–5
Linear accel/decel 3–28
Logic output function 3–61, 4–50
Logic terminals 2–4, 3–47, 3–54, 4–6

M
Main profile parameters 3–9
Maintenance procedures 6–9
Manual torque boost 3–18
Maximum frequency setting 3–13
Megger test 6–10
ModBus
data listing B–19
introduction to network B–2
Model number
convention 1–4
on nameplate 1–4
Momentum A–5
Monitor mode 2–26, 2–32, 2–33, 3–4, 3–5, 6–
5
Monitoring functions 3–6
Motor
constants 3–63
load A–5
poles 1–24, 2–31, 3–63
speed 2–33
voltage selection 3–63
wiring 2–21
Mounting
clearance for ventilation 2–10
dimensions 2–11
location 2–9
Multiple motors, configuration 4–58
Multi-speed
operation 4–13, A–5
profiles 1–22
settings 3–16

Index–4
N
Nameplate 1–4
Navigational map 2–26, 3–4
trip events 6–7
NEC A–5
NEMA
definition A–5
rated installation 1–3
Network communications 1–23, B–2
detection signal 4–49, 4–52
error code 6–6
local monitoring 3–8
ModBus data listing B–19
parameter settings B–5
protocol reference B–6
termination resistor B–4
Noise filters 5–2
AC reactor 2–7

O
OPE/485 serial port configuration 2–5, B–4
Open-collector outputs 4–35, A–5
Operational modes 3–5
Operator interfaces 1–3
Option card detection signal 4–52
Optional components 1–2, 2–7
Orientation 2–2
Output circuits 4–4, 4–35
delay function 3–62, 4–37
Output deviation for PID control 4–42
Output frequency 2–32
setting 3–9
Output function adjustment parameters 3–56
Output overload 3–37
Output terminals 2–21
Over-current trip 3–33
Overload advance notice signal 4–41
Overload protection xiv
configuration 3–35
error code 6–5
Overload restriction 3–37
Override, source settings 3–12
Over-voltage LADSTOP functions 3–44
Over-voltage trip 3–33
error code 6–5, 6–6

P
P Group functions 3–64
Parameter editing 2–24, 2–27
Parameter settings 1–21, 2–25
listings C–2
PID loop 1–25
clear input 4–28
configuration 4–57
definition A–5
error 4–42, A–3
error inversion 4–57
ON/OFF input 4–28
operation 4–56
output limit 4–57
process variable, definition A–6
second stage output 4–46
settings 3–24
PLC, connecting to 4–4
Poles of motor 1–24, 2–31, 3–63
Potentiometer 2–27, 3–10, 4–53
Power factor A–5
Power fail 3–33
Powerup Test 2–22
observations 2–33
Powerup, unattended start 4–21
error code 6–6
Preventative maintenance 6–9
Process variable A–6
Program mode 2–26, 2–33, 3–4, 3–5
Programming device 3–2
Proportional gain 3–24
PV source setting 3–24
PWM A–6

Q
Quick start enable 4–34

L2002 Inverter

R
Ratings label 1–4
Reactance A–6
Read/write copy unit 1–3
Ready input 4–34
Rectifier A–6
Reduced torque 3–18
Regenerative braking A–6
Regulation A–6
Regulatory agency approvals 1–4
Relay
alarm signal contacts 4–43
as intelligent output 4–36
Remote control 4–29
Reset function 3–60, 4–24
Restart Mode configuration 3–42
Reverse run command 4–12
Reverse torque A–6
Revision history xvii
RF noise filter 5–4
RJ-45 modular connector B–3
Rotor A–6
RPM 2–33
Run command 4–12
Run command source setting 2–28, 3–10, 4–
31, 4–33
Run mode 2–33, 3–5
Run signal 4–38
Running the motor 2–32
Run-time edits 3–5, 3–39, 4–22

S
Safety messages i
Saturation voltage A–6
Scaling 3–41
S-curve accel/decel 3–28
Second accel and decel 3–26
Second motor 4–17
Second stage output 4–46
Sensorless vector control A–6
Sepcial-Set 2nd motor 4–17
Serial port B–3
Service, warranty 6–16
Set 2nd motor 4–17, 4–58
Setpoint A–7
Single-phase power A–7
Sink/source input configuration 4–9
Slip
definition A–7
Software lock 3–5, 3–39, 4–22
Source/sink input configuration 2–5
Spare parts 6–11
Specifications
control logic signals 1–11, 4–6
derating curves 1–12
general 1–10
inverter 1–5
inverter label 1–4
Speed control 1–18, 1–22, 4–13
Speed pot 2–27
Squirrel cage A–7
Standard functions 3–10
Start frequency 3–41
Stator A–7
Stop command 4–12
Stop Mode configuration 3–42
Supply wiring 2–18
Switches, configuration 2–5
Switching frequency 3–41
Symbol definitions i
System description 2–7

Index–5

Index–6
T
Tachometer A–7
Technical support xviii
Term definitions A–2
Terminal/program source configuration 2–5,
2–27, 3–11
Terminals
arrangement 2–19
listing 4–7
torque specs xiii, 2–18
Termination resistor, network B–4
Thermal protection
inverter, error code 6–6
motor 4–25
Thermal switch A–7
Thermistor
definition A–7
error code 6–6
input terminal 4–25
input tuning 3–59
Three-phase power
definition A–7
motor phase connections 1–19
wiring precautions 2–20
Three-wire interface operation 4–26
Torque 1–19, A–8
Torque boost 3–18
Torque control algorithms 3–5, 3–18, 3–63
Torque specs, terminals xiii, 2–18
Transistor A–8
Trip events 3–7, 4–24
clearing 6–5
definition A–8
error codes 6–5
external input 4–20
history of 6–7
monitoring 6–5
Troubleshooting tips 6–3
Two-stage accel/decel 4–18

U
UL instructions xii
Unattended start protection 4–21
error code 6–6
Under-voltage alarm 3–34
Under-voltage trip 3–33
error code 6–5, 6–6
Unpacking 2–2
Up/Down functions 4–29

V
V/f control 3–18
Variable torque 3–18
Variable-frequency drives
introduction 1–18
Velocity profile 1–22
Ventilation 2–10, 2–22
Voltage gain 3–19
Voltage input 3–14

W
Warnings
general ix
index to... iv
operating procedures 4–3
troubleshooting 6–2
Warranty 6–16
Watt loss A–8
Wiring
access 2–6
analog inputs 4–53
gauge xiii, 2–17
inverter output 2–21
logic connectors 2–21, 4–6
power input 2–18
preparation 2–16
relay contacts 4–6
system diagram 4–5

Z
Zero-phase reactor 5–4

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract, Print high-res
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows)
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 7.2
Modify Date                     : 2006:09:29 01:06:48-04:00
Create Date                     : 2006:09:28 23:56:37Z
Metadata Date                   : 2006:09:29 01:06:48-04:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Hitachi L200 Series Inverter Instruction Manual
Creator                         : Bruce L. Beverly
Description                     : Inverters
Document ID                     : uuid:db2bf0ee-f2ab-474c-93fb-0ea32492ce17
Instance ID                     : uuid:17756564-aed3-499f-8da4-a1201f6b880e
Page Count                      : 304
Subject                         : Inverters
Author                          : Bruce L. Beverly

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Hitachi L2002 Users Manual L200 Series Inverter Instruction

L2002 to the manual 01e20bc0-e116-2bb4-e974-fd8f5ca0035b

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation